Physics questions with worked solutions
- In a screw gauge, five complete rotations of the circular scale move it linearly by 2.5 mm. If the circular s…
- In an experiment, a set of readings are 1.24 mm, 1.25 mm, 1.23 mm, 1.21 mm. The expected least count of the i…
- Assertion (A): If in five complete rotations of the circular scale the distance travelled on the main scale i…
- Using a screw gauge of pitch 0.1 cm and 50 divisions on its circular scale, the thickness of an object is mea…
- If the screw of a screw-gauge is given six rotations, it moves 3 mm on the main scale. If there are 50 divisi…
- The least count of the main scale of a screw gauge is 1 mm. The minimum number of divisions on its circular s…
- The least count of a screw gauge is 0.01 mm. If the pitch is increased by 75% and the number of divisions on…
- While measuring the diameter of a wire with a screw gauge, the main scale reads 1 mm and the circular scale r…
- In a screw gauge, five complete rotations move the screw 0.25 cm. There are 100 circular scale divisions. A w…
- A screw gauge gives, for the diameter of a wire, a main scale reading of 0 mm and a circular scale reading of…
- In a screw gauge, the reference line of the main scale coincides with the fifth division of the circular scal…
- A screw gauge of pitch 1 mm has 100 circular scale divisions. With nothing between the jaws, the zero of the…
- In a screw gauge, the fifth division of the circular scale coincides with the reference line when the ratchet…
- The pitch of a screw gauge is 1 mm and there are 100 circular scale divisions. With nothing between the jaws,…
- A screw gauge has 50 divisions on its circular scale. The circular scale is 4 units ahead of the pitch-scale…
- The pitch and the number of circular scale divisions of a screw gauge are 0.5 mm and 100. Tightened with no o…
- In a screw gauge there are 100 circular scale divisions and the main scale moves 0.5 mm per rotation. The zer…
- In a screw gauge, the zero of the circular scale lies 3 divisions above the horizontal pitch line when the st…
- To find the diameter of a wire with a screw gauge the observations are: (A) the screw moves 0.5 mm on the mai…
- A screw gauge of pitch 0.5 mm and 50 circular scale divisions measures a thin aluminium sheet. On contact of…
- Two full turns of the circular scale of a screw gauge cover 1 mm on the main scale. The circular scale has 50…
- Students A and B use two screw gauges of equal pitch and 100 circular divisions to measure the radius of a wi…
- The diameter of a wire, measured with a screw gauge of least count 0.001 cm, is 0.08 cm. Its length, measured…
- A screw gauge of pitch 0.5 mm measures the diameter of a uniform wire of length 6.8 cm; the main scale reads…
- A tiny metallic rectangular sheet has length and breadth 5 mm and 2.5 mm. Using a specially designed screw ga…
- In a vernier callipers, 50 vernier scale divisions are equal to 48 main scale divisions. If one main scale di…
- Given below are two statements. Statement-I: In a vernier callipers, one vernier scale division is always sma…
- A vernier callipers has 20 divisions on the vernier scale which coincide with 19 divisions on the main scale.…
- In a vernier calliper, when both jaws touch, the zero of the vernier scale shifts to the left and its 4th div…
- The least count of a vernier caliper is 1/(20N) cm. One main scale division is 1 mm. The number of main scale…
- One main scale division of a vernier caliper is m units. If the nth division of the main scale coincides with…
- 10 divisions on the main scale of a vernier calliper coincide with 11 divisions on the vernier scale. If each…
- If n main scale divisions coincide with (n+1) vernier scale divisions and each centimetre on the main scale i…
- One main scale division of a vernier callipers is a cm and the nth division of the vernier scale coincides wi…
- N divisions on the main scale of a vernier callipers coincide with (N+1) divisions of the vernier scale. If e…
- In an experiment angles are measured with an instrument in which 29 divisions of the main scale exactly coinc…
- In a vernier callipers, each cm on the main scale is divided into 20 equal parts. The tenth vernier scale div…
- In a vernier callipers, when both jaws touch, the zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the main scale…
- When both jaws of a vernier callipers touch, the vernier zero is to the right of the main scale zero and the…
- Assertion (A): In a vernier callipers, if a positive zero error exists, the reading taken will be more than t…
- In a vernier callipers of least count 0.1 mm, when the jaws are joined the vernier zero is to the right of th…
- A vernier scale has a positive zero error of 0.2 mm. In a measurement the vernier zero lies between 8.5 cm an…
- The least count of the main scale of a vernier callipers is 1 mm; its vernier has 10 divisions coinciding wit…
- One main scale division of a vernier callipers is 1 mm and 10 vernier divisions equal 9 main scale divisions.…
- A vernier callipers has 9 main scale divisions equal to 10 vernier divisions, with 1 main scale division =1 m…
- In a vernier callipers, 10 vernier divisions equal 9 main scale divisions. With the jaws touching, the vernie…
- A steel ball's diameter is measured with a vernier callipers whose main scale is divided in 0.1 cm and whose…
- A vernier callipers has a vernier constant of 0.1 mm and a zero error of -0.05 cm. Measuring a sphere, the ma…
- Using a travelling microscope (50 vernier divisions =49 MSD, 20 main scale divisions per cm) the readings are…
- A sphere's diameter is measured with a vernier caliper whose 9 main scale divisions equal 10 vernier division…
- A student measures a pencil's diameter as 5.50, 5.55, 5.54, 5.65 mm. The average is 5.5375 mm and the standar…
- Identify the physical quantity that cannot be measured using spherometer
- Suppose two planets (spherical in shape) of radii R and 2R, but masses M and 9M respectively, have a centre t…
- The escape velocity from a spherical planet A is 10 km/s. The escape velocity from another planet B, whose de…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- An object is kept at rest at a distance 3R above the earth's surface, where R is the earth's radius. The mini…
- The earth has 8 times the mass and 2 times the radius of a planet. If the escape velocity from the earth is 1…
- To project a body of mass m from the earth's surface to infinity, the required kinetic energy is (assume the…
- The escape velocity of a body from the earth is 11.2 km/s. If the radius of a planet is one-third the radius…
- The mass of the moon is 1/(144) times the mass of a planet and its diameter is 1/(16) times the diameter of t…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- The ratio of escape velocity of a planet to the escape velocity of earth will be (Given: mass of the planet i…
- A planet having mass 9Mₑ and radius 4Rₑ, where Mₑ and Rₑ are mass and radius of earth respectively, has escap…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: For a planet, if the ratio of mass of the planet to its radius i…
- If earth has a mass nine times and radius twice to that of a planet P, then (Vₑ)/3√x m s⁻¹ will be the minimu…
- The escape velocities of two planets A and B are in the ratio 1:2. If the ratio of their radii respectively i…
- A body is projected vertically upwards from the surface of earth with a velocity equal to one third of escape…
- A body of mass m is projected with velocity λ vₑ in vertically upward direction from the surface of the earth…
- The escape velocity of a body on a planet A is 12 km s⁻¹. The escape velocity of the body on another planet B…
- The masses and radii of the earth and moon are (M₁,R₁) and (M₂,R₂) respectively. Their centres are at a dista…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- Planet A has mass M and radius R. Planet B has half the mass and half the radius of planet A. If the escape v…
- A rocket has to be launched from earth in such a way that it never returns. If E is the minimum energy delive…
- Two stars of masses 3×10³¹ kg each, at a distance 2×10¹¹ m, rotate in a plane about their common centre of ma…
- A planet in a distant solar system is 10 times more massive than the earth and its radius is 10 times smaller…
- The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards from the surface of earth is 11 km/s. If the body…
- The escape velocity of a body depends upon mass as
- The kinetic energy needed to project a body of mass m from the earth surface (radius R) to infinity is
- The radius in kilometre to which the present radius of the earth (R=6400 km) is to be compressed so that the…
- The initial velocity vᵢ required to project a body vertically upward from the surface of the earth to reach a…
- An asteroid is moving directly towards the centre of the earth. When at a distance of 10R (R is the radius of…
- If one wants to remove all the mass of the earth to infinity in order to break it up completely, the amount o…
- A body of mass m is taken from the surface of the Earth to a height equal to twice the radius of the Earth Rₑ…
- Three masses 200 kg, 300 kg and 400 kg are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side 20 m. Th…
- An astronaut takes a ball of mass m from earth to space. He throws the ball into a circular orbit about earth…
- The gravitational potential at a point above the surface of earth is -5.12×10⁷ J/kg and the acceleration due…
- If V is the gravitational potential due to a sphere of uniform density on its surface, then its value at the…
- A body is released from a height equal to the radius R of the earth. The velocity of the body when it strikes…
- The gravitational field in a region is given as -K/(r²). Taking the reference point to be at r=2 cm with grav…
- An object of mass 1 kg is taken to a height from the surface of the earth which is equal to three times the r…
- Four spheres each of mass m form a square of side d, as shown in the figure. A fifth sphere of mass M is situ…
- Inside a uniform spherical shell (A) the gravitational field is zero. (B) the gravitational potential is zero…
- A mass of 50 kg is placed at the centre of a uniform spherical shell of mass 100 kg and radius 50 m. If the g…
- On the x-axis, at a distance x from the origin, the gravitational field due to a mass distribution is (Ax)/((…
- Two planets have masses M and 16M and their radii are a and 2a respectively. The separation between the centr…
- From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R, a spherical portion of radius R/2 is removed as shown in the figu…
- Which of the following most closely depicts the correct variation of the gravitational potential V(r) due to…
- Two hypothetical planets of masses m₁ and m₂ are at rest when they are at infinite distance apart. Because of…
- The gravitational field in a region is given by E⃗=(5 N/kg)î+(12 N/kg)ĵ. If the potential at the origin is…
- The mass of a spaceship is 1000 kg. It is to be launched from the earth's surface out into free space. The va…
- Two bodies of masses m and 4m are placed at a distance r. The gravitational potential at the point on the lin…
- A particle of mass 10 g is kept on the surface of a uniform sphere of mass 100 kg and radius 10 cm. Find the…
- If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth's surface, the gain in the potential energy of an object…
- The energy required to move a body of mass m from an orbit of radius 2R to an orbit of radius 3R is
- A body of mass 2M splits into four masses m, M-m, m, M-m, which are rearranged to form a square as shown in t…
- Net gravitational force at the centre of a square is found to be F₁ when four particles of masses M, 2M, 3M a…
- Three equal masses m are kept at the vertices A, B and C of an equilateral triangle of side a in free space.…
- A metal wire of uniform mass density having length L and mass M is bent to form a semicircular arc, and a par…
- A light planet is revolving around a massive star in a circular orbit of radius R with a period of revolution…
- Four identical particles of mass m are kept at the four corners of a square, as shown in the figure. If the g…
- Two identical particles, each of mass m, go round a circle of radius a under the action of their mutual gravi…
- Two particles of equal mass m move in a circle of radius r under the action of their mutual gravitational att…
- Three identical particles A, B and C of mass 100 kg each are placed in a straight line with AB=BC=13 m. The g…
- Two objects of equal masses placed at a certain distance from each other attract each other with a force F. I…
- Four particles, each of mass M, move along a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual gravitationa…
- Consider a binary star system of star A and star B with masses m_A and m_B revolving in a circular orbit of r…
- Two identical particles of mass 1 kg each go round a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual grav…
- Four identical particles of equal mass 1 kg are made to move along the circumference of a circle of radius 1…
- Two stars of masses m and 2m at a distance d rotate about their common centre of mass in free space. The peri…
- A ring of mass m and a sphere of mass M have the same radius R, and the distance between their centres is √8R…
- Four identical particles of mass M are located at the corners of a square of side a, as shown in the figure.…
- A test particle is moving in a circular orbit in the gravitational field produced by a mass density ρ(r)=K/(r…
- A straight rod of length L extends from x=a to x=L+a. The gravitational force it exerts on a point mass m at…
- A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular orbit of radius R under a central force that is inver…
- Take the mean distance of the moon and the sun from the earth to be 0.4×10⁶ km and 150×10⁶ km respectively. T…
- Two point masses m₁=fM and m₂=(1-f)M, with f<1, are in outer space far from the gravitational influence of ot…
- Suppose the gravitational force varies inversely as the nth power of distance. Then the time period of a plan…
- Two spherical bodies of mass M and 5M and radii R and 2R respectively are released in free space with an init…
- Three identical spheres of mass m are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a, as shown i…
- The height, in terms of the radius of the earth R, at which the acceleration due to gravity becomes g/9, wher…
- A 90 kg body placed at a distance 2R from the surface of the earth experiences a gravitational pull of (take…
- Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density, a body weighed 300 N on the surface of the earth.…
- At what distance above and below the surface of the earth will a body have the same weight? (Take the radius…
- The weight of a body on the surface of the earth is 100 N. The gravitational force on it when taken to a heig…
- The weight of a body on the earth is 400 N. Then the weight of the body when it is taken to a depth half of t…
- The acceleration due to gravity at a height h above the earth, if h R (radius of the earth), is given by
- Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density, the weight of a body at a depth d=R/2 from the sur…
- Given below are two statements. Statement I: Acceleration due to gravity is different at different places on…
- The weight of a body at the surface of the earth is 18 N. The weight of the body at an altitude of 3200 km ab…
- Given below are two statements. Statement I: Acceleration due to the earth's gravity decreases as you go up o…
- At a certain depth d below the surface of the earth, the value of acceleration due to gravity becomes four ti…
- A body of weight W is projected vertically upwards from the earth's surface to reach a height above the earth…
- The approximate height from the surface of the earth at which the weight of a body becomes 1/3 of its weight…
- The height of a point P above the surface of the earth is equal to the diameter of the earth. The value of ac…
- The variation of acceleration due to gravity g with distance r from the centre of the earth is correctly repr…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I : The law of gravitation holds good for any pair of bodies in the…
- If R_E is the radius of the Earth, then the ratio between the acceleration due to gravity at a depth r below…
- The value of the acceleration due to gravity is g₁ at a height h=R/2 (R = radius of the earth) from the surfa…
- The value of the acceleration due to gravity at the Earth's surface is 9.8 m s⁻². The altitude above its surf…
- The change in the value of g at a height h above the surface of the earth is the same as at a depth d below t…
- If the acceleration due to gravity experienced by a point mass at a height h above the surface of the earth i…
- In the reported figure of the earth, the value of acceleration due to gravity is the same at point A and at p…
- A mixture of carbon dioxide and oxygen has volume 8310 cm³, temperature 300 K, pressure 100 kPa and mass 13.2…
- An ideal gas undergoes a process maintaining relation between pressure (P) and volume (V) as P = Pₒ(1 + (Vₒ/V…
- An ideal gas at pressure P and temperature T is expanding such that PT³ = constant. The coefficient of volume…
- The P-T diagram of an ideal gas having three different densities ρ₁,ρ₂,ρ₃ (in three different cases) is shown…
- Two vessels A and B are of the same size and are at the same temperature. A contains 1 g of hydrogen and B co…
- (P + a/(V²))(V - b) = RT represents the equation of state of some gases, where P is the pressure, V is the vo…
- For three low density gases A, B, C, pressure versus temperature graphs are plotted while keeping them at con…
- A bicycle tyre is filled with air having pressure of 270 kPa at 27°C. The approximate pressure of the air in…
- The pressure (P) and temperature (T) relationship of an ideal gas obeys the equation PT² = constant. The volu…
- A mixture of hydrogen and oxygen has volume 2000 cm³, temperature 300 K, pressure 100 kPa and mass 0.76 g. Th…
- For a perfect gas, two pressures P₁ and P₂ are shown in the figure, drawn on a volume-temperature plot. The g…
- A vessel contains 16 g of hydrogen and 128 g of oxygen at standard temperature and pressure. The volume of th…
- A cylindrical container of volume 4.0 × 10⁻³ m³ contains one mole of hydrogen and two moles of carbon dioxide…
- A mixture of hydrogen and oxygen has volume 500 cm³, temperature 300 K, pressure 400 kPa and mass 0.76 g. The…
- Which of the following graphs represent the behaviour of an ideal gas? Symbols have their usual meaning.
- The volume V of an enclosure contains a mixture of three gases, 16 g of oxygen, 28 g of nitrogen and 44 g of…
- When an air bubble of radius r rises from the bottom to the surface of a lake, its radius becomes 5r/4. Takin…
- Which of the following shows the correct relationship between the pressure 'P' and density ρ of an ideal gas…
- A gas of certain mass filled in a closed cylinder at a pressure of 3.23 kPa has temperature 50°C. The gas is…
- When a gas filled in a closed vessel is heated by raising the temperature by 1°C, its pressure increases by 0…
- The volume V of a given mass of monoatomic gas changes with temperature T according to the relation V = KT^2/…
- A 0.5 kg mass is in contact against the inner wall of a cylindrical drum of radius 4 m rotating about its ver…
- A car moving with a speed of 54 km/h takes a turn of radius 20 m. A simple pendulum is suspended from the cei…
- A large drum having radius R is spinning around its axis with angular velocity ω, as shown in figure. The min…
- A car of mass m moves on a banked road having radius r and banking angle θ. To avoid slipping from banked roa…
- A car of 800 kg is taking turn on a banked road of radius 300 m and angle of banking 30°. If coefficient of s…
- A ball of mass 0.5 kg is attached to a string of length 50 cm. The ball is rotated on a horizontal circular p…
- A train is moving with a speed of 12 m/s on rails which are 1.5 m apart. To negotiate a curve of radius 400 m…
- If the radius of curvature of the path of two particles of same mass are in the ratio 3:4, then in order to h…
- A stone of mass 900 g is tied to a string and moved in a vertical circle of radius 1 m making 10 rpm. The ten…
- A coin is placed on a disc. The coefficient of friction between the coin and the disc is μ. If the distance o…
- A small block of mass 100 g is tied to a spring of spring constant 7.5 N/m and length 20 cm. The other end of…
- A child of mass 5 kg is going round a merry-go-round that makes 1 rotation in 3.14 s. The radius of the merry…
- A coin placed on a rotating table just slips when it is placed at a distance of 1 cm from the center. If the…
- A vehicle of mass 200 kg is moving along a levelled curved road of radius 70 m with angular velocity of 0.2 r…
- A body of mass 200 g is tied to a spring of spring constant 12.5 N/m, while the other end of spring is fixed…
- A car is moving with a constant speed of 20 m/s in a circular horizontal track of radius 40 m. A bob is suspe…
- A car is moving on a horizontal curved road with radius 50 m. The approximate maximum speed of car will be, i…
- A stone of mass 1 kg is tied to end of a massless string of length 1 m. If the breaking tension of the string…
- A smooth circular groove has a smooth vertical wall as shown in figure. A block of mass m moves against the w…
- A boy ties a stone of mass 100 g to the end of a 2 m long string and whirls it around in a horizontal plane.…
- A disc with a flat small bottom beaker placed on it at a distance R from its center is revolving about an axi…
- For a particle in uniform circular motion, the acceleration a⃗ at any point P(R,θ) on the circular path of ra…
- A ball is released from rest from point P of a smooth semi-spherical vessel as shown in figure. The ratio of…
- One end of a massless spring of spring constant k and natural length l₀ is fixed while the other end is conne…
- The normal reaction N for a vehicle of 800 kg mass, negotiating a turn on a 30° banked road at maximum possib…
- A block of 200 g mass moves with a uniform speed in a horizontal circular groove, with vertical side walls of…
- Statement I : A cyclist is moving on an unbanked road with a speed of 7 km h⁻¹ and takes a sharp circular tur…
- A modern grand-prix racing car of mass m is travelling on a flat track in a circular arc of radius R with a s…
- A particle is moving with uniform speed along the circumference of a circle of radius R under the action of a…
- A spring mass system (mass m, spring constant k and natural length l) rests in equilibrium on a horizontal di…
- A uniform rod of length l is being rotated in a horizontal plane with a constant angular speed about an axis…
- A smooth wire of length 2π r is bent into a circle and kept in a vertical plane. A bead can slide smoothly on…
- A disc rotates about its axis of symmetry in a horizontal plane at a steady rate of 3.5 revolutions per secon…
- A conical pendulum of length 1 m makes an angle θ=45° w.r.t. Z-axis and moves in a circle in the XY plane. Th…
- Concrete mixture is made by mixing cement, stone and sand in a rotating cylindrical drum. If the drum rotates…
- An annular ring with inner and outer radii R₁ and R₂ is rolling without slipping with a uniform angular speed…
- The minimum velocity (in m s⁻¹) with which a car driver must traverse a flat curve of radius 150 m and coeffi…
- A tube of length 1 m is filled completely with an ideal liquid of mass 2M, and closed at both ends. The tube…
- A car is moving on a circular path of radius 600 m such that the magnitudes of the tangential acceleration an…
- A stone tied to 180 cm long string at its end is making 28 revolutions in horizontal circle in every minute.…
- A curved in a level road has a radius 75 m. The maximum speed of a car turning this curved road can be 30 m/s…
- A small bob tied at one end of a thin string of length 1 m is describing a vertical circle so that the maximu…
- The time taken by a block of mass m to slide down from the highest point to the lowest point on a rough incli…
- Two blocks (P and Q) with respectively masses 2 kg and 1.5 kg are joined by a massless thread. These blocks a…
- A block of mass 5 kg is moving on an inclined plane which makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal. Friction…
- A cubic block of mass m is sliding down on an inclined plane at 60° with an acceleration of g/2, the value of…
- A 2 kg brick begins to slide over a surface which is inclined at an angle of 45° with respect to horizontal a…
- A heavy box of mass 50 kg is moving on a horizontal surface. If co-efficient of kinetic friction between the…
- A given object takes n times the time to slide down 45° rough inclined plane as it takes the time to slide do…
- Consider a block and trolley system as shown in figure. If the coefficient of kinetic friction between the tr…
- Given below are two statements : Statement (I) : The limiting force of static friction depends on the area of…
- A block of mass m is placed on a surface having vertical cross-section given by y=(x²)/4. If coefficient of f…
- A block of mass 5 kg is placed on a rough inclined surface as shown in the figure. If F⃗₁ is the force requir…
- A bullet of mass 0.1 kg moving horizontally with speed 400 m s⁻¹ hits a wooden block of mass 3.9 kg kept on a…
- A block of mass 5 kg is placed at rest on a table of rough surface. Now, if a force of 30 N is applied in the…
- As shown in the figure, a block of mass 10 kg lying on a horizontal surface is pulled by a force F acting at…
- Consider a block kept on an inclined plane (inclined at 45°) as shown in the figure. If the force required to…
- A block of mass m slides down the plane inclined at angle 30° with an acceleration g/4. The value of coeffici…
- A body of mass 10 kg is moving with an initial speed of 20 m/s. The body stops after 5 s due to friction betw…
- A bag is gently dropped on a conveyor belt moving at a speed of 2 m/s. The coefficient of friction between th…
- A block of mass M slides down on a rough inclined plane with constant velocity. The angle made by the incline…
- A block of mass 10 kg starts sliding on a surface with an initial velocity of 9.8 m s⁻¹. The coefficient of f…
- A system of two blocks of masses m=2 kg and M=8 kg is placed on a smooth table as shown in figure. The coeffi…
- A block of mass 40 kg slides over a surface, when a mass of 4 kg is suspended through an inextensible massles…
- A 2 kg block is pushed against a vertical wall by applying a horizontal force of 50 N. The coefficient of sta…
- A block of mass m slides along a floor while a force of magnitude F is applied to it at an angle θ as shown i…
- An insect is at the bottom of a hemispherical ditch of radius 1 m. It crawls up the ditch but starts slipping…
- Two blocks A and B of masses m_A=1 kg and m_B=3 kg are kept on the table as shown in figure. The coefficient…
- A block of mass 5 kg is (i) pushed in case (A) and (ii) pulled in case (B), by a force F=20 N, making an angl…
- A block kept on a rough inclined plane, as shown in the figure, remains at rest upto a maximum force 2 N down…
- Two masses m₁=5 kg and m₂=10 kg, connected by an inextensible string over a frictionless pulley, are moving a…
- Given in the figure are two blocks A and B of weight 20 N and 100 N, respectively. These are being pressed ag…
- A block of mass m is placed on a surface with a vertical cross section given by y=(x³)/6. If the coefficient…
- A block A of mass 4 kg is placed on another block B of mass 5 kg, and the block B rests on a smooth horizonta…
- A heavy box is to be dragged along a rough horizontal floor. To do so, person A pushes it at an angle 30° fro…
- A body starts from rest on a long inclined plane of slope 45°. The coefficient of friction between the body a…
- A block of weight W rests on a horizontal floor with coefficient of static friction μ. It is desired to make…
- Consider a car moving on a straight road with a speed of 100 m/s. The distance at which car can be stopped is…
- The upper half of an inclined plane with inclination φ is perfectly smooth while the lower half is rough. A b…
- A block rests on a rough inclined plane making an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient of static…
- A marble block of mass 2 kg lying on ice when given a velocity of 6 m/s is stopped by friction in 10 s. Then…
- A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block stationary against a wall. The coefficient of fr…
- A block takes t time to slide down a plane inclined at 45° to the horizontal. If the surface is made smooth (…
- In the given figure the blocks A, B and C weigh 4 kg, 6 kg and 8 kg respectively. The co-efficient of sliding…
- A uniform chain of 6 m length is placed on a table such that a part of its length is hanging over the edge of…
- When a body slides down from rest along a smooth inclined plane making an angle of 30° with the horizontal, i…
- The coefficient of static friction between two blocks is 0.5 and the table is smooth. The maximum horizontal…
- Two blocks (m=0.5 kg and M=4.5 kg) are arranged on a horizontal frictionless table as shown in figure. The co…
- A boy of mass 4 kg is standing on a piece of wood having mass 5 kg. If the coefficient of friction between th…
- A body of mass 1 kg rests on a horizontal floor with which it has a coefficient of static friction 1/√3. It i…
- An inclined plane is bent in such a way that the vertical cross-section is given by y=(x²)/4 where y is in ve…
- The coefficient of static friction between a wooden block of mass 0.5 kg and a vertical rough wall is 0.2. Th…
- As shown in figure, a block of mass √3 kg is kept on a horizontal rough surface of coefficient of friction 1/…
- A small block starts slipping down from a point B on an inclined plane AB, which is making an angle θ with th…
- At t=0, a body of mass 100 g starts moving under the influence of a force (5î+10ĵ)N. After 2 s its position…
- A 4 kg mass moves under the influence of a force F⃗=(4t³î-3tĵ)N, where t is the time in seconds. If the mas…
- In an experiment the values of two spring constants were measured as k₁=(10±0.2) N/m and k₂=(20±0.3) N/m. If…
- A bead P slides on a frictionless semi-circular string ACB and is at point S at t=0; at this instant the hori…
- A spring of force constant 15 N/m is cut into two pieces. If the ratio of their lengths is 1:3, then the forc…
- A flexible chain of mass m hangs between two fixed points at the same level. The inclination of the chain wit…
- A particle of mass m falls from rest through a resistive medium having resistive force F=-kv, where v is the…
- A block of mass 1 kg, moving along x with speed vᵢ=10 m/s, enters a rough region ranging from x=0.1 m to x=1.…
- An object with mass 500 g moves along the x-axis with speed v=4√x m/s. The force acting on the object is
- A massless spring gets elongated by amount x₁ under a tension of 5 N. Its elongation is x₂ under the tension…
- A balloon and its contents having mass M is moving up with acceleration a. The mass that must be released fro…
- A wooden block, initially at rest on the ground, is pushed by a force which increases linearly with time t. W…
- A wooden block of mass 5 kg rests on a soft horizontal floor. When an iron cylinder of mass 25 kg is placed o…
- A particle moves in the x-y plane under the influence of a force F⃗ such that its linear momentum is p⃗(t)=î…
- A body of weight 200 N is suspended from a tree branch through a chain of mass 10 kg. The branch pulls the ch…
- A player caught a cricket ball of mass 150 g moving at a speed of 20 m/s. If the catching process is complete…
- A body of mass 4 kg experiences two forces F₁⃗=5î+8ĵ+7k̂ and F₂⃗=3î-4ĵ-3k̂. The acceleration acting on th…
- Three blocks A, B and C are pulled on a horizontal smooth surface by a force of 80 N as shown in the figure.…
- At any instant the velocity of a particle of mass 500 g is (2tî+3t²ĵ)m s⁻¹. If the force acting on the part…
- A body of mass 500 g moves along the x-axis such that its velocity varies with displacement x according to th…
- Three forces F₁=10 N, F₂=8 N, F₃=6 N are acting on a particle of mass 5 kg. The forces F₂ and F₃ are applied…
- The position vector of a particle related to time t is given by r⃗=(10tî+15t²ĵ+7k̂)m. The direction of net…
- Given below are two statements. Statement I : An elevator can go up or down with uniform speed when its weigh…
- A force acts for 20 s on a body of mass 20 kg, starting from rest, after which the force ceases and then body…
- As shown in figure, a 70 kg garden roller is pushed with a force of F⃗=200 N at an angle of 30° with horizont…
- A monkey of mass 50 kg climbs on a rope which can withstand the tension (T) of 350 N. If monkey initially cli…
- A person is standing in an elevator. In which situation, he experiences weight loss?
- A block of mass M placed inside a box descends vertically with acceleration a. The block exerts a force equal…
- A force F⃗=(40î+10ĵ) N acts on a body of mass 5 kg. If the body starts from rest, its position vector r⃗ at…
- Two masses A and B, each of mass M are fixed together by a massless spring. A force acts on the mass B as sho…
- A small ball of mass m is thrown upward with velocity u from the ground. The ball experiences a resistive for…
- A ball is thrown upward with an initial velocity V₀ from the surface of the earth. The motion of the ball is…
- A bullet of mass 20 g has an initial speed of 1 m s⁻¹, just before it starts penetrating a mud wall of thickn…
- A particle of mass m is acted upon by a force F given by the empirical law F=R/(t²)v(t). If this law is to be…
- A particle of mass m is at rest at the origin at time t=0. It is subjected to a force F(t)=Fₒe^-bt in the x d…
- A block of mass m is connected to another block of mass M by a spring (massless) of spring constant k. The bl…
- A particle of mass 0.3 kg is subjected to a force F=-kx with k=15 N/m. What will be its initial acceleration…
- A light spring balance hangs from the hook of the other light spring balance and a block of mass M kg hangs f…
- A block of mass M is pulled along a horizontal frictionless surface by a rope of mass m. If a force P is appl…
- A spring balance is attached to the ceiling of a lift. A man hangs his bag on the spring and the spring reads…
- Three identical blocks of masses m=2 kg are drawn by a force F=10.2 N with an acceleration of 0.6 m s⁻² on a…
- One end of a massless rope, which passes over a massless and frictionless pulley P is tied to a hook C while…
- A lift is moving down with acceleration a. A man in the lift drops a ball inside the lift. The acceleration o…
- The length of a light string is 1.4 m when the tension on it is 5 N. If the tension increases to 7 N, the len…
- An elastic spring under tension of 3 N has a length a. Its length is b under tension 2 N. For its length (3a-…
- A force on an object of mass 100 g is (10î+5ĵ) N. The position of that object at t=2 s is (aî+bĵ) m after…
- A car is moving on a plane inclined at 30° to the horizontal with an acceleration of 10 m s⁻² parallel to the…
- A body of mass 2 kg moves under a force of (2î+3ĵ+5k̂) N. It starts from rest and was at the origin initial…
- A bullet of mass 0.1 kg is fired on a wooden block to pierce through it, but it stops after moving a distance…
- A person standing on a spring balance inside a stationary lift measures 60 kg. The weight of that person if t…
- A steel block of 10 kg rests on a horizontal floor as shown. When three iron cylinders are placed on it as sh…
- Three masses m₁=4 kg, m₂=4 kg and m₃=6 kg are suspended from a fixed smooth frictionless pulley as shown in t…
- The velocity at which the 6 kg mass shown in the figure strikes the ground when it is released from a height…
- A light string passing over a smooth light pulley connects two blocks of masses m₁ and m₂ (where m₂>m₁). If t…
- A light unstretchable string passing over a smooth light pulley connects two blocks of masses m₁ and m₂. If t…
- All surfaces shown in the figure are assumed to be frictionless and the pulleys and the string are light. The…
- As per given figure, a weightless pulley P is attached on a double inclined frictionless surfaces. The tensio…
- Three masses M=100 kg, m₁=10 kg and m₂=20 kg are arranged in a system as shown in figure. All the surfaces ar…
- Two masses M₁ and M₂ are tied together at the two ends of a light inextensible string that passes over a fric…
- A uniform metal chain of mass m and length L passes over a massless and frictionless pulley. It is released f…
- In the arrangement shown in figure a₁, a₂, a₃ and a₄ are the accelerations of masses m₁, m₂, m₃ and m₄ respec…
- The boxes of masses 2 kg and 8 kg are connected by a massless string passing over smooth pulleys. Calculate t…
- Two masses m₁=5 kg and m₂=4.8 kg tied to a string are hanging over a light frictionless pulley. What is the a…
- Three blocks M₁, M₂, M₃ having masses 4 kg, 6 kg and 10 kg respectively are hanging from a smooth pulley usin…
- A system of 10 balls each of mass 2 kg are connected via massless and unstretchable string. The system is all…
- A hanging mass M is connected to a four times bigger mass by using a string-pulley arrangement, as shown in t…
- Two liquids A and B have θ_A and θ_B as contact angles in a capillary tube. If K=(cos θ_A)/(cos θ_B), then id…
- Given below are two statements : one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). As…
- Surface tensions of two liquids having the same density, T₁ and T₂, are measured using the capillary rise met…
- When a part of a straight capillary tube is placed vertically in a liquid, the liquid rises upto a certain he…
- A capillary tube of radius 0.1 mm is partly dipped in water (surface tension 70 dyn cm⁻¹ and glass-water cont…
- The height of the liquid column raised in a capillary tube of certain radius when dipped vertically in liquid…
- Two narrow bores of diameter 5.0 mm and 8.0 mm are joined together to form a U-shaped tube open at both ends.…
- A capillary tube made of glass, of radius 0.15 mm, is dipped vertically in a beaker filled with methylene iod…
- If M is the mass of water that rises in a capillary tube of radius r, then the mass of water which will rise…
- The ratio of surface tensions of mercury and water is given to be 7.5, while the ratio of their densities is…
- A capillary tube A is dipped in water. Another identical tube B is dipped in a soap-water solution. Each choi…
- A 20 cm long capillary tube is dipped in water. The water rises up to 8 cm. If the entire arrangement is put…
- When a long glass capillary tube of radius 0.015 cm is dipped in a liquid, the liquid rises to a height of 15…
- A drop of liquid of density ρ is floating half immersed in a liquid of density σ and surface tension 7.5×10⁻⁴…
- A small spherical droplet of density d is floating exactly half immersed in a liquid of density ρ and surface…
- On heating water, bubbles formed at the bottom of the vessel detach and rise. Take the bubbles to be spheres…
- Eight mercury drops, each of radius r, coalesce to form a bigger drop. The surface energy released in this pr…
- Two water drops, each of radius r, coalesce to form a bigger drop. If T is the surface tension, the surface e…
- A big drop is formed by coalescing 1000 small droplets of water. The surface energy will become
- If 1000 droplets of water of surface tension 0.07 N m⁻¹, each having the same radius 1 mm, combine to form a…
- Two small drops of mercury, each of radius R, coalesce to form a single large drop. The ratio of the total su…
- A large number of water drops, each of radius r, combine to form a drop of radius R. If the surface tension i…
- A large number of droplets, each of radius r, coalesce to form a bigger drop of radius R. An engineer designs…
- Two mercury drops (each of radius r) merge to form a bigger drop. The surface energy of the bigger drop, if T…
- A big drop is formed by coalescing 1000 small droplets of water. The ratio of the surface energy of the 1000…
- A big drop is formed by coalescing 1000 identical drops of water. If E₁ is the total surface energy of the 10…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I : Pressure of a fluid is exerted only on a solid surface in conta…
- Given below are two statements : Statement I : Hot water flows faster than cold water. Statement II : Soap wa…
- Consider the following statements : A. Surface tension arises due to the extra energy of the molecules at the…
- Given below are two statements: Statement-I : The contact angle between a solid and a liquid is a property of…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I : When a capillary tube is dipped into a liquid, the liquid neith…
- Given below are two statements : Statement (I) : Viscosity of gases is greater than that of liquids. Statemen…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I : If a capillary tube is immersed first in cold water and then in…
- A thin liquid film is formed between a U-shaped wire and a light slider, and it supports a weight of 1.5×10⁻²…
- A liquid drop of diameter 2 mm breaks into 512 droplets. The change in surface energy is α×10⁻⁶ J. The value…
- The amount of work done to break a big water drop of radius R into 27 small drops of equal radius is 10 J. Th…
- A small liquid drop of radius R is divided into 27 identical liquid drops. If the surface tension is T, then…
- A mercury drop of radius 10⁻³ m is broken into 125 equal-sized droplets. The surface tension of mercury is 0.…
- A water drop of diameter 2 cm is broken into 64 equal droplets. The surface tension of water is 0.075 N m⁻¹.…
- A spherical drop of liquid splits into 1000 identical spherical drops. If uᵢ is the total surface energy of t…
- The surface tension of a soap bubble is 0.03 N m⁻¹. The work done in increasing the diameter of the bubble fr…
- The surface tension of a soap bubble is 2.0×10⁻² N m⁻¹. The work done to increase the radius of the soap bubb…
- Work done in increasing the size of a soap bubble from a radius of 3 cm to 5 cm is nearly (surface tension of…
- The surface tension of a soap solution is 3.5×10⁻² N m⁻¹. The work required to increase the radius of a soap…
- A soap bubble of surface tension 0.04 N m⁻¹ is blown to a diameter of 7 cm. If (15000-x) μJ of work is done i…
- A soap bubble is blown to a diameter of 7 cm. Then 36960 erg of work is done in blowing it further. If the su…
- The surface tension of a soap solution is 3.5×10⁻² N m⁻¹. The amount of work required to increase the radius…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I : (A) A force that restores an elastic body of unit area to its original st…
- Given below are two statements : one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). As…
- Figure represents the extension Δ l of a wire of length 1 m, suspended from the ceiling of a room at one end…
- As shown in the figure, in an experiment to determine Young's modulus of a wire, the extension-load curve is…
- In an experiment to determine the Young's modulus of a wire of length exactly 1 m, the extension in the lengt…
- In an experiment to determine the Young's modulus, steel wires of five different lengths (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 m)…
- The strain-stress plot for materials A, B, C and D is shown in the figure. Which material has the largest You…
- Given below are two statements : one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). As…
- A steel wire having a radius of 2.0 mm, carrying a load of 4 kg, is hanging from a ceiling. Given that g=3.1π…
- A man grows into a giant such that his linear dimensions increase by a factor of 9. Assuming that his density…
- A metal block of mass m is suspended from a rigid support through a metal wire of diameter 14 mm. The tensile…
- The Young's modulus of a steel wire of radius r and length L is Y. If the radius r and the length L of the wi…
- Young's modulus of the material of a wire of length L and cross-sectional area A is Y. If the length of the w…
- If the length of a wire is doubled and its radius is halved, then the Young's modulus of the material of the…
- With rise in temperature, the Young's modulus of elasticity
- A particle is moving along the x-axis with its coordinate with time t given by x(t) = 10 + 8t - 3t². Another…
- The velocity of a particle is given as ⃗v = -x̂i + 2ŷj - ẑk m/s. The magnitude of acceleration at point (1,…
- The position vector of a moving body at any instant of time is given as ⃗r = (5t²̂i - 5t̂j) m. The magnitude…
- The co-ordinates of a particle moving in x-y plane are given by x = 2 + 4t, y = 3t + 8t². The motion of the p…
- Position of an ant (S in metres) moving in Y-Z plane is given by ⃗S = 2t²̂j + 5̂k (where t is in second). The…
- At time t = 0, a particle starts travelling from a height 7̂z cm in a plane keeping z coordinate constant. At…
- Motion of a particle in x-y plane is described by a set of following equations x = 4 sin (π/2 - ω t) m and y…
- A mosquito is moving with a velocity ⃗v = 0.5t²̂i + 3t̂j + 9̂k m/s and accelerating in uniform conditions. Wh…
- Starting from the origin at time t = 0, with initial velocity 5̂j m s⁻¹, a particle moves in the x-y plane wi…
- A particle moves such that its position vector ⃗r(t) = cos ω t ̂i + sin ω t ̂j where ω is a constant and t is…
- A particle starts from the origin at t = 0 with an initial velocity of 3.0̂i m/s and moves in the x-y plane w…
- The position vector of a particle changes with time according to the relation ⃗r(t) = 15t²̂i + (4 - 20t²)̂j.…
- A particle is moving with a velocity ⃗v = K(ŷi + x̂j), where K is a constant. The general equation for its p…
- The position co-ordinates of a particle moving in a 3-D coordinate system is given by x = a cos ω t, y = a si…
- A particle moves from the point (2.0̂i + 4.0̂j) m, at t = 0, with an initial velocity (5.0̂i + 4.0̂j) m s⁻¹.…
- The machine as shown in the figure has 2 rods of length 1 m connected by a pivot at the top. The end of one r…
- A particle has an initial velocity 3̂i + 4̂j and an acceleration of 0.4̂i + 0.3̂j. Its speed after 10 s is
- A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of 5 m/s. In 10 s the velocity changes to 5 m/s northwards. Th…
- The co-ordinates of a moving particle at any time t are given by x = α t³ and y = β t³. The speed of the part…
- A particle starts from origin at t = 0 with a velocity 5̂i m/s and moves in x-y plane under action of a force…
- A balloon is moving up in air vertically above a point A on the ground. When it is at a height h₁, a girl sta…
- If two vectors ⃗P = ̂i + 2m̂j + m̂k and ⃗Q = 4̂i - 2̂j + m̂k are perpendicular to each other. Then, the value…
- ⃗A is a vector quantity such that |⃗A| = non-zero constant. Which of the following expression is true for ⃗A?
- If ⃗A and ⃗B are two vectors satisfying the relation ⃗A·⃗B = |⃗A×⃗B|. Then the value of |⃗A - ⃗B| will be
- What will be the projection of vector ⃗A = ̂i + ̂j + ̂k on vector ⃗B = ̂i + ̂j?
- The incident ray, reflected ray and the outward drawn normal are denoted by the unit vectors ⃗a, ⃗b and ⃗c re…
- Let |⃗A₁| = 3, |⃗A₂| = 5 and |⃗A₁ + ⃗A₂| = 5. The value of (2⃗A₁ + 3⃗A₂)·(3⃗A₁ - 2⃗A₂) is
- Let ⃗A = (̂i + ̂j) and ⃗B = (2̂i - ̂j). The magnitude of a co-planar vector ⃗C such that ⃗A·⃗C = ⃗B·⃗C = ⃗A·⃗…
- If ⃗A×⃗B = ⃗B×⃗A, then the angle between ⃗A and ⃗B is
- Two particles are located at equal distance from origin. The position vectors of those are represented by ⃗A…
- For three vectors ⃗A = (-x̂i - 6̂j - 2̂k), ⃗B = (-̂i + 4̂j + 3̂k) and ⃗C = (-8̂i - ̂j + 3̂k), if ⃗A·(⃗B×⃗C) =…
- Vectors âi + b̂j + ̂k and 2̂i - 3̂j + 4̂k are perpendicular to each other when 3a + 2b = 7, the ratio of a t…
- If ⃗P = 3̂i + √3̂j + 2̂k and ⃗Q = 4̂i + √3̂j + 2.5̂k then, the unit vector in the direction of ⃗P×⃗Q is 1/x(√…
- If ⃗A = (2̂i + 3̂j - ̂k) m and ⃗B = (̂i + 2̂j + 2̂k) m. The magnitude of component of vector ⃗A along vector…
- Three particles P, Q and R are moving along the vectors ⃗A = ̂i + ̂j, ⃗B = ̂j + ̂k and ⃗C = -̂i + ̂j respecti…
- If ⃗P×⃗Q = ⃗Q×⃗P, the angle between ⃗P and ⃗Q is θ (0° < θ < 360°). The value of θ will be °.
- In the cube of side a shown in the figure, the vector from the central point of the face ABOD to the central…
- If the projection of 2̂i + 4̂j - 2̂k on ̂i + 2̂j + α̂k is zero. Then, the value of α will be .
- The angle between vector ⃗Q and the resultant of (2⃗Q + 2⃗P) and (2⃗Q - 2⃗P) is
- If two vectors ⃗A and ⃗B having equal magnitude R are inclined at an angle θ, then
- Two forces having magnitude A and /A2 are perpendicular to each other. The magnitude of their resultant is
- When vector ⃗A = 2̂i + 3̂j + 2̂k is subtracted from vector ⃗B, it gives a vector equal to 2̂j. Then the magni…
- A vector in x-y plane makes an angle of 30° with y-axis. The magnitude of y-component of vector is 2√3. The m…
- Which of the following relations is true for two unit vectors ̂A and ̂B making an angle θ to each other?
- Two vectors ⃗A and ⃗B have equal magnitudes. If magnitude of ⃗A + ⃗B is equal to two times the magnitude of ⃗…
- The magnitude of vectors OA⃗, OB⃗ and OC⃗ in the given figure are equal. The direction of OA⃗ + OB⃗ - OC⃗ wit…
- The angle between vector (⃗A) and (⃗A - ⃗B) is (the vectors are drawn in the figure; the interior angle marke…
- The resultant of the forces OP⃗, OQ⃗, OR⃗, OS⃗ and OT⃗ shown in the figure is approximately N. [Take √3 = 1.7…
- Statement I: Two forces (⃗P + ⃗Q) and (⃗P - ⃗Q) where ⃗P ⊥ ⃗Q, when act at an angle θ₁ to each other, the mag…
- Statement I: If three forces ⃗F₁, ⃗F₂ and ⃗F₃ are represented by three sides of a triangle and ⃗F₁ + ⃗F₂ = -⃗…
- Two vectors ⃗P and ⃗Q have equal magnitudes. If the magnitude of ⃗P + ⃗Q is n times the magnitude of ⃗P - ⃗Q,…
- Match List I with List II, using the four triangles (i) to (iv) in the figure. (A) ⃗C - ⃗A - ⃗B = 0; (B) ⃗A -…
- Two vectors ⃗X and ⃗Y have equal magnitude. The magnitude of (⃗X - ⃗Y) is n times the magnitude of (⃗X + ⃗Y).…
- Assertion A: If A, B, C, D are four points on a semi-circular arc with centre at O such that |AB⃗| = |BC⃗| =…
- In an octagon ABCDEFGH of equal side, what is the sum of AB⃗ + AC⃗ + AD⃗ + AE⃗ + AF⃗ + AG⃗ + AH⃗, if AO⃗ = 2̂…
- Two forces P and Q, of magnitude 2F and 3F, respectively, are at an angle θ with each other. If the force Q i…
- A vector ⃗A is rotated by a small angle Δθ radians (Δθ 1) to get a new vector ⃗B. In that case |⃗B - ⃗A| is
- Two forces are such that the sum of their magnitudes is 18 N and their resultant is 12 N which is perpendicul…
- Two forces ⃗F₁ and ⃗F₂ are acting on a body. One force has magnitude thrice that of the other force and the r…
- Three vectors OP⃗, OQ⃗ and OR⃗ each of magnitude A are acting as shown in figure. The resultant of the three…
- If ⃗a and ⃗b makes an angle cos⁻¹(5/9) with each other, then |⃗a + ⃗b| = √2|⃗a - ⃗b| for |⃗a| = n|⃗b|. The in…
- The resultant of two vectors ⃗A and ⃗B is perpendicular to ⃗A and its magnitude is half that of ⃗B. The angle…
- A vector has magnitude same as that of ⃗A = 3̂i + 4̂j and is parallel to ⃗B = 4̂i + 3̂j. The x and y componen…
- The sum of two forces ⃗P and ⃗Q is ⃗R such that |⃗R| = |⃗P|. The angle θ (in degrees) that the resultant of 2…
- A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate α for some time after which it decelerates at a constant rate…
- A body travels 102.5 m in n^th second and 115.0 m in (n + 2)^th second. The acceleration is
- A bullet is fired into a fixed target looses one third of its velocity after travelling 4 cm. It penetrates f…
- A body starts moving from rest with constant acceleration covers displacement S₁ in first (p - 1) seconds and…
- A particle starts with an initial velocity of 10.0 m s⁻¹ along x-direction and accelerates uniformly at the r…
- The velocity of the bullet becomes one third after it penetrates 4 cm in a wooden block. Assuming that bullet…
- A small toy starts moving from the position of rest under a constant acceleration. If it travels a distance o…
- An engine of a train moving with uniform acceleration, passes the signal-post with velocity u and the last co…
- A scooter accelerates from rest for time t₁ at constant rate a₁ and then retards at constant rate a₂ for time…
- In a car race on straight road, car A takes a time t less than car B at the finish and passes finishing point…
- An automobile, travelling at 40 km/h, can be stopped at a distance of 40 m by applying brakes. If the same au…
- A bullet looses (1/n)^th of its velocity passing through one plank. The number of such planks that are requir…
- A goods train accelerating uniformly on a straight railway track, approaches an electric pole standing on the…
- A car, starting from rest, accelerates at the rate f through a distance s, then continues at constant speed f…
- A bullet fired into a fixed target loses half its velocity after penetrating 3 cm. How much further it will p…
- An automobile travelling with a speed of 60 km/h, can brake to stop within a distance of 20 m. If the car is…
- A car moving with a speed of 50 km/hr, can be stopped by brakes after at least 6 m. If the same car is moving…
- Speeds of two identical cars are u and 4u at a specific instant. If the same deceleration is applied on both…
- A bus moving along a straight highway with speed of 72 km/h is brought to halt within 4 s after applying the…
- A body moves on a frictionless plane starting from rest. If Sₙ is distance moved between t = n - 1 and t = n…
- The displacement and the increase in the velocity of a moving particle in the time interval of t to (t + 1) s…
- For a train engine moving with speed of 20 m s⁻¹, the driver must apply brakes at a distance of 500 m before…
- A car is moving with speed of 150 km/h and after applying the break it will move 27 m before it stops. If the…
- A spring stretches by 2 mm when it is loaded with a mass of 200 g. From the equilibrium position the mass is…
- The frequency of oscillation of a mass m suspended from a spring is u₁. If the length of the spring is cut to…
- [Figure: a light spring lying on a smooth horizontal surface with a block of 1 kg attached at its left end an…
- [Figure: a block of mass m resting on top of a block of mass M; M stands on a frictionless table and is attac…
- Two bodies A and B of equal mass hang from two massless springs of spring constants k₁ and k₂ respectively. T…
- [Figure: a block of mass m on a frictionless horizontal surface, joined to a left-hand wall by a spring of co…
- [Figure: a block on a frictionless horizontal surface attached by a spring to a rigid wall.] For a mass-sprin…
- [Figure: (A) a block of mass m on a frictionless floor with a block of mass 2m fixed on top of it, joined by…
- Two massless springs of constants 2k and 9k carry masses of 50 g and 100 g at their free ends. The two masses…
- Two particles A and B of equal mass hang from two massless springs of spring constants K₁ and K₂ respectively…
- [Figure: a block of mass M on a frictionless horizontal surface, attached by a spring of constant k to a rigi…
- [Figure: a smooth plane inclined at angle α; a body of mass M lies on it, held between two springs each of co…
- [Figure: a block of mass m on a horizontal surface, joined by an identical spring of constant 2k to a fixed s…
- If two similar springs, each of spring constant K₁, are joined in series, the new spring constant and the new…
- A block of mass m attached to a massless spring performs oscillations of amplitude A on a frictionless horizo…
- An oscillator of mass M rests at its equilibrium position in the potential V=1/2 k(x-X)². A particle of mass…
- A 1 kg block attached to a spring vibrates with a frequency of 1 Hz on a frictionless horizontal table. Two s…
- [Figure: a 4 kg block standing on the ground, a vertical spring resting on top of it and a 1 kg block on top…
- A mass M attached to a horizontal spring executes SHM with amplitude A₁. When M passes through its mean posit…
- [Figure: a block of mass m on a horizontal surface, connected to a spring of constant k₁ on one side and a sp…
- A particle at the end of one spring executes simple harmonic motion with period t₁, and with a second spring…
- A mass M suspended from a light spring is pulled down a little and released, so that it executes SHM of perio…
- A spring has time period T with a given mass. If the spring is cut into n equal parts, the time period of the…
- A particle of mass 0.50 kg executes simple harmonic motion under the force F=-50 (N m⁻¹) x. The time period o…
- A mass m hangs from a light spring and the system oscillates with frequency f₁. If a mass 9m is hung from the…
- [Figure: a block of mass M on a frictionless floor, joined to the left-hand wall by a spring of constant k, a…
- A rectangular block of mass 5 kg attached to a horizontal spiral spring executes simple harmonic motion of am…
- A block fastened to a horizontal spring on a frictionless surface is pulled from rest to x=10 cm from its equ…
- [Figure: a block of mass 2 kg on a frictionless floor with a spring of constant 20 N m⁻¹ joining it to a rigi…
- A mass m attached to the free end of a spring executes SHM with a period of 1 s. If the mass is increased by…
- [Figure: a block of mass M=490 g on a frictionless table, joined to a rigid support on each side by a spring…
- [Figure: (a) a block of mass m hanging from a spring of constant k which hangs from a second spring of consta…
- A mass of 0.9 kg attached to a horizontal spring executes SHM with amplitude A₁. When this mass passes throug…
- [Figure: two blocks A and B on a frictionless horizontal surface, joined to each other by a spring of constan…
- [Figure: Figure 1 shows a mass M hanging from a single spring of constant k; Figure 2 shows the same mass han…
- The time dependence of the position of a particle of mass m=2 is given by ⃗r(t)=2t̂i-3t²̂j. Its angular momen…
- Two cars A and B, each of mass 10³ kg, move on parallel tracks 10 m apart, in the same direction with speeds…
- An object of mass m is projected from the origin in a vertical plane at 45° to the horizontal with initial sp…
- A particle of mass m is projected with velocity u at 30° to the horizontal. The magnitude of the angular mome…
- Two small balls of masses m and 2m are attached to the ends of a rigid rod of length d and negligible mass. I…
- A particle performing uniform circular motion has angular momentum L. If its angular frequency is doubled and…
- Two coaxial discs, having moments of inertia I₁ and (I₁)/2, rotate about their common axis with angular speed…
- A thin disc of mass M and radius R rotates in a horizontal plane about its central perpendicular axis at ω. A…
- A thin ring of mass M and radius R rotates at constant ω in a horizontal plane about a vertical axis through…
- A thin smooth rod of length L and mass M rotates freely at ω₀ about a perpendicular axis through its centre.…
- A uniform rod of mass M=4m and length l is pivoted at its centre. A mass m moving with velocity v at θ=π/4 to…
- A uniform bar of length L and mass 8m lies on a smooth horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2m move in th…
- A thin horizontal disc rotates about a vertical axis through its centre. An insect, at rest near the rim, wal…
- A solid sphere is rotating in free space. If the radius of the sphere is increased keeping its mass the same,…
- When the position vector ⃗r=x̂i+ŷj+ẑk changes sign to -⃗r, which one of the following vectors will not flip…
- Four point masses, each of mass m, are fixed at the corners of a square of side l. The square rotates with an…
- Angular momentum of a particle rotating under a central force is constant due to
- A person of mass 80 kg stands on the rim of a circular platform of mass 200 kg rotating at 5 rpm about its ax…
- The position of an object having mass 0.1 kg as a function of time t is given as ⃗r=(10t²̂i+5t³̂j) m. At t=1…
- A uniform bar of length 12 cm and mass 20m lies on a smooth horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2m are m…
- If ⃗L and ⃗P represent the angular momentum and linear momentum respectively of a particle of mass m having p…
- A thin circular ring of mass M and radius R is rotating with a constant angular velocity 2 rad s⁻¹ in a horiz…
- Two discs have moments of inertia I₁ and I₂ about their respective axes perpendicular to the plane and passin…
- Angular momentum of a single particle moving with constant speed along a circular path
- A mass M hangs on a massless rod of length l which rotates at a constant angular frequency. The mass M moves…
- A particle of mass 20 g is released with an initial velocity 5 m/s along a frictionless curve from the point…
- A cubical block of side 30 cm is moving with velocity 2 m s⁻¹ on a smooth horizontal surface. The surface has…
- A particle of mass 2 kg is on a smooth horizontal table and moves in a circular path of radius 0.6 m. The hei…
- A bob of mass m attached to an inextensible string of length l is suspended from a vertical support. The bob…
- A particle is moving in a circular path of radius a with a constant velocity v. The centre of the circle is m…
- A stone of mass m, tied to the end of a string, is whirled around in a circle on a horizontal frictionless ta…
- A small particle of mass m is projected at an angle θ with the x-axis with an initial velocity v₀ in the x-y…
- A particle of mass m moves along the line PC with velocity v, where P is a fixed point on that line. What is…
- The initial angular velocity of a circular disc of mass M is ω₁. Then two small spheres of mass m are attache…
- A solid sphere with uniform density and radius R is rotating initially with constant angular velocity ω₁ abou…
- The position vectors of two 1 kg particles, (A) and (B), are given by ⃗r_A=(α₁t²̂i+α₂t̂j+α₃t̂k) m and ⃗r_B=(β…
- If the radius of the earth is reduced to three-fourths of its present value without change in its mass, then…
- A body of mass 5 kg moving with a uniform speed 3√2 m s⁻¹ in the X-Y plane along the line y=x+4. The angular…
- Consider a disc of mass 5 kg and radius 2 m, rotating with an angular velocity of 10 rad/s about an axis perp…
- Two discs of moment of inertia I₁=4 kg m² and I₂=2 kg m², about their central axes and normal to their planes…
- A body of mass m is projected with a speed u making an angle of 45° with the ground. The angular momentum of…
- If the earth suddenly shrinks to 1/(64)th of its original volume with its mass remaining the same, the period…
- A solid sphere of mass 500 g and radius 5 cm is rotated about one of its diameters with an angular speed of 1…
- A circular plate is rotating in a horizontal plane, about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicula…
- A particle of mass 100 g is projected at time t=0 with a speed 20 m s⁻¹ at an angle 45° to the horizontal. Th…
- The position vector of a 1 kg object is ⃗r=(3̂i-̂j) m and its velocity ⃗v=(3̂j+̂k) m s⁻¹. The magnitude of it…
- A rod of mass M and length L is lying on a horizontal frictionless surface. A particle of mass m travelling a…
- A particle of mass m is moving in time t on a trajectory given by ⃗r=10α t²̂i+5β(t-5)̂j, where α and β are di…
- Two wheels P and Q are connected by a belt B. The radius of P is three times that of Q. In case of same rotat…
- A thin rod of mass 0.9 kg and length 1 m is suspended, at rest, from one end so that it can freely oscillate…
- A spherical shell of 1 kg mass and radius R is rolling with angular speed ω on a horizontal plane. The magnit…
- Two uniform circular discs are rotating independently in the same direction around their common axis passing…
- A wheel is rotating freely with an angular speed ω on a shaft. The moment of inertia of the wheel is I and th…
- A circular disc of mass M and radius R is rotating about its axis with angular speed ω₁. If another stationar…
- A particle of mass m is moving along the side of a square of side a, with a uniform speed v in the x-y plane…
- Three masses 2 kg, 3 kg and 15 kg are placed as shown: 2 kg and 3 kg at the two base corners and 15 kg at the…
- A thin rod of length 5L is bent at a right angle keeping one arm of length 2L (along y) and the other of leng…
- A circular disc of radius 20 cm is centred at the origin. A circular hole of radius 5 cm is cut such that the…
- The centre of mass of a thin rectangular plate (sides a along x and b along y), whose mass per unit area vari…
- Two bodies of mass 1 kg and 3 kg have position vectors ̂i+2̂j+̂k and -3̂i-2̂j+̂k respectively. The magnitude…
- Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 30 kg are placed on a straight line with coordinates (0,0) cm and (x,0) cm. Th…
- A circular hole of radius a/2 is cut out of a circular disc of radius a, so that the hole's centre is at a/2…
- Three point particles of masses 1.0 kg, 1.5 kg and 2.5 kg are placed at three corners of a right-angle triang…
- A rod of length L has a non-uniform linear mass density ρ(x)=a+b(x/L)², with 0≤ x≤ L. The value of x for the…
- A spherical cavity of radius 1 (centred at O) is cut out of a uniform solid sphere of radius R (centred at C)…
- A uniform rectangular thin sheet ABCD of mass M has length a and breadth b. If the top-right quarter (HBGO, w…
- Three particles of masses 50 g, 100 g and 150 g are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side…
- The position vector of the centre of mass of an asymmetric uniform bar (negligible cross-section) is, for the…
- ABC is a uniform wire bent so that the angle at B is 60°. If the centre of mass of the wire lies vertically b…
- The distance of the centre of mass of a solid uniform cone from its vertex is z₀. If the base radius is R and…
- A projectile of mass M is fired so that its horizontal range is 4 km. At the highest point it explodes into t…
- Two identical particles move towards each other with velocities 2v and v respectively. The velocity of the ce…
- Two blocks of masses 2 kg and 1 kg are tied to the ends of a string passing over a light frictionless pulley.…
- Two identical bodies A and B of equal masses have initial velocities ⃗v₁=4̂i m/s and ⃗v₂=4̂j m/s respectively…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: For a mechanical system of many particles, the total kinetic ene…
- The coordinates of the centre of mass of a uniform flag-shaped lamina (a thin flat plate) of mass 4 kg are (t…
- A person of mass M is sitting on a swing of length L and swinging with an angular amplitude θ₀. If the person…
- A uniform thin rod AB of length L has linear mass density μ(x)=a+(bx)/L, where x is measured from A. If the c…
- A thin bar of length L has a mass per unit length λ that increases linearly with distance from one end. If it…
- A projectile moving vertically upwards with a velocity of 200 m s⁻¹ breaks into two equal parts at a height o…
- A circular disc of radius R is removed from a bigger circular disc of radius 2R such that the circumferences…
- Consider a two-particle system with particles having masses m₁ and m₂. If the first particle is pushed toward…
- A T-shaped object with dimensions shown in the figure is lying on a smooth floor. A force ⃗F is applied at th…
- A body A of mass M while falling vertically downwards under gravity breaks into two parts; a body B of mass 1…
- In a system two particles of masses m₁=3 kg and m₂=2 kg are placed at a certain distance from each other. The…
- A uniform thin metal plate of mass 10 kg with the dimensions shown has the ratio of the x and y coordinates o…
- Three identical spheres each of mass 2M are placed at the corners of a right-angled triangle with mutually pe…
- Three identical spheres each of mass M are placed at the corners of a right-angled triangle with mutually per…
- The distance of the centre of mass from end A of a one-dimensional rod AB having mass density ρ=ρ₀(1-(x²)/(L²…
- The position of the centre of mass of a uniform semicircular wire of radius R placed in the x-y plane with it…
- A body of mass 2 kg moving with a speed of 4 m/s makes an elastic collision with another body at rest and con…
- A disc of mass M with uniform surface mass density σ is shown in the figure. The centre of mass of the quarte…
- A square-shaped hole of side l=a/2 is carved out at a distance d=a/2 from the centre O of a uniform circular…
- The centre of mass of a solid hemisphere of radius 8 cm is x cm from the centre of the flat surface. Then the…
- Four particles A, B, C and D with masses m_A=m, m_B=2m, m_C=3m and m_D=4m are at the corners of a square, as…
- A thin rod of length L is lying along the x-axis with its ends at x=0 and x=L. Its linear density (mass/lengt…
- The torque due to the force (2̂i+̂j+2̂k) about the origin, acting on a particle whose position vector is (̂i+…
- The torque of a force ⃗F=5̂i+3̂j-7̂k acting on a particle at position vector ̂i+̂j+̂k with respect to the ori…
- A force ⃗F=(̂i+2̂j+3̂k) N acts at a point (4̂i+3̂j-̂k) m. The torque of this force about the origin is
- To mop-clean a floor, a circular mop of radius R is pressed vertically down with a total force F and rotated…
- Which of the following statements about the torque acting on a body is correct? (I) τ⃗=⃗r×⃗F; (II) τ⃗=Iα⃗; (I…
- A solid sphere of radius 4 cm and mass 5 kg is rotating about an axis through its centre with an angular velo…
- A square lamina OABC of side 10 cm is pivoted at O, with O at the bottom-left corner, A at the bottom-right,…
- Which of the following are correct expressions for the torque acting on a body? A. τ⃗=⃗r×⃗L B. τ⃗=d/(dt)(⃗r×⃗…
- A uniform rod of mass 250 g and length 100 cm is balanced on a sharp edge at the 40 cm mark. A mass of 400 g…
- A heavy iron bar of weight W has one end on the ground and the other on the shoulder of a person. The bar mak…
- A heavy iron bar of weight 12 kg has one end on the ground and the other on the shoulder of a man. The rod ma…
- The torque of a force ⃗F=5̂i+3̂j-7̂k about the origin is τ⃗. If the force acts on a particle whose position v…
- If a force ⃗F=3̂i+4̂j-2̂k acts on a particle having position vector 2̂i+̂j+2̂k, then the torque about the ori…
- An equilateral triangular plate OPQ of side 10 cm lies in the xy-plane with O at the origin and Q on the posi…
- A uniform cylinder of mass M and radius R is to be pulled over a step of height a (a<R) by applying a force F…
- A block of mass m=1 kg slides with velocity v=6 m/s on a frictionless horizontal surface and collides with a…
- A particle of mass m is moving along a trajectory given by x=x₀+a cos ω₁ t and y=y₀+b sin ω₂ t. The torque ac…
- An L-shaped object made of thin rods of uniform mass density is suspended by a string tied at A. The two arms…
- A rectangular slab lies in the xy-plane with one corner at the origin O, extending 4 m along x and 6 m along…
- The magnitude of the torque on a particle of mass 1 kg is 2.5 N m about the origin. If the force acting on it…
- A force of 40 N acts at a point B at the end of an L-shaped object. The object has a vertical arm of length 4…
- A uniform rod AB is suspended from a point X at a variable distance x from A. To make the rod horizontal, a m…
- In a physical balance working on the principle of moments, the beam becomes horizontal when a 5 mg weight is…
- A force of -F̂k acts at O, the origin of the coordinate system. The torque about the point (1, -1) is
- Let ⃗F be the force acting on a particle having position vector ⃗r, and let ⃗T be the torque of this force ab…
- The coordinates of a particle with respect to the origin in a given reference frame are (1, 1, 1) m. If a for…
- A force of -P̂k acts on the origin of the coordinate system. The torque about the point (2, -3) is P(âi+b̂j)…
- A force ⃗F=4̂i+3̂j+4̂k is applied at the point where the plane x=2 meets the x-axis. The magnitude of the tor…
- A force ⃗F=(̂i+2̂j+3̂k) N acts at a point (4̂i+3̂j-̂k) m. The magnitude of the torque about the point (̂i+2̂j…
- A uniform cubical box of side a rests on a rough floor and is to be moved by applying the minimum possible fo…
- The moment of inertia of a rod of mass M and length L about an axis through its centre and perpendicular to i…
- The moment of inertia of a circular ring of mass M and diameter r about a tangential axis lying in the plane…
- A rod of linear mass density λ and length L is bent to form a ring of radius R. The moment of inertia of the…
- The moment of inertia of a square plate of side l and mass M about an axis passing through one corner and per…
- A system of two identical spheres, each of mass 1.5 kg and radius 50 cm, is fixed at the ends of a light rod…
- Equal masses m each are placed at the corners of a square of side l. The moment of inertia of the system abou…
- A uniform wire of mass M and length L is bent into a semicircle. Its moment of inertia about a line perpendic…
- Four identical solid spheres, each of mass m and radius a, are placed with their centres at the corners of a…
- A moment of inertia of a cylinder of mass M, length L and radius R about an axis passing through its centre a…
- A hollow ice-cream cone (open at the top) has mass M, top radius R and height H. Its moment of inertia about…
- A uniform circular disc of radius R and mass M rotates about a perpendicular axis through its centre. A small…
- An equilateral triangular lamina ABC of mass M has moment of inertia I₀ about an axis through its centroid pe…
- A thin disc of mass M and radius R has mass per unit area σ(r)=kr², where r is the distance from its centre.…
- The mass per unit area of a circular disc of radius a is σ(r)=A+Br. Its moment of inertia about an axis perpe…
- A circular disc of radius b has a hole of radius a at its centre. If the mass per unit area varies as σ(r)=(σ…
- A solid sphere of mass M and radius R is divided into two unequal parts. The first part, of mass (7M)/8, is m…
- Seven identical circular planar disks, each of mass M and radius R, are welded symmetrically as shown, one at…
- From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R, a cube of maximum possible volume is cut. The moment of inertia o…
- From a uniform circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, a small disc of radius /R3 is removed as shown. The mom…
- The moment of inertia of a hollow cylinder of length 30 cm (inner radius 10 cm, outer radius 20 cm) about its…
- Three balls of masses 2 kg, 4 kg and 6 kg are placed at the mid-points of the edges of an equilateral triangl…
- A solid sphere of radius 10 cm rotates about an axis at a distance 15 cm from its centre. The radius of gyrat…
- A massless equilateral triangle EFG of side a has three particles of mass m at its vertices. The moment of in…
- The ratio of the radius of gyration of a hollow sphere to that of a solid cylinder of equal mass, for moment…
- A solid sphere of mass M and radius R is divided into two unequal parts. The smaller part, of mass M/8, is re…
- A solid sphere of mass 5 kg and radius 10 cm is kept in contact with another solid sphere of mass 10 kg and r…
- A square loop is made of four uniform solid cylinders, each of radius R and length L (with R<L), joined end t…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) moment of inertia of a solid sphere of radius R about any tangent; (B)…
- A solid cylinder of length 80 cm and mass M has a radius of 20 cm. Its moment of inertia about an axis CD tha…
- Given below are two statements, one labelled Assertion and the other labelled Reason. Assertion: the moments…
- Two solid discs have radii R and r respectively. If the mass per unit area is the same for both, what is the…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) moment of inertia of a rod of length L and mass M about an axis perpen…
- The moments of inertia of four bodies, all having the same mass and the same radius, are reported as: I₁ for…
- Consider two uniform discs of the same thickness and different radii R₁=R and R₂=α R, made of the same materi…
- A uniform rectangular sheet measures 60 cm by 80 cm. The ratio of its moments of inertia about the axis perpe…
- The linear mass density of a thin rod AB of length L varies from A to B as λ(x)=λ₀(1+x/L), where x is the dis…
- The radius of gyration of a uniform rod of length l, about an axis passing through a point l/4 away from the…
- Three solid spheres, each of mass m and diameter d, are stuck together so that the lines joining their centre…
- A thin circular plate of mass M and radius R has its density varying as ρ(r)=ρ₀ r, with ρ₀ constant and r the…
- Two identical spherical balls, each of mass M and radius R, are stuck on the two ends of a rod of length 2R a…
- A circular disc D₁ of mass M and radius R has two identical discs D₂ and D₃, of the same mass M and radius R,…
- The moment of inertia of a solid sphere about an axis parallel to its diameter and a distance x from it is I(…
- A thin circular disc lies in the xy plane with its centre at the origin. The z axis passes through its centre…
- A circular hole of radius R/4 is made in a thin uniform disc of mass M and radius R. The centre of the hole i…
- Consider a thin uniform square sheet made of a rigid material. If its side is a, its mass m and its moment of…
- Consider a uniform square plate of side a and mass m. The moment of inertia of this plate about an axis perpe…
- For a uniform square lamina ABCD whose centre is O, let E be the midpoint of AB and F the midpoint of DC, so…
- The moment of inertia of a uniform semicircular disc of mass M and radius r about a line perpendicular to the…
- One solid sphere A and one hollow sphere B have the same mass and the same outer radius. Their moments of ine…
- A circular disc X of radius R is made from an iron plate of thickness t, and another disc Y of radius 4R is m…
- The moment of inertia of a circular wire of mass M and radius R about its diameter is
- The moment of inertia about an axis AB for a rod of mass 40 kg and length 3 m, with AB passing through one en…
- Two identical thin rods, each of mass M kg and length L m, are joined in a T shape: one rod hangs vertically…
- A circular disc has radius R₁ and thickness T₁. Another circular disc made of the same material has radius R₂…
- A uniform circular disc has mass M kg and radius r m. Two circular regions, each of radius r/4, are cut out f…
- A uniform solid cylinder of length L and radius R has moment of inertia I₁ about its own axis. A small co-cen…
- A, B and C are a disc, a solid sphere and a spherical shell respectively, with the same radii and the same ma…
- A disc has mass M and radius R. A small disc of radius R/3 is removed from it, the small disc touching the ri…
- The moment of inertia of a solid disc rotating about its diameter is 2.5 times higher than the moment of iner…
- Two iron solid discs of negligible thickness have radii R₁ and R₂ and moments of inertia I₁ and I₂ respective…
- A uniform rod AB of mass 2 kg and length 30 cm is at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. An impulse of 0.2 N…
- Four particles, each of mass 1 kg, are placed at the four corners of a square of side 2 m. The moment of iner…
- Two identical spheres, each of mass 2 kg and radius 50 cm, are fixed at the ends of a light rod so that the s…
- Two identical solid spheres, each of mass 2 kg and radius 10 cm, are fixed at the ends of a light rod. The se…
- A ring and a solid sphere, rotating about axes passing through their centres, have the same radius of gyratio…
- The moment of inertia of a semicircular ring about an axis passing through the centre and perpendicular to th…
- A solid sphere and a solid cylinder of the same mass and radius are rolling on a horizontal surface without s…
- The moment of inertia of a disc of mass M and radius R about any of its diameters is (MR²)/4. The moment of i…
- A solid sphere A of radius 5 cm is rotating about an axis PQ which lies a distance 10 cm from the centre of t…
- A uniform solid cylinder with radius R and length L has moment of inertia I₁ about the axis of the cylinder.…
- I_CM is the moment of inertia of a circular disc about an axis (CM) passing through its centre and perpendicu…
- A solid sphere of mass 5 kg and a disc of mass 4 kg have the same radius. The ratio of the moment of inertia…
- Two discs of the same mass and different radii are made of different materials such that their thicknesses ar…
- The radius of gyration of a cylindrical rod about an axis of rotation perpendicular to its length and passing…
- Four identical discs, each of mass M and diameter a, are arranged in a small plane in a cluster: the axis OO'…
- Four bodies all have the same mass M and the same radius 2R: I₁ is the moment of inertia of a solid sphere ab…
- The moment of inertia of a uniform thin rod about a perpendicular axis passing through one end is I₁. The sam…
- Four particles with masses 1 kg, 2 kg, 3 kg and 4 kg are situated at the corners of a square with side 1 m. T…
- A badminton racket has a straight handle of length 6r running from its end A to the rim of a circular head of…
- A uniform thin bar of mass 6 kg and length 2.4 m is bent to make an equilateral hexagon. The moment of inerti…
- ABC is a plane lamina in the shape of an equilateral triangle. D and E are the midpoints of AB and AC, and G…
- A wheel rolls on a plane surface. The speed of the particle at the highest point of the rim is 8 m/s. The spe…
- The centre of a wheel rolling on a plane surface moves with a speed v₀. A particle on the rim of the wheel at…
- A disc of radius R rolls without slipping. At t=0 the top-most point is A. When the disc completes half of a…
- A solid spherical ball rolls without slipping on a horizontal plane about its axis of symmetry. The ratio of…
- A solid sphere rolls without slipping on a horizontal plane. The ratio of the translational (centre-of-mass)…
- A solid sphere of mass 2 kg is in pure rolling on a horizontal surface with kinetic energy 2240 J. The veloci…
- A solid disc of mass 50 kg rolls along a floor with its centre of mass moving at 0.4 m/s. The magnitude of th…
- A uniform sphere of mass 500 g rolls without slipping on a plane horizontal surface with its centre moving at…
- A solid sphere rolls on a surface with translational velocity v. To climb an incline continuing to roll witho…
- A spherical ball of mass 20 kg, stationary at the top of a 100 m hill, rolls down a smooth surface to the gro…
- A solid sphere and a solid cylinder of identical radii approach an incline with the same linear velocity v, a…
- The following bodies are made to roll up (without slipping) the same incline from a horizontal plane: (i) a r…
- A hollow spherical ball of uniform density rolls up a curved surface with an initial velocity 3 m/s. The maxi…
- A uniform solid cylinder rolls without slipping down an inclined rough plane of inclination 45°. Starting fro…
- A solid cylinder is released from rest at the top of an incline of inclination 30° and length 60 cm. If it ro…
- Two bodies, a ring and a solid cylinder of the same material, are rolling down without slipping an inclined p…
- A string is wound around a hollow cylinder of mass 5 kg and radius 0.5 m. The string is pulled with a horizon…
- A homogeneous solid cylindrical roller of radius R and mass M is pulled on a cricket pitch by a horizontal fo…
- A cylinder of mass M rests on a rough horizontal rug that is pulled out from under it with acceleration a per…
- A hoop of radius r and mass m rotating with angular velocity ω₀ is placed on a rough horizontal surface. The…
- A circular disc reaches from the top to the bottom of an incline of length L. When it slips down it takes tim…
- A solid cylinder of radius R and length L is slipping on a rough horizontal plane. At t=0 it has a translatio…
- An object of uniform density rolls up a curved path with an initial velocity v₀. If the maximum height attain…
- A solid sphere (A) of mass 5m and a spherical shell (B) of mass m, both having the same radius, are placed on…
- A force of 49 N acts tangentially at the highest point of a solid sphere of mass 20 kg kept on a rough horizo…
- A solid sphere of mass m and radius r is allowed to roll without slipping from the highest point of an inclin…
- A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of the same mass and the same radius are rolled on an inclined plane. Let…
- A disc of radius R and mass M is rolling horizontally without slipping with speed v. It then moves up an incl…
- A solid cylinder and a solid sphere, having the same mass M and radius R, roll down the same inclined plane f…
- A body rolls down an inclined plane without slipping. The kinetic energy of rotation is 50% of its translatio…
- Consider a situation in which a ring, a solid cylinder and a solid sphere roll down on the same inclined plan…
- A sphere of mass 2 kg and radius 0.5 m is rolling with an initial speed of 1 m s⁻¹ and goes up an inclined pl…
- A sphere of radius a and mass m rolls along a horizontal plane with constant speed v₀. It encounters an incli…
- A roller is made by joining together two cones at their vertices O, so that the roller is pointed at its cent…
- A uniform solid cylindrical roller of mass m is being pulled on a horizontal surface with a force F parallel…
- A tennis ball (treated as a hollow spherical shell) starting from O rolls down a hill. At point A the ball be…
- A round uniform body of radius R, mass M and moment of inertia I rolls down (without slipping) an inclined pl…
- A solid sphere, a hollow sphere and a ring are released from the top of an inclined plane (frictionless) so t…
- A circular ring and a solid sphere having the same radius roll down on an inclined plane from rest without sl…
- A solid sphere and a hollow cylinder roll up without slipping on the same inclined plane with the same initia…
- A hollow sphere is rolling on a plane surface about its axis of symmetry. The ratio of rotational kinetic ene…
- A ring and a solid sphere, of the same mass and identical radii, roll down the same inclined plane without sl…
- A cylinder is rolling down on an inclined plane of inclination 60°. Its acceleration during rolling down will…
- A solid sphere is rolling on a horizontal plane without slipping. If the ratio of the angular momentum about…
- A uniform disc of mass 0.5 kg and radius r is projected with velocity 18 m/s at t=0 s on a rough horizontal s…
- A solid sphere of mass 1 kg rolls without slipping on a plane surface. Its kinetic energy is 7×10⁻³ J. The sp…
- A solid disc of radius a and mass m rolls down without slipping on an inclined plane making an angle θ with t…
- The following bodies, (1) a ring, (2) a disc, (3) a solid cylinder and (4) a solid sphere, of the same mass m…
- A rolling wheel of 12 kg is on an inclined plane at position P and connected to a mass of 3 kg through a stri…
- A light rope is wound around a hollow cylinder of mass 5 kg and radius 70 cm. The rope is pulled with a force…
- A solid disc of radius 20 cm and mass 10 kg rotates at 600 rpm about a normal axis through its centre. The re…
- A circular disk of radius R and mass M rotates about its perpendicular central axis under an external torque…
- A cord of negligible mass is wound around the rim of a wheel (spokes of negligible mass), mass 10 kg, radius…
- Two masses 400 g and 350 g are suspended from the ends of a light string over a heavy pulley of radius 2 cm.…
- A uniform disc of mass M=4 kg and radius R=10 cm is mounted on a fixed horizontal axle. A block of mass m=2 k…
- A uniform rod of mass m and length l is suspended horizontally by two identical light strings at its ends. Th…
- Assertion: An electric fan continues to rotate for some time after the current is switched off. Reason: The f…
- A stationary horizontal disc is free to rotate about its axis. When a torque is applied, its kinetic energy a…
- The moment of inertia of a body about a given axis is 1.5 kg m². Initially at rest, to produce a rotational k…
- A bob of mass m is tied to a massless string wound on a flywheel (disc) of radius r and mass m. Released from…
- A wheel of moment of inertia I and radius R is free to rotate about its centre. A massless string over its ri…
- A solid cylinder is suspended symmetrically through two massless strings wound on it (a yo-yo). The distance…
- A rod of length 50 cm is pivoted at one end. It is raised so that it makes 30° with the horizontal and releas…
- A rigid massless rod of length 3l has masses 5M₀ and 2M₀ at its ends. It is pivoted at a point P at distance…
- A thin rod MN, free to rotate in the vertical plane about the fixed end N, is held horizontal. When the end M…
- A pulley of radius 1.5 m is rotated about its axis by a force F=(12t-3t²) N applied tangentially (with t in s…
- A 20 kg uniform circular disk of radius 0.2 m is pin-supported at its centre and initially at rest. A constan…
- Two circular discs, each of radius 10 cm and mass 600 g, are joined at their centres by a rod of length 30 cm…
- A rectangular solid box of length 0.3 m is held horizontally, with one of its sides on the edge of a platform…
- A metal coin of mass 5 g and radius 1 cm is fixed to a thin stick AB of negligible mass, with the stick lying…
- A slender uniform rod of mass M and length l is pivoted at one end so that it can rotate in a vertical plane.…
- A uniform disc of radius R and mass M is free to rotate only about its axis. A string is wrapped over its rim…
- A mass m is supported by a massless string wound around a uniform hollow cylinder of mass m and radius R. If…
- A mass m hangs with the help of a string wrapped around a pulley on a frictionless bearing. The pulley has ma…
- A thin uniform rod of length l and mass m is swinging freely about a horizontal axis passing through its end.…
- Two masses m and 2m are connected by a light string going over a pulley (a disc) of mass 30m with radius r=0.…
- A flywheel having mass 3 kg and radius 5 m is free to rotate about a horizontal axis. A string having negligi…
- A wheel of radius 0.2 m rotates freely about its centre when a string that is wrapped over its rim is pulled…
- A thin solid disk of 1 kg is rotating about its diameter axis at the speed of 1800 rpm. By applying an extern…
- A string is wrapped around the rim of a wheel of moment of inertia 0.40 kg m² and radius 10 cm. The wheel is…
- One end of a straight uniform 1 m long bar is pivoted on a horizontal table. It is released from rest when it…
- A thin uniform rod X of mass M and length L is pivoted at a point on the rod a height L/3 above its lower end…
- A cord is wound round the circumference of a wheel of radius r. The axis of the wheel is horizontal and the m…
- A uniform rod of length l is pivoted at one of its ends on a vertical shaft of negligible radius. When the sh…
- A thin uniform rod of length 2 m, cross-sectional area A and density d is rotated about an axis passing throu…
- A disc of mass 1 kg and radius R is free to rotate about a horizontal axis passing through its centre and per…
- A 2 kg steel rod of length 0.6 m is clamped on a table vertically at its lower end and is free to rotate in a…
- A pulley is made using a thin rim and two rods of length equal to the diameter of the rim, the two rods lying…
- A bead of mass m stays at the point P(a,b) on a wire bent in the shape of a parabola y=4Cx² and rotating with…
- In a perfectly inelastic collision, two spheres made of the same material with masses 15 kg and 25 kg, moving…
- Water falls from a height of 200 m into a pool. Calculate the rise in temperature of the water assuming no he…
- A gun fires a lead bullet of temperature 300 K into a wooden block. The bullet, having a melting temperature…
- A 100 g iron nail is hit by a 1.5 kg hammer striking at a velocity of 60 m s⁻¹. What will be the rise in the…
- A lead bullet penetrates into a solid object and melts. Assuming that 40% of its kinetic energy is used to he…
- The height of the Victoria Falls is 63 m. What is the difference in temperature of the water at the top and a…
- A bullet of mass 5 g, travelling with a speed of 210 m s⁻¹, strikes a fixed wooden target. One half of its ki…
- A massless spring (k=800 N m⁻¹), attached to a mass of 500 g, is completely immersed in 1 kg of water. The sp…
- The temperatures of equal masses of three different liquids x, y and z are 10 °C, 20 °C and 30 °C respectivel…
- An unknown metal of mass 192 g, heated to a temperature of 100 °C, was immersed into a brass calorimeter of m…
- When 100 g of a liquid A at 100 °C is added to 50 g of a liquid B at a temperature of 75 °C, the temperature…
- A metal ball of mass 0.1 kg is heated up to 500 °C and dropped into a vessel of heat capacity 800 J K⁻¹ conta…
- A copper ball of mass 100 g is at a temperature T. It is dropped into a copper calorimeter of mass 100 g, fil…
- Three containers C₁, C₂ and C₃ have water at different temperatures. The table below shows the final temperat…
- Two different metal bodies A and B of equal mass are heated at a uniform rate under similar conditions. Their…
- Heat given to a body which raises its temperature by 1 °C is
- A gas-based geyser heats water flowing at the rate of 5.0 litres per minute from 27 °C to 87 °C. The rate of…
- An experiment takes 10 minutes to raise the temperature of water in a container from 0 °C to 100 °C, and anot…
- A water heater of power 2000 W is used to heat water. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J kg⁻¹ K⁻¹.…
- A geyser heats water flowing at a rate of 2.0 kg per minute from 30 °C to 70 °C. If the geyser operates on a…
- In the following P-V diagram the equation of state along the curved path is (V-2)²=4aP, where a is a constant…
- Using the given P-V diagram, the work done by an ideal gas along the path ABCD is
- The magnitude of the heat exchanged by a system in the given cyclic process ABCA, shown in the figure, is (in…
- A polyatomic molecule, for which C_V=3R and Cₚ=4R where R is the gas constant, goes from the phase-space poin…
- The heat absorbed by a system in going through the given cyclic process is
- A real gas within a closed chamber at 27°C undergoes the cyclic process shown in the figure. The gas obeys PV…
- A thermodynamic system is taken through the cyclic process shown in the figure. The total work done in the pr…
- A thermodynamic system is taken from an original state D to an intermediate state E by the linear process sho…
- A sample of an ideal gas is taken through the cyclic process ABCA shown in the figure. It absorbs 40 J of hea…
- In the figure there is a cyclic process ABCDA on a sample of 1 mole of a diatomic gas. The temperatures of th…
- One mole of an ideal gas at (P₁,V₁) is allowed to expand reversibly and isothermally from A to B, so that its…
- A sample of an ideal gas is taken through the cyclic process abca shown in the figure. The change in the inte…
- For the given cyclic process CAB shown for a gas, the work done is
- One mole of a diatomic ideal gas undergoes the cyclic process ABC shown in the figure. The process BC is adia…
- Two moles of helium gas are taken over the cycle ABCDA shown in the P-T diagram. The net work done on the gas…
- A thermodynamic system is taken through the cyclic process ABC shown in the figure. The total work done by th…
- An ideal gas has undergone the cyclic process shown in the figure. The work done by the gas in the entire cyc…
- In the figure, the heat energy absorbed by a system in going through a cyclic process is π J.
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: A. Isobaric, B. Isochoric, C. Adiabatic, D. Isothermal. List-II: (I) Δ Q=Δ…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) Isothermal, (B) Adiabatic, (C) Isobaric, (D) Isochoric. List-II: (I) Δ…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: A. Pressure varies inversely with the volume of an ideal gas. B. Heat abso…
- Two thermodynamic processes are shown in the figure. The molar heat capacities for process A and process B ar…
- Choose the correct statement for the processes A and B shown in the figure.
- The given figure represents two isobaric processes for the same mass of an ideal gas. Then
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) Isothermal process, (B) Adiabatic process, (C) Isochoric process, (D)…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) Isothermal, (B) Isochoric, (C) Adiabatic, (D) Isobaric. List-II: (i) P…
- Match the thermodynamic processes taking place in a system with the correct conditions. In the table, Δ Q is…
- The given diagram shows four processes, namely isochoric, isobaric, isothermal and adiabatic. The correct ass…
- Consider the equation H=(x^pε^qE^r)/(t^s), where H= magnetic field, E= electric field, ε= permittivity, x= di…
- Applying the principle of homogeneity of dimensions, determine which one is correct, where T is time period,…
- The speed of a wave produced in water is given by v=λ^ag^bρ^c. Where λ, g and ρ are wavelength of wave, accel…
- The frequency ( u) of an oscillating liquid drop may depend upon radius (r) of the drop, density (ρ) of liqui…
- Given below are two statements: One is labelled as Assertion (A) and other is labelled as Reason (R). Asserti…
- If ρ is the density and η is coefficient of viscosity of fluid which flows with a speed v in the pipe of diam…
- Which of the following equations is dimensionally incorrect? where t= time, h= height, s= surface tension, θ=…
- Assume that the displacement (s) of air is proportional to the pressure difference (Δ P) created by a sound w…
- A beaker contains a fluid of density ρ kg/m³, specific heat S J/kg °C and viscosity η. The beaker is filled u…
- If the time period t of the oscillation of a drop of liquid of density d, radius r, vibrating under surface t…
- A ball of radius r and density ρ dropped through a viscous liquid of density σ and viscosity η attains its te…
- The potential energy of a particle changes with distance x from a fixed origin as V=(A√x)/(x+B), where A and…
- Consider a modified Bernoulli equation. (P+A/(Bt²))+ρ g(h+Bt)+1/2ρ V²= constant. If t has the dimension of ti…
- The position of a particle moving on x-axis is given by x(t)=A sin t+B cos²t+Ct²+D, where t is time. The dime…
- The expression given below shows the variation of velocity (v) with time (t), v=At²+(Bt)/(C+t). The dimension…
- What is the dimensional formula of ab⁻¹ in the equation (P+a/(V²))(V-b)=RT, where letters have their usual me…
- The equation of state of a real gas is given by (P+a/(V²))(V-b)=RT, where P, V and T are pressure, volume and…
- A force is represented by F=ax²+bt^1/2 where x= distance and t= time. The dimensions of (b²)/a are
- Consider two physical quantities A and B related to each other as E=(B-x²)/(At) where E, x and t have dimensi…
- In the equation [X+a/(Y²)][Y-b]=RT, X is pressure, Y is volume, R is universal gas constant and T is temperat…
- The equation of a circle is given by x²+y²=a², where a is the radius. If the equation is modified to change t…
- An expression of energy density is given by u=α/β sin ((α x)/(kt)), where α, β are constants, x is displaceme…
- Consider the efficiency of engine is given by η=(αβ)/(sin θ)logₑ(β x)/(kT), where α and β are constants. If T…
- An expression for a dimensionless quantity P is given by P=α/β logₑ((kt)/(β x)); where α and β are constants,…
- In van der Waal equation [P+a/(V²)][V-b]=RT; P is pressure, V is volume, R is universal gas constant and T is…
- The entropy of any system is given by S=α²β ln [(μ kR)/(Jβ²)+3] where α and β are the constants. μ, J, K and…
- The force is given in terms of time t and displacement x by the equation F=A cos Bx+C sin Dt. The dimensional…
- The workdone by a gas molecule in an isolated system is given by W=αβ²e^-(x²)/(α kT), where x is the displace…
- In a typical combustion engine the work done by a gas molecule is given by W=α²β e^(-β x²)/(kT), where x is t…
- In the formula X=5YZ², X and Z have dimensions of capacitance and magnetic field, respectively. What are the…
- The force of interaction between two atoms is given by F=αβ exp (-(x²)/(α kT)); where x is the distance, k is…
- The density ρ of a uniform cylinder is determined by measuring its mass m, length l and diameter d. The measu…
- The percentage error in the calculated volume of a sphere, if there is 2% error in its diameter measurement,…
- A quantity Q is formulated as X⁻²Y^3/2Z^-2/5. X, Y and Z are independent parameters which have fractional err…
- The maximum percentage error in the measurement of density of a wire is [Given, mass of wire =(0.60±0.003) g,…
- The energy of system is given as E(t)=α³e^-β t, where t is the time and β=0.3 s⁻¹. The errors in the measurem…
- The resistance R=V/I where V=(200±5) V and I=(20±0.2) A, the percentage error in the measurement of R is
- A physical quantity Q is found to depend on quantities a, b, c by the relation Q=(a⁴b³)/(c²). The percentage…
- If the percentage errors in measuring the length and the diameter of a wire are 0.1% each. The percentage err…
- A cylindrical wire of mass (0.4±0.01) g has length (8±0.04) cm and radius (6±0.03) mm. The maximum error in i…
- A physical quantity P is given as, P=(a²b³)/(c√d). The percentage errors in the measurement of a, b, c and d…
- A body of mass (5±0.5) kg is moving with a velocity of (20±0.4) m/s. Its kinetic energy will be
- The maximum error in the measurement of resistance, current and time for which current flows in an electrical…
- A torque meter is calibrated to reference standards of mass, length and time each with 5% accuracy. After cal…
- If Z=(A²B³)/(C⁴), then the relative error in Z will be
- A silver wire has a mass (0.6±0.006) g, radius (0.5±0.005) mm and length (4±0.04) cm. The maximum percentage…
- A physical quantity y is represented by the formula y=m²r⁻⁴g^xl^-3/2. If the percentage errors found in y, m,…
- A physical quantity z depends on four observables a, b, c and d, as z=(a²b^2/3)/(√c d³). The percentages of e…
- In the density measurement of a cube, the mass and edge length are measured as (10.00±0.10) kg and (0.10±0.01…
- The density of a material in the shape of a cube is determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its m…
- The relative error in the determination of the surface area of a sphere is α. Then the relative error in the…
- The percentage errors in quantities P, Q, R and S are 0.5%, 1%, 3% and 1.5% respectively in measurement of a…
- The relative uncertainty in the period of a satellite orbiting around the earth is 10⁻². If the relative unce…
- A physical quantity P is described by the relation P=a^1/2 b² c³ d⁻⁴. If the relative errors in the measureme…
- Resistance of a given wire is obtained by measuring the current flowing in it and the voltage difference appl…
- The amount of heat produced in an electric circuit depends upon the current (I), resistance (R) and time (t).…
- A physical quantity C is related to four other quantities p, q, r and s as follows C=(pq²)/(r³√s). The percen…
- A physical quantity Q is related to four observables a, b, c, d as follows: Q=(ab⁴)/(cd) where, a=(60±3) Pa;…
- For z=a²x³y^1/2, where a is a constant. If percentage error in measurement of x and y are 4% and 12%, respect…
- The resistance R=V/I, where V=(50±2) V and I=(20±0.2) A. The percentage error in R is x%. The value of x to t…
- The radius of a sphere is measured to be (7.50±0.85) cm. Suppose the percentage error in its volume is x. The…
- The density of a solid metal sphere is determined by measuring its mass and its diameter. The maximum error i…
- Dimensions of universal gravitational constant (G) in terms of Planck's constant (h), distance (L), mass (M)…
- Match List-I with List-II, where h (Planck's constant), G (gravitational constant) and c (speed of light in v…
- If mass is written as m=k c^PG^-1/2h^1/2 then the value of P will be: (Constants have their usual meaning wit…
- If force (F), velocity (V) and time (T) are considered as fundamental physical quantity, then dimensional for…
- If the velocity of light c, universal gravitational constant G and Planck's constant h are chosen as fundamen…
- If momentum [P], area [A] and time [T] are taken as fundamental quantities, then the dimensional formula for…
- Velocity (v) and acceleration (a) in two systems of units 1 and 2 are related as v₂=n/(m²)v₁ and a₂=(a₁)/(mn)…
- If force (F), length (L) and time (T) are taken as the fundamental quantities. Then what will be the dimensio…
- If velocity [V], time [T] and force [F] are chosen as the base quantities, the dimensions of the mass will be
- If time (t), velocity (v), and angular momentum (l) are taken as the fundamental units. Then the dimension of…
- If speed V, area A and force F are chosen as fundamental units, then the dimension of Young's modulus will be
- If momentum (p), area (A) and time (T) are taken to be the fundamental quantities, then the dimensional formu…
- The dimension of stopping potential V₀ in photoelectric effect in units of Planck's constant h, speed of ligh…
- A quantity f is given by f=√(hc⁵)/G where c is speed of light, G universal gravitational constant and h is th…
- If surface tension (S), moment of inertia (I) and Planck's constant (h), were to be taken as the fundamental…
- Expression for time in terms of G (universal gravitational constant), h (Planck's constant) and c (speed of l…
- If speed (V), acceleration (A) and force (F) are considered as fundamental units, the dimension of Young's mo…
- The characteristic distance at which quantum gravitational effects are significant, the Planck length, can be…
- Time (T), velocity (C) and angular momentum (h) are chosen as fundamental quantities instead of mass, length…
- If the capacitance of a nanocapacitor is measured in terms of a unit u made by combining the electronic charg…
- If electronic charge e, electron mass m, speed of light in vacuum c and Planck's constant h are taken as fund…
- The dimension of magnetic field in M, L, T and C (coulomb) is given as
- L, C and R represents physical quantities inductance, capacitance and resistance respectively. The dimensiona…
- The equation for real gas is given by (P+a/(V²))(V-b)=RT, where P, V, T and R are the pressure, volume, tempe…
- Given a charge q, current I and permeability of vacuum μ₀. Which of the following quantity has the dimension…
- The dimension of √(μ₀)/(ε₀) is equal to that of (μ₀= Vacuum permeability and ε₀= Vacuum permittivity)
- The energy E and momentum p of a moving body of mass m are related by some equation. Given that c represents…
- The pair of physical quantities not having same dimensions is
- If G be the gravitational constant and u be the energy density then which of the following quantity have the…
- Given below are two statements: Statement (I): Planck's constant and angular momentum have same dimensions. S…
- Dimension of 1/(μ₀ε₀) should be equal to
- Which of the following physical quantities have the same dimensions?
- Identify the pair of physical quantities which have different dimensions
- Identify the pair of physical quantities that have same dimensions
- If L, C and R are the self inductance, capacitance and resistance respectively, which of the following does n…
- Given below are two statements: One is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- If E, L, M and G denote the quantities as energy, angular momentum, mass and constant of gravitation respecti…
- If e is the electronic charge, c is the speed of light in free space and h is Planck's constant, the quantity…
- If C and V represent capacity and voltage respectively then what are the dimensions of λ, where C/V=λ?
- A quantity x is given by ((IFv²)/(WL⁴)) in terms of moment of inertia I, force F, velocity v, work W and leng…
- The quantities x=1/(√μ₀ε₀), y=E/B and z=l/(CR) are defined where C is capacitance, R is resistance, l is leng…
- In SI units, the dimensions of √(ε₀)/(μ₀) is
- Which of the following combinations has the dimension of electrical resistance (ε₀ is the permittivity of vac…
- Let l, r, c and v represent inductance, resistance, capacitance and voltage, respectively. The dimension of l…
- A, B, C and D are four different physical quantities having different dimensions. None of them is dimensionle…
- Out of the following pairs, which one does not have identical dimensions?
- The physical quantities not having same dimensions are
- Dimensions of 1/(μ₀ε₀), where symbols have their usual meanings, are
- Identify the pair whose dimensions are equal.
- In a resonance experiment two air columns closed at one end, of lengths 100 cm and 120 cm, give 15 beats per…
- Two harmonic waves moving in the same direction superpose to give x=a cos(1.5t)cos(50.5t), with t in seconds.…
- The velocity of sound in a gas in which two wavelengths 4.08 m and 4.16 m produce 40 beats in 12 s is
- Which figure shows, schematically, the wave pattern produced by the superposition of two waves of frequencies…
- Five beats per second are heard when a tuning fork is sounded with a sonometer wire under tension, for a wire…
- Two sitar strings A and B playing the note 'Dha' are slightly out of tune and produce beats of frequency 5 Hz…
- Three sound waves of equal amplitude have frequencies ( u-1), u and ( u+1). They superpose and give beats. Th…
- Two tuning forks sounded together give 4 beats per second. Tape is then attached to a prong of fork 2, and th…
- A tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz makes 5 beats per second with a vibrating piano string. When the tension in…
- A pair of tuning forks produces 4 beats per second, one fork having frequency 288 cps. A little wax is placed…
- Two tuning forks A and B sounded together give 8 beats in 2 s. When fork A is loaded with wax the beat freque…
- A tuning fork resonates with a sonometer wire of length 1 m under a tension of 6 N. When the tension is chang…
- A closed organ pipe 150 cm long gives 7 beats per second with an open organ pipe 350 cm long, both vibrating…
- A set of 20 tuning forks is arranged in order of increasing frequency, each fork giving 4 beats per second wi…
- The equation of a plane progressive wave is y=5 cos π(200t-x/(150)), where x and y are in cm and t in seconds…
- A sinusoidal wave of wavelength 7.5 cm travels 1.2 cm along the x-direction in 0.3 s. A crest P is at x=0 whe…
- The displacement of a wave is x(t)=5 cos (628t+π/2) m. If the wave velocity is 300 m s⁻¹, its wavelength is (…
- The equation of a wave on a string is y=sin(20π x+10π t), with x and t in SI units. The minimum distance betw…
- The equation of a transverse wave on a string is y(x,t)=4.0 sin [20×10⁻³x+600t] mm, where x is in mm and t in…
- A plane progressive wave is given by y=2 cos 2π(330t-x) m. The frequency of the wave is
- A travelling wave is described by y(x,t)=0.05 sin(8x-4t) m, with all quantities in SI units. The velocity of…
- A transverse wave is represented by y=2 sin(ω t-kx) cm. The wavelength, in cm, for which the wave velocity eq…
- In the wave equation y=0.5 sin (2π)/λ(400t-x) m, the velocity of the wave is
- A longitudinal wave is represented by x=10 sin 2π(nt-x/λ) cm. The maximum particle velocity is four times the…
- Which equation correctly represents a travelling wave of wavelength λ=4.0 cm and frequency u=100 Hz moving al…
- A sound wave of frequency 245 Hz travels at 300 m s⁻¹ along the positive x-axis, and each point of the medium…
- Which of the following equations represents a travelling wave?
- For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line, the distance between two crests is 5 m and the distan…
- [Figure: a snapshot at t=0 of a wave on the x-axis: the curve leaves the origin going downward, reaches a tro…
- A travelling harmonic wave is y(x,t)=10⁻³ sin(50t+2x), with x and y in metres and t in seconds. Which stateme…
- The disturbance of a wave moving in the positive x-direction is y=1/(1+x²) at t=0 and y=1/(1+(x-1)²) at t=2 s…
- The transverse displacement of a wave on a string is y(x,t)=e^-(ax²+bt²+2√ab xt). This represents
- A wave travelling along the x-axis is y(x,t)=0.005 cos(α x-β t). If the wavelength is 0.08 m and the time per…
- The displacement of a particle in a medium is y=10⁻⁶ sin (100t+20x+π/4) m, with t in seconds and x in metres.…
- The displacement of a wave travelling in the x-direction is y=10⁻⁴ sin (600t-2x+π/3) m, with x in metres and…
- A transverse wave on a string is y=3 sin (36t+0.018x+π/4), where x and y are in cm and t in seconds. The leas…
- A transverse harmonic wave on a string is y(x,t)=5 sin(6t+0.003x), where x and y are in cm and t in seconds.…
- The equation of a wave is y=10⁻² sin 2π(160t-0.5x+π/4), where x and y are in metres and t in seconds. The spe…
- The disturbance of a wave propagating in the positive x-direction is y=1/((1+x)²) at t=0 and y=1/(1+(x-2)²) a…
- In a sonometer experiment a mass of 180 g attached to the string makes it vibrate at a fundamental frequency…
- A wire of density 9×10⁻³ kg cm⁻³ is stretched between two clamps 1 m apart, producing a strain of 4.9×10⁻⁴ in…
- Two identical strings X and Z of the same material are under tensions T_X and T_Z. If their fundamental frequ…
- A wire of length 2L is made by joining two wires A and B of the same length and material but of radii r and 2…
- A string clamped at both ends vibrates in its fourth harmonic, the stationary wave being Y=0.3 sin(0.157x)cos…
- A string 2.0 m long, fixed at both ends, is driven by a 240 Hz vibrator and vibrates in its third harmonic mo…
- A wire of length L and mass per unit length 6.0×10⁻³ kg m⁻¹ is under a tension of 540 N. Two consecutive reso…
- A string of length 1 m and mass 5 g is fixed at both ends under a tension of 8.0 N, and is driven by an exter…
- A granite rod 60 cm long is clamped at its middle point and set into longitudinal vibrations. The density of…
- [Figure: two wires W₁ and W₂ of equal radius joined at a point O midway between the two bridges of a sonomete…
- A standing wave formed by two waves travelling in opposite directions has transverse displacement y(x,t)=0.5…
- A sonometer wire 1.5 m long is made of steel, and the tension in it produces an elastic strain of 1%. The fun…
- A sonometer wire 114 cm long is fixed at both ends. Where should the two bridges be placed to divide the wire…
- A travelling wave y=A sin(ω t-kx) is superposed on y=A sin(ω t+kx). The resultant is
- A string is stretched between fixed points 75 cm apart. It has resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and 315 Hz, wit…
- A metal wire of linear mass density 9.8 g m⁻¹ is stretched with a tension of 10 kg-wt between rigid supports…
- When the temperature increases, the frequency of a tuning fork
- A string tied to two rigid supports is 40 cm long. The maximum wavelength of a stationary wave produced on it…
- A wave y=a sin(ω t-kx) on a string meets another wave that produces a node at x=0. The equation of the unknow…
- A sonometer wire of resonating length 90 cm has a fundamental frequency of 400 Hz under a certain tension. Un…
- A guitar string of length 90 cm vibrates with a fundamental frequency of 120 Hz. The length of string giving…
- A wire of density 8×10³ kg m⁻³ is stretched between two clamps 0.5 m apart, the extension developed in the wi…
- The fundamental frequency of a string stretched between two rigid supports is 50 Hz. The mass of the string i…
- A wire 30 cm long, stretched between rigid supports, has its nth and (n+1)th harmonics at 400 Hz and 450 Hz.…
- Two travelling waves of equal amplitude and frequency move in opposite directions along a string and form the…
- A standing wave produced by two travelling waves is y=(1.0 mm)cos (1.57 cm⁻¹ x)sin (78.5 s⁻¹ t). The node clo…
- A wire of linear mass density 9.0×10⁻⁴ kg m⁻¹ is stretched between two rigid supports under a tension of 900…
- A body of mass M moving at a speed V₀ collides elastically with a mass m at rest. After the collision, the tw…
- A particle of mass m with an initial velocity ûi collides perfectly elastically with a mass 3m at rest. It m…
- Particle A of mass m₁ moving with velocity (√3̂i+̂j) m s⁻¹ collides with another particle B of mass m₂ which…
- Two particles of equal mass m have respective initial velocities ûi and u((̂i+̂j)/2). They collide completel…
- A particle of mass m is projected with a speed u from the ground at an angle θ=π/3 w.r.t. horizontal (x-axis)…
- A particle of mass 'm' moving with speed '2v' collides with a mass '2m' moving with speed 'v' in the same dir…
- Two particles, of masses M and 2M, moving, as shown, with speeds of 10 m/s and 5 m/s, collide elastically at…
- A proton of mass m collides elastically with a particle of unknown mass at rest. After the collision, the pro…
- Two particles A and B of equal mass M are moving with the same speed v as shown in the figure. They collide c…
- A particle of mass m moving in the x direction with speed 2v is hit by another particle of mass 2m moving in…
- A mass m moves with a velocity v and collides inelastically with another identical mass. After collision the…
- A ball of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity 10√3 m s⁻¹ along X-axis, hits another ball of mass 20 kg which is…
- A ball of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity 10√3 m/s along the x-axis, hits another ball of mass 20 kg which…
- A particle of mass m is moving along the x-axis with initial velocity ûi. It collides elastically with a par…
- Two bodies of the same mass are moving with the same speed, but in different directions in a plane. They have…
- A body A, of mass m=0.1 kg has an initial velocity of 3̂i m s⁻¹. It collides elastically with another body, B…
- As shown below, bob A of a pendulum having massless string of length 'R' is released from 60° to the vertical…
- Given below are two statements. One is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- As per the given figure, a small ball P slides down the quadrant of a circle and hits the other ball Q of equ…
- What percentage of kinetic energy of a moving particle is transferred to a stationary particle when it strike…
- Three objects A, B and C are kept in a straight line on a frictionless horizontal surface. The masses of A, B…
- An object of mass m₁ collides with another object of mass m₂, which is at rest. After the collision the objec…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- A body of mass m₁ moving with an unknown velocity of v₁̂i, undergoes a collinear collision with a body of mas…
- A body of mass 2 kg makes an elastic collision with a second body at rest and continues to move in the origin…
- A simple pendulum, made of a string of length l and a bob of mass m, is released from a small angle θ₀. It st…
- An alpha-particle of mass m suffers 1-dimensional elastic collision with a nucleus at rest of unknown mass. I…
- In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v₀ strikes a stationary particle of the same mass.…
- It is found that if a neutron suffers an elastic collinear collision with deuterium at rest, fractional loss…
- A neutron moving with a speed 'v' makes a head on collision with a stationary hydrogen atom in ground state.…
- A large number (n) of identical beads, each of mass m and radius r are strung on a thin smooth rigid horizont…
- A body of mass 1 kg collides head on elastically with a stationary body of mass 3 kg. After collision, the sm…
- A simple pendulum of length 1 m has a wooden bob of mass 1 kg. It is struck by a bullet of mass 10⁻² kg movin…
- A particle of mass m moving with velocity v collides with a stationary particle of mass 2m. After collision,…
- A ball of mass 200 g rests on a vertical post of height 20 m. A bullet of mass 10 g, travelling in horizontal…
- A bag of sand of mass 9.8 kg is suspended by a rope. A bullet of 200 g travelling with speed 10 m s⁻¹ gets em…
- A large block of wood of mass M=5.99 kg is hanging from two long massless cords. A bullet of mass m=10 g is f…
- A block of mass 1.9 kg is at rest at the edge of a table, of height 1 m. A bullet of mass 0.1 kg collides wit…
- Blocks of masses m, 2m, 4m and 8m are arranged in a line on a frictionless floor. Another block of mass m, mo…
- A particle of mass m is dropped from a height h above the ground. At the same time another particle of the sa…
- Three blocks A, B and C are lying on a smooth horizontal surface, as shown in the figure. A and B have equal…
- A piece of wood of mass 0.03 kg is dropped from the top of a 100 m height building. At the same time, a bulle…
- An object is dropped from a height h from the ground. Every time it hits the ground it looses 50% of its kine…
- A block of mass m=10 kg rests on a horizontal table. The coefficient of friction between the block and the ta…
- This question has Statement-I and Statement-II. Of the four choices given after the Statements, choose the on…
- Statement-I: Two particles moving in the same direction do not lose all their energy in a completely inelasti…
- Consider a rubber ball freely falling from a height h=4.9 m onto a horizontal elastic plate. Assume that the…
- A block of mass 0.50 kg is moving with a speed of 2.00 m s⁻¹ on a smooth surface. It strikes another mass of…
- A ball is dropped from a height of 20 m. If the coefficient of restitution for the collision between ball and…
- A man of 60 kg is running on the road and suddenly jumps into a stationary trolly car of mass 120 kg. Then, t…
- Four particles A, B, C, D of mass /m2, m, 2m, 4m, have same momentum, respectively. The particle with maximum…
- When kinetic energy of a body becomes 36 times of its original value, the percentage increase in the momentum…
- A stationary particle breaks into two parts of masses m_A and m_B which move with velocities v_A and v_B resp…
- Three bodies A, B and C have equal kinetic energies and their masses are 400 g, 1.2 kg and 1.6 kg respectivel…
- Two bodies of mass 4 g and 25 g are moving with equal kinetic energies. The ratio of magnitude of their linea…
- An artillery piece of mass M₁ fires a shell of mass M₂ horizontally. Instantaneously after the firing, the ra…
- Two bodies are having kinetic energies in the ratio 16:9. If they have same linear momentum, the ratio of the…
- A body of mass 8 kg and another of mass 2 kg are moving with equal kinetic energy. The ratio of their respect…
- If momentum of a body is increased by 20%, then its kinetic energy increases by
- Two bodies A and B of masses 5 kg and 8 kg are moving such that the momentum of body B is twice that of body…
- A block moving horizontally on a smooth surface with a speed of 40 m/s splits into two parts with masses in t…
- If the kinetic energy of a moving body becomes four times its initial kinetic energy, then the percentage cha…
- An athlete in the olympic games covers a distance of 100 m in 10 s. His kinetic energy can be estimated to be…
- A bomb of mass 16 kg at rest explodes into two pieces of masses of 4 kg and 12 kg. The velocity of the 12 kg…
- Consider the following two statements. A. Linear momentum of a system of particles is zero. B. Kinetic energy…
- If mass-energy equivalence is taken into account, when water is cooled to form ice, the mass of water should
- The momentum of a body is increased by 50%. The percentage increase in the kinetic energy of the body is %.
- A block moving horizontally on a smooth surface with a speed of 40 m s⁻¹ splits into two equal parts. If one…
- Two solids A and B of mass 1 kg and 2 kg respectively are moving with equal linear momentum. The ratio of the…
- Two particles having masses 4 g and 16 g respectively are moving with equal kinetic energies. The ratio of th…
- A motor operating on 100 V draws a current of 1 A. If the efficiency of the motor is 91.6%, the power lost is…
- A transformer of efficiency 80% works at 10 V and 4 kW. If the secondary voltage is 240 V, the secondary curr…
- The primary of a transformer is connected to 230 V, 50 Hz with a primary-to-secondary turns ratio 10:1. A loa…
- The primary of a transformer is connected to 220 V; the primary and secondary turns are 100 and 10. The secon…
- A transformer operating at primary voltage 8 kV and secondary voltage 160 V serves a load of 80 kW at unity p…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) AC generator, (B) Galvanometer, (C) Transformer, (D) Metal detector. L…
- For the circuit shown (see figure), with primary at 220 V and a secondary load of 60 W drawing i_L=0.11 A, co…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) Rectifier, (B) Stabilizer, (C) Transformer, (D) Filter. List-II: (i) u…
- A transformer with 300 turns in the primary and 150 turns in the secondary gives an output power of 2.2 kW. I…
- A power line feeds input power at 2300 V to a step-down transformer (primary 4000 turns). The output is at 23…
- In an a.c. generator a coil of N turns, all of area A and total resistance R, rotates with frequency ω in a m…
- The core of any transformer is laminated so as to
- In a transformer the primary has 140 turns and the secondary 280 turns. If the primary current is 4 A, the se…
- A power line feeds input power at 2.3 kV to a step-down transformer (primary 3000 turns). The output is deliv…
- An ideal transformer with a purely resistive load operates at 12 kV on the primary and supplies energy at 120…
- In an a.c. generator a rectangular coil of 100 turns, each of area 14×10⁻² m², is rotated at 360 rev/min abou…
- An a.c. source of angular frequency ω is connected across a resistor R and a capacitor C in series; the curre…
- In an a.c. circuit the instantaneous current is zero when the instantaneous voltage is maximum. The source ma…
- Match List-I with List-II (phasor diagrams). List-I: (A) Purely capacitive circuit, (B) Purely inductive circ…
- A bulb and a capacitor are connected in series across an a.c. supply. A dielectric is then inserted between t…
- A capacitor of capacitance 150.0 μF is connected to an alternating emf E=36 sin(120π t) V. The maximum value…
- From the given graph (see figure), choose the correct representation of curve A and curve B, where X_C is the…
- If R, X_L and X_C are resistance, inductive reactance and capacitive reactance, which of the following is dim…
- An alternating source V=260 sin(628t) V is connected across a pure inductor of 5 mH. The inductive reactance…
- The r.m.s. conduction current in a parallel-plate capacitor is 6.9 μA. If it is connected to a 230 V a.c. sup…
- The current in a purely inductive circuit is 5 sin(49π t-30°) A. If the inductance is 30 mH, the voltage acro…
- An alternating emf E=440 sin(100π t) is applied to a circuit containing an inductance of (√2)/π H. If an a.c.…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) ω L>1/(ω C), (B) ω L=1/(ω C), (C) ω L<1/(ω C), (D) resonant frequency.…
- A circuit has a capacitor and a generator of emf E_g=E_g0 sin ω t, with V_C and I_C the capacitor voltage and…
- An RC circuit (see figure) is driven by an a.c. source generating a square wave. The output waveform seen on…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) phase difference between current and voltage in a purely resistive a.c…
- In a purely inductive circuit, what happens to the inductive reactance and the current if the frequency is ha…
- An inductance coil has an impedance of 100 Ω. When an a.c. signal of frequency 1000 Hz is applied, the applie…
- In an LC circuit L=40 mH and C=100 μF. If V(t)=10 sin(314t) V is applied, the current is
- A series LR circuit is connected to a source V(t)=V₀ sin ω t. After a very long time (t₀L/R) the current I(t)…
- The phase difference between the alternating current and emf is π/2. Which of the following cannot be the con…
- An inductor stores 16 J of magnetic energy and dissipates 32 W of thermal power (in its resistance) when an r…
- For the a.c. bridge shown (see figure) with R=100 Ω and C=100 pF, the phase difference between Vᵢₙ and (V_B-V…
- A d.c. voltage of 100 V through an inductor gives 5 A. When an a.c. of peak value 200 V is applied, the induc…
- An alternating emf E=110√2 sin(100t) V is applied to a capacitor of 2 μF. The r.m.s. current in the circuit i…
- For the network shown (see figure) across 220 V, the effective current I at very high frequencies is A.
- An inductor of 200 mH is connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz a.c. source. The instantaneous source voltage is 0 V whe…
- At very high frequencies the effective impedance of the network shown (see figure, resistors 1 Ω, 2 Ω with ca…
- A series circuit driven at Eᵣₘₛ=90 V, f=30 Hz has R=80 Ω, inductive reactance X_L=20.0 Ω and capacitive react…
- For a series LCR circuit connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz a.c. source (see figure) with X_L=70 Ω, X_C=150 Ω and R=…
- In an a.c. circuit the voltage and current are V=100 sin(100t) V and I=100 sin (100t+π/3) mA. The average pow…
- A series LR circuit driven by E=(25 sin 1000t) V has power factor 1/(√2). If the source is changed to E=(20 s…
- An a.c. voltage V=20 sin(200π t) V applied to a series LCR circuit drives a current I=10 sin (200π t+π/3) A.…
- Statement I: Maximum power is dissipated in a series LCR circuit with an a.c. source when resonance occurs. S…
- In a series LR circuit with X_L=R the power factor is P₁. A capacitor with X_C=X_L is then added in series an…
- Statement-I: The reactance of a circuit is zero; it is possible that the circuit contains a capacitor and an…
- If a wattless current flows in an a.c. circuit, the circuit is
- In a series LCR circuit X_L=10 Ω, X_C=4 Ω and R=6 Ω. The power factor is
- A 750 Hz, 20 V (r.m.s.) source drives a series circuit of R=100 Ω, L=0.1803 H and C=10 μF. The time for the r…
- One kg of water at 20°C is heated in a kettle whose element has mean resistance 20 Ω; the mains r.m.s. voltag…
- A series a.c. circuit has an inductor (20 mH), a capacitor (120 μF) and a resistor (60 Ω), driven by 24 V/50…
- In an a.c. circuit the instantaneous emf and current are e=100 sin 30t and i=20 sin (30t-π/4). In one cycle,…
- In the LCR circuit shown (see figure) the current leads the applied voltage. Adding a capacitor C' to the exi…
- A series LR circuit at frequency ω has inductive reactance 2R. A capacitor of capacitive reactance R is then…
- A series LCR circuit has R=200 Ω across a 220 V, 50 Hz supply. Removing the capacitor makes the current lag b…
- In an a.c. circuit the applied voltage is E=E₀ sin ω t and the current is I=I₀ sin (ω t-π/2). The power consu…
- A circuit has a resistance of 12 Ω and an impedance of 15 Ω. The power factor is
- The power factor of an a.c. circuit with resistance R and inductance L in series at angular frequency ω is
- An inductor of reactance 100 Ω, a capacitor of reactance 50 Ω and a resistor of 50 Ω are in series with a 10…
- A capacitor of reactance 4√3 Ω and a resistor of 4 Ω are in series with an a.c. source of peak value 8√2 V. T…
- A series LCR circuit with L=(100)/π mH, C=(10⁻³)/π F and R=10 Ω is across a 220 V, 50 Hz supply. The power fa…
- A series LCR circuit across a 220 V, 50 Hz source has R=80 Ω, X_L=70 Ω and X_C=130 Ω. The power factor is x/(…
- A 220 V, 50 Hz source runs a 25 V, 5 W lamp in series with an additional resistance R (see figure) so the lam…
- An a.c. source V=20√2 sin(100t) drives a series circuit of L=100 mH, C=100 μF and R=120 Ω. The time in which…
- An a.c. circuit has an inductor and resistor R in series with X_L=3R. A capacitor with X_C=2R is then added i…
- A series LCR circuit with R=5 Ω and L=20 mH is across a 250 V variable-frequency supply. The power dissipated…
- A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 250 V is applied to a series LCR circuit with R=8 Ω, L=24 mH and C=60 μF.…
- In a series LR circuit, 400 W is dissipated from a 250 V, 50 Hz source at power factor 0.8. To raise the powe…
- Two statements are given. Statement I: In a series LCR circuit the current is maximum at resonance. Statement…
- A series LCR circuit is at resonance for given C, L and R. The resistance is now halved with all other parame…
- In a series LCR circuit the capacitance is changed from C to 4C. To keep the resonant frequency unchanged, th…
- Statement I: When the frequency of an a.c. source in a series LCR circuit increases, the current first increa…
- Statement I: An a.c. circuit undergoes electrical resonance if it contains either a capacitor or an inductor.…
- Circuit (i) is a 40 Ω resistor across 220 V, 50 Hz; circuit (ii) is 40 Ω, 50 mH and 0.5 μF in series across t…
- To increase the resonant frequency in a series LCR circuit,
- A series LCR circuit has L=0.01 H, R=10 Ω and C=1 μF, connected to an a.c. voltage of amplitude 50 V. At a fr…
- For a series LCR circuit the I vs ω curve is shown (see figure). (A) To the left of ωₘ the circuit is mainly…
- A series LCR circuit driven by 300 V at 50 Hz has R=3 kΩ, inductive reactance X_L=250π Ω and an unknown capac…
- A 100 Ω resistance, a 0.1 μF capacitor and an inductor are in series across a 250 V variable-frequency supply…
- An LCR circuit has R=110 Ω across a 220 V supply at 300 rad/s. Removing only the capacitance makes the curren…
- For the series circuit shown (see figure) with L=100 mH, C=100 μF, R=120 Ω and V=30 sin(100t) V, the peak cur…
- In a series resonant LCR circuit the voltage across R is 100 V with R=1 kΩ and C=2 μF. The resonant frequency…
- The self-inductance of the motor of an electric fan is 10 H. To draw maximum power at 50 Hz, it should be con…
- In an LCR circuit the capacitance is changed from C to 2C. For the resonant frequency to stay the same, the i…
- A series LCR circuit with R=20 Ω, L=1.6 H and C=40 μF is driven by a variable-frequency source. The inductive…
- Using a variable-frequency source, the maximum current in the LCR circuit (see figure, L=2 H, R=100 Ω) is 50…
- A series LCR circuit uses R=300 Ω, C=25 nF and L=100 mH. For maximum current the angular frequency of the sou…
- In a series LCR circuit the maximum current is drawn when the variable capacitance is 2.5 nF, with R=200 Ω an…
- A series LCR circuit across a 220 V, 50 Hz source has an inductor of reactance X_L=79.6 Ω. The capacitance ne…
- An LCR series circuit has C=62.5 nF and R=50 Ω, driven at 2.0 kHz. For the maximum current amplitude the indu…
- An inductor of 0.5 mH, a capacitor of 20 μF and a resistance of 20 Ω are in series with a 220 V a.c. source.…
- The frequencies at which the current amplitude in a series LCR circuit falls to 1/(√2) of its maximum are 212…
- A 110 V, 50 Hz a.c. source drives the circuit shown (a parallel L-C combination in series with a 55 Ω resisto…
- A telegraph line 100 km long has a capacitance of 0.01 μF/km and carries an alternating current at 0.5 kilocy…
- In the circuit, |V_L| and |V_C| are each twice |V_R|, with R=5 Ω and f=50 Hz. The inductance of the coil is 1…
- An inductor of 0.5 mH, a capacitor of 200 μF and a resistor of 2 Ω are in series with a 220 V a.c. source. If…
- A series LCR circuit with R=(250)/(11) Ω and X_L=(70)/(11) Ω is across a 220 V, 50 Hz supply. The capacitance…
- Two circuits are shown: (a) a 5 Ω resistor across 220 V, and (b) a 40 μF capacitor, 5 Ω resistor and 0.1 H in…
- A series LCR circuit resonates at ω₀=10⁵ rad/s and draws 16 W from a 120 V source at resonance. The resistanc…
- A transmitting station emits waves of wavelength 960 m. A capacitor of 2.56 μF is used in the resonant circui…
- The figure shows an LCR series circuit with two switches S₁ and S₂, a capacitor C=100 μF, a resistor R and tw…
- A series LCR circuit is fed by a 200 V, 50 Hz a.c. signal. If the voltage across the inductor (L=10 mH) is 31…
- A coil of negligible resistance is in series with a 90 Ω resistor across a 120 V, 60 Hz supply. A voltmeter r…
- In a series circuit X_L=200 Ω, X_C=100 Ω and R=100 Ω with Vᵣₘₛ=200√2 V. The r.m.s. current through the resist…
- An element X across an a.c. supply of peak voltage 100 V gives a peak current of 5 A in phase with the voltag…
- A voltage V(t)=210 sin(3000t) V is applied to a series LCR circuit with L=10 mH, C=25 μF and R=100 Ω. The pha…
- In an a.c. circuit an inductor, a capacitor and a resistor are in series with X_L=R=X_C. The impedance of thi…
- A series LCR circuit with R=100 Ω, L=0.5 mH and C=0.1 pF is connected across a 220 V--50 Hz a.c. supply. The…
- A 0.07 H inductor and a 12 Ω resistor are in series across a 220 V, 50 Hz a.c. source. The current and the ph…
- The angular frequency of the alternating current in an LCR circuit is 100 rad/s. From the figure the voltage…
- A circuit fed by e=e₀ sin(100t) (t in seconds) shows a phase difference of π/4 between emf and current. Which…
- A sinusoidal voltage of peak 283 V and angular frequency 320 s⁻¹ is applied to a series LCR circuit with R=5…
- In a series LCR circuit the r.m.s. voltages satisfy V_L:V_C:V_R=1:2:3. If the source r.m.s. voltage is 100 V,…
- In a series LCR a.c. circuit the voltage across each of L, C and R is 50 V. The voltage across the L-C combin…
- An inductor of 10 mH, a capacitor of 0.1 μF and a resistor of 100 Ω are in series across a 220 V, 70 Hz suppl…
- An inductor of 1 H is in series with a resistor of 100π Ω across a 100π V, 50 Hz a.c. supply. The maximum cur…
- A series LCR circuit has R=80 Ω, X_L=100 Ω and X_C=40 Ω. The input voltage is 2500 cos(100π t) V. The current…
- To light a 50 W, 100 V lamp it is placed in series with a capacitor of capacitance (50)/(π√x) μF across a 200…
- A series LCR circuit has L=100 mH, C=100 μF and R=10 Ω across a 220 V, 50 Hz source. The approximate current…
- A series LCR circuit has an inductor 30 mH and a resistor 1 Ω across an a.c. source of angular frequency 300…
- Angular momentum of an electron in a hydrogen atom is (3h)/π, then the energy of the electron is eV.
- The energy of an electron in an orbit of the Bohr's atom is -0.04E₀ eV, where E₀ is the ground state energy.…
- Two electrons are moving in orbits of two hydrogen like atoms with speeds 3×10⁵ m/s and 2.5×10⁵ m/s respectiv…
- Considering Bohr's atomic model for hydrogen atom: (A) the energy of H atom in ground state is same as energy…
- Assuming the validity of Bohr's atomic model for hydrogen like ions the radius of Li⁺⁺ ion in its ground stat…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- Considering the Bohr model of hydrogen like atoms, the ratio of the radius of 5^th orbit of the electron in L…
- Given below are two statements Statement (I): The dimensions of Planck's constant and angular momentum are sa…
- In a hydrogen like ion, the energy difference between the 2^nd excitation energy state and ground is 108.8 eV…
- An electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom has the orbital radius of 5.3×10⁻¹¹ m while that for the…
- An electron projected perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field B moves in a circle. If Bohr's quantization i…
- The frequency of revolution of the electron in Bohr's orbit varies with n, the principal quantum number as
- According to Bohr's theory, the moment of momentum of an electron revolving in 4^th orbit of hydrogen atom is
- An electron rotates in a circle around a nucleus having positive charge Ze. Correct relation between total en…
- The angular momentum of an electron in a hydrogen atom is proportional to (where r is the radius of the orbit…
- The radius of third stationary orbit of electron for Bohr's atom is R. The radius of fourth stationary orbit…
- The ratio of the magnitude of the kinetic energy to the potential energy of an electron in the 5^th excited s…
- An electron revolving in n^th Bohr orbit has magnetic moment μₙ. If μₙ∝ n^x, the value of x is
- A small particle of mass m moves in such a way that its potential energy U=1/2mω²r², where ω is constant and…
- The angular momentum for the electron in Bohr's orbit is L. If the electron is assumed to revolve in second o…
- The energy of He⁺ ion in its first excited state is, (The ground state energy for the Hydrogen atom is -13.6…
- Speed of an electron in Bohr's 7^th orbit for Hydrogen atom is 3.6×10⁶ m/s. The corresponding speed of the el…
- The radius of electron's second stationary orbit in Bohr's atom is R. The radius of 3^rd orbit will be
- The momentum of an electron revolving in n^th orbit is given by (Symbols have their usual meanings)
- The magnetic moment of an electron (e) revolving in an orbit around nucleus with an orbital angular momentum…
- In Bohr's atomic model of hydrogen, let K, P and E are the kinetic energy, potential energy and total energy…
- The ratio for the speed of the electron in the 3^rd orbit of He⁺ to the speed of the electron in the 3^rd orb…
- A hydrogen atom in its ground state absorbs 10.2 eV of energy. The angular momentum of electron of the hydrog…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: In hydrogen atom, the frequency of radiation emitted when an ele…
- Which level of the single ionized carbon has the same energy as the ground state energy of hydrogen atom?
- If an electron is moving in the n^th orbit of the hydrogen atom then its velocity (vₙ) for the n^th orbit is…
- Imagine that the electron in a hydrogen atom is replaced by a muon (μ). The mass of muon particle is 207 time…
- The time period of revolution of electron in its ground state orbit in a hydrogen atom is 1.6×10⁻¹⁶ s. The fr…
- A He⁺ ion is in its first excited state. Its ionization energy is
- Consider an electron in a hydrogen atom, revolving in its second excited state (having radius 4.65 A). The de…
- A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit in a central potential field U(r)=1/2kr². If Bohr's quantizati…
- The energy required to remove the electron from a singly ionized Helium atom is 2.2 times the energy required…
- Muon (μ⁻) is a negatively charged (|q|=|e|) particle with a mass m_μ=200mₑ, where mₑ is the mass of the elect…
- According to Bohr's theory, the time averaged magnetic field at the centre (i.e. nucleus) of a hydrogen atom…
- The acceleration of an electron in the first orbit of hydrogen atom (n=1) is
- As an electron makes a transition from an excited state to the ground state of a hydrogen-like atom/ion
- If one were to apply Bohr model to a particle of mass m and charge q moving in a plane under the influence of…
- If the binding energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV, the energy required to remove the electr…
- In the Bohr's model of hydrogen-like atom, the force between the nucleus and the electron is modified as F=(e…
- A diatomic molecule is made of two masses m₁ and m₂ which are separated by a distance r. If we calculate its…
- Ionisation energy of Li (Lithium) atom in ground state is 5.4 eV. Binding energy of an electron in Li⁺ ion in…
- Which of the plots shown in the figure represents speed (v) of the electron in a hydrogen atom as a function…
- Energy required for the electron excitation in Li⁺⁺ from the first to the third Bohr orbit is
- Suppose an electron is attracted towards the origin by a force k/r where k is a constant and r is the distanc…
- Which of the following atoms has the lowest ionization potential?
- If 13.6 eV energy is required to ionize the hydrogen atom, then the energy required to remove an electron fro…
- Using Bohr's model, calculate the ratio of the magnetic fields generated due to the motion of the electrons i…
- Radius of a certain orbit of hydrogen atom is 8.48 A. If energy of electron in this orbit is E/x, then x= . (…
- The radius of fifth orbit of the Li⁺⁺ is ×10⁻¹² m. (Take, radius of hydrogen atom =0.51 A)
- Experimentally it is found that 12.8 eV energy is required to separate a hydrogen atom into a proton and an e…
- The radius of 2^nd orbit of He⁺ of Bohr's model is r₁ and that of fourth orbit of Be³⁺ is represented as r₂.…
- A light of energy 12.75 eV incident on a hydrogen atom in its ground state. The atom absorbs the radiation an…
- In Bohr's atomic model, the electron is assumed to revolve in a circular orbit of radius 0.5 A. If the speed…
- A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit in a central potential field U(r)=U₀r⁴. If Bohr's quantization…
- If the binding energy of ground state electron in a hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV, then, the energy required to re…
- In the hydrogen atom, the electron makes a transition from the higher orbit (i) to a lower orbit (f). The rat…
- The ratio of momentum of the photons of the 1st and 2nd line of Balmer series of hydrogen atoms is α/β. The p…
- The smallest wavelength of Lyman series is 91 nm. The difference between the largest wavelengths of Paschen a…
- In hydrogen atom spectrum, (R→ Rydberg's constant) (A) the maximum wavelength of the radiation of Lyman serie…
- For a hydrogen atom, the ratio of the largest wavelength of Lyman series to that of the Balmer series is
- During the transition of electron from state A to state C of a Bohr atom, the wavelength of emitted radiation…
- The number of spectral lines emitted by atomic hydrogen that is in the 4^th energy level, is
- The ratio of the shortest wavelength of Balmer series to the shortest wavelength of Lyman series for hydrogen…
- The longest wavelength associated with Paschen series is (Given R_H=1.097×10⁷ SI unit)
- A hydrogen atom in ground state is given an energy of 10.2 eV. How many spectral lines will be emitted due to…
- The minimum energy required by a hydrogen atom in ground state to emit radiation in Balmer series is nearly
- If the wavelength of the first member of Lyman series of hydrogen is λ. The wavelength of the second member w…
- The energy levels of an hydrogen atom are shown below. The transition corresponding to emission of shortest w…
- A 12.5 eV electron beam is used to bombard gaseous hydrogen at room temperature. The number of spectral lines…
- An electron of a hydrogen like atom, having Z=4, jumps from 4^th energy state to 2^nd energy state. The energ…
- A photon is emitted in transition from n=4 to n=1 level in hydrogen atom. The corresponding wavelength for th…
- The energy levels of an atom is shown in figure. Which one of these transitions will result in the emission o…
- Hydrogen atom from excited state comes to the ground state by emitting a photon of wavelength λ. The value of…
- Find the ratio of energies of photons produced due to transition of an electron of hydrogen atom from its (i)…
- A particular hydrogen like ion emits radiation of frequency 2.92×10¹⁵ Hz when it makes transition from n=3 to…
- A free electron of 2.6 eV energy collides with a H⁺ ion. This results in the formation of a hydrogen atom in…
- The radiation corresponding to 3→2 transition of a hydrogen atom falls on a gold surface to generate photoele…
- An electron and proton are separated by a large distance. The electron starts approaching the proton with ene…
- The atomic hydrogen emits a line spectrum consisting of various series. Which series of hydrogen atomic spect…
- In the given figure, the energy levels of hydrogen atom have been shown along with some transitions marked A,…
- According to Bohr atom model, in which of the following transitions will the frequency be maximum?
- The wavelength of the photon emitted by a hydrogen atom when an electron makes a transition from n=2 to n=1 s…
- If λ₁ and λ₂ are the wavelengths of the third member of Lyman and first member of the Paschen series respecti…
- The recoil speed of a hydrogen atom after it emits a photon in going from n=5 state to n=1 state will be
- In a hydrogen atom the electron makes a transition from (n+1)^th level to the n^th level. If n1, the frequenc…
- The energy required to ionise a hydrogen like ion in its ground state is 9 Rydbergs. What is the wavelength o…
- Radiation coming from transitions n=2 to n=1 of hydrogen atoms fall on He⁺ ions in n=1 and n=2 states. The po…
- Taking the wavelength of first Balmer line in hydrogen spectrum (n=3 to n=2) as 660 nm, the wavelength of the…
- In Li⁺⁺, electron in first Bohr orbit is excited to a level by a radiation of wavelength λ. When the ion gets…
- An excited He⁺ ion emits two photons in succession, with wavelengths 108.5 nm and 30.4 nm, in making a transi…
- The electron in a hydrogen atom first jumps from the third excited state to the second excited state and subs…
- A hydrogen atom, initially in the ground state, is excited by absorbing a photon of wavelength 980 A. The rad…
- In a hydrogen like atom, when an electron jumps from the M-shell to the L-shell, the wavelength of emitted ra…
- An electron from various excited states of hydrogen atom emit radiation to come to the ground state. Let λₙ,…
- If the series limit frequency of the Lyman series is u_L, then the series limit frequency of the Pfund series…
- Some energy levels of a molecule are shown in the figure. The ratio of the wavelengths r=(λ₁)/(λ₂) is given by
- A hydrogen atom makes a transition from n=2 to n=1 and emits a photon. This photon strikes a doubly ionized l…
- The radiation corresponding to 3→2 transition of hydrogen atom falls on a metal surface to produce photoelect…
- Hydrogen (₁H¹), Deuterium (₁H²), singly ionised Helium (₂He⁴)⁺ and doubly ionised lithium (₃Li⁶)⁺⁺ all have o…
- In a hydrogen like atom electron makes transition from an energy level with quantum number n to another with…
- Hydrogen atom is excited from ground state to another state with principal quantum number equal to 4. Then th…
- A doubly ionised Li atom is excited from its ground state (n=1) to n=3 state. The wavelengths of the spectral…
- The transition from the state n=4 to n=3 in a hydrogen like atom results in ultraviolet radiation. Infrared r…
- Which of the following transitions in hydrogen atoms emit photons of highest frequency?
- The diagram shows the energy levels for an electron in a certain atom. Which transition shown represents the…
- An electron in the hydrogen atom initially in the fourth excited state makes a transition to n^th energy stat…
- A hydrogen atom changes its state from n=3 to n=2. Due to recoil, the percentage change in the wavelength of…
- The shortest wavelength of the spectral lines in the Lyman series of hydrogen spectrum is 915 A. The longest…
- A particular hydrogen-like ion emits the radiation of frequency 3×10¹⁵ Hz when it makes transition from n=2 t…
- If Rydberg's constant is R, the longest wavelength of radiation in Paschen series will be α/(7R), where α= .
- When a hydrogen atom going from n=2 to n=1 emits a photon, its recoil speed is /x5 m/s. Where x= . (Use mass…
- Hydrogen atom is bombarded with electrons accelerated through a potential difference of V, which causes excit…
- A electron of hydrogen atom on an excited state is having energy Eₙ=-0.85 eV. The maximum number of allowed t…
- The ratio of wavelength of spectral lines H_α and H_β in the Balmer series is x/(20). The value of x is .
- If 917 A be the lowest wavelength of Lyman series then the lowest wavelength of Balmer series will be A.
- A monochromatic light is incident on a hydrogen sample in ground state. Hydrogen atoms absorb a fraction of l…
- An atom absorbs a photon of wavelength 500 nm and emits another photon of wavelength 600 nm. The net energy a…
- As per given figure A, B and C are the first, second and third excited energy levels of hydrogen atom respect…
- The wavelength of the radiation emitted is λ₀ when an electron jumps from the second excited state to the fir…
- For hydrogen atom, λ₁ and λ₂ are the wavelengths corresponding to the transitions 1 and 2 respectively as sho…
- x/(x+4) is the ratio of energies of photons produced due to transition of an electron of hydrogen atom from i…
- In a hydrogen spectrum, λ be the wavelength of first transition line of Lyman series. The wavelength differen…
- A beam of monochromatic light is used to excite the electron in Li⁺⁺ from the first orbit to the third orbit.…
- X different wavelengths may be observed in the spectrum from a hydrogen sample if the atoms are exited to sta…
- The K_α X-ray of molybdenum has wavelength 0.071 nm. If the energy of a molybdenum atom with a K electron kno…
- The first three spectral lines of H-atom in the Balmer series are given λ₁, λ₂, λ₃ considering the Bohr atomi…
- In the line spectra of hydrogen atom, difference between the largest and the shortest wavelengths of the Lyma…
- A particle of mass 200 MeV/c² collides with a hydrogen atom at rest. Soon after the collision the particle co…
- The first member of the Balmer series of hydrogen atom has a wavelength of 6561 A. The wavelength of the seco…
- The voltage and the current between A and B points shown in the circuit are . [Figure: a left vertical rail a…
- Two identical cells each of emf 1.5 V are connected in parallel across a parallel combination of two resistor…
- Refer to the figure given below, current between terminals A and B is A. [Figure: four parallel rows between…
- For the two cells having same EMF E and internal resistance r, the current passing through the external resis…
- Given below are two statements: Statement-I: The equivalent emf of two non-ideal batteries connected in paral…
- In the given circuit, the terminal potential difference of the cell is [Figure: a cell of emf 3 V with intern…
- The reading in the ideal voltmeter (V) shown in the given circuit diagram is [Figure: a single closed loop of…
- Two sources of equal emfs are connected in series. This combination is connected to an external resistance R.…
- Two cells of same emf but different internal resistances r₁ and r₂ are connected in series with a resistance…
- The combination of two identical cells, whether connected in series or parallel combination provides the same…
- Five identical cells each of internal resistance 1 Ω and emf 5 V are connected in series and in parallel with…
- A cell E₁ of emf 6 V and internal resistance 2 Ω is connected with another cell E₂ of emf 4 V and internal re…
- In the given circuit, an ideal voltmeter connected across the 10 Ω resistance reads 2 V. The internal resista…
- In the circuit shown, the potential difference between A and B is [Figure: A connects through 5 Ω to node D.…
- Two batteries with e.m.f. 12 V and 13 V are connected in parallel across a load resistor of 10 Ω. The interna…
- A 10 V battery with internal resistance 1 Ω and a 15 V battery with internal resistance 0.6 Ω are connected i…
- A 5 V battery with internal resistance 2 Ω and 2 V battery with internal resistance 1 Ω are connected to a 10…
- Two sources of equal emf are connected to an external resistance R. The internal resistances of the two sourc…
- An energy source will supply a constant current into the load if its internal resistance is
- When an external resistance of 5 Ω is connected across terminals of a cell, a current of 0.25 A flows through…
- Two cells of emfs 1 V and 2 V and internal resistance 2 Ω and 1 Ω, respectively connected in parallel, gave a…
- Two cells of emfs 1 V and 2 V and internal resistances 2 Ω and 1 Ω, respectively, are connected in series wit…
- Two cells are connected in opposition as shown. Cell E₁ is of 8 V emf and 2 Ω internal resistance, the cell E…
- In the circuit diagram shown in figure given below, the current flowing through resistance 3 Ω is x/3 A. The…
- Two identical cells each of emf 1.5 V are connected in series across a 10 Ω resistance. An ideal voltmeter co…
- Two cells are connected between points A and B as shown. Cell 1 has emf of 12 V and internal resistance of 3…
- Two identical cells, when connected either in parallel or in series gives same current in an external resista…
- In the given figure, the value of V₀ will be V. [Figure: three branches in parallel between a grounded left w…
- First, a set of n equal resistor of 10 Ω each are connected in series to a battery of emf 20 V and internal r…
- In an electric circuit, a cell of certain emf provides a potential difference of 1.25 V across a load resista…
- The series combination of two batteries, both of the same emf 10 V, but different internal resistance of 20 Ω…
- A battery of 3.0 V is connected to a resistor dissipating 0.5 W of power. If the terminal voltage of the batt…
- Two known resistance of R Ω and 2R Ω and one unknown resistance X Ω are connected in a circuit as shown in th…
- A wire of uniform resistance λ Ω/m is bent into a circle of radius r and another piece of wire with length 2r…
- A regular hexagon is formed by six wires each of resistance r Ω and the corners are joined to the centre by w…
- A wire of length 25 m and cross-sectional area 5 mm² having resistivity of 2×10⁻⁶ Ω m is bent into a complete…
- From the combination of resistors with resistances values R₁=R₂=R₃=5 Ω and R₄=10 Ω, which of the following co…
- A wire of resistance R is bent into an equilateral triangle and an identical wire is bent into a square. The…
- Find the equivalent resistance between two ends of the following circuit [Figure: a straight line from the le…
- In the given figure R₁=10 Ω, R₂=8 Ω, R₃=4 Ω and R₄=8 Ω. Battery is ideal with emf 12 V. Equivalent resistance…
- The equivalent resistance between A and B is [Figure: a rectangular loop drawn as a 3 by 2 grid. The top-left…
- The effective resistance between A and B, if resistance of each resistor is R, will be [Figure: A joins throu…
- A wire of resistance R and length L is cut into 5 equal parts. If these parts are joined parallelly, then res…
- In the given circuit, the current in resistance R₃ is [Figure: a 10 V cell on the bottom wire; the top path h…
- A potential divider circuit is shown in figure. The output voltage V₀ is [Figure: a 4 V cell connected across…
- The equivalent resistance between A and B as shown in figure is [Figure: a line from A passes 20 kΩ to point…
- The current flowing through R₂ is [Figure: an 8 V battery is connected between nodes E and A. R₅=2 Ω joins E…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: The equivalent resistance of resistors in a series combination i…
- Equivalent resistance between the adjacent corners of a regular n-side polygon of uniform wire of resistance…
- As shown in the figure, a network of resistors is connected to a battery of 24 V with an internal resistance…
- The equivalent resistance between A and B is . [Figure: a rectangle whose left side is a plain wire (node A)…
- Given below are two statements. Statement I: A uniform wire of resistance 80 Ω is cut into four equal parts.…
- What will be the most suitable combination of three resistors A=2 Ω, B=4 Ω, C=6 Ω, so that ((22)/3)Ω is equiv…
- The equivalent resistance between points A and B in the given network is [Figure: nodes A, P, Q, S, B. From A…
- If you are provided a set of resistances 2 Ω, 4 Ω, 6 Ω and 8 Ω. Connect these resistances so as to obtain an…
- The equivalent resistance of the given circuit between the terminals A and B is [Figure: a ladder between a t…
- Five equal resistances are connected in a network as shown in figure. The net resistance between the points A…
- A wire of resistance R is bent to form a square ABCD as shown in the figure. The effective resistance between…
- A metal wire of resistance 3 Ω is elongated to make a uniform wire of double its previous length. This new wi…
- A uniform metallic wire has a resistance of 18 Ω and is bent into an equilateral triangle. Then, the resistan…
- In the given circuit all resistances are of value R ohm each. The equivalent resistance between A and B is [F…
- A letter 'A' is constructed of a uniform wire with resistance 1.0 Ω per cm. The sides of the letter are 20 cm…
- The resistance of the series combination of two resistances is S. When they are joined in parallel the total…
- The equivalent resistance between the points A and B in the following circuit is x/5 Ω. The value of x is . […
- The net current flowing in the given circuit is A. [Figure: a ladder with a bottom rail G. A 2 V cell sits in…
- A wire of resistance 9 Ω is bent to form an equilateral triangle. Then the equivalent resistance across any t…
- Twelve wires each having resistance 2Ω are joined to form a cube. A battery of 6 V emf is joined across point…
- A wire of resistance 20 Ω is divided into 10 equal parts, resulting pairs. A combination of two parts are con…
- To determine the resistance (R) of a wire, a circuit is designed below. The V-I characteristic curve for this…
- Equivalent resistance of the following network is Ω. [Figure: a top rail ending at terminal A and a bottom ra…
- 10 resistors each of resistance 10 Ω can be connected in such as to get maximum and minimum equivalent resist…
- In the given circuit, the equivalent resistance between the terminal A and B is Ω. [Figure: A connects throug…
- The current I flowing through the given circuit will be A. [Figure: three 9 Ω resistors drawn in a row betwee…
- The total current supplied to the circuit as shown in figure by the 5 V battery is A. [Figure: a circular wir…
- In the given circuit a is an arbitrary constant. The value of m for which the equivalent circuit resistance i…
- All resistance in figure are 1 Ω each. The value of current I is a/5 A. The value of a is . [Figure: a 3 V ce…
- The ratio of the equivalent resistance of the network (shown in figure) between the points a and b when switc…
- A square shaped wire with resistance of each side 3 Ω is bent to form a complete circle. The resistance betwe…
- In the given figure switches S₁ and S₂ are in open condition. The resistance across ab when the switches S₁ a…
- The equivalent resistance of series combination of two resistors is s. When they are connected in parallel, t…
- The voltage across the 10 Ω resistor in the given circuit is x volt. The value of x to the nearest integer is…
- A current of 15 mA flows in the circuit as shown in figure. The value of potential difference between the poi…
- The current I₁ (in A) flowing through 1 Ω resistor in the following circuit is [Figure: two 1 Ω resistors in…
- In the given circuit diagram, a wire is joining points B and D. The current in this wire is [Figure: upper pa…
- In the figure shown, what is the current (in Ampere) drawn from the battery? You are given: R₁=15 Ω, R₂=10 Ω,…
- In the given circuit the internal resistance of the 18 V cell is negligible. If R₁=400 Ω, R₃=100 Ω and R₄=500…
- [Figure: an infinite ladder. Battery B on the left, positive terminal at the top. From its top terminal: amme…
- The total current supplied to the circuit by the battery is [Figure: a circular wire with a centre node O. Th…
- A 3 volt battery with negligible internal resistance is connected in a circuit as shown in the figure. The cu…
- In the given circuit, the current flowing through the resistance 20 Ω is 0.3 A, while the ammeter reads 0.9 A…
- The voltage drop across 15 Ω resistance in the given figure will be V. [Figure: two branches in parallel betw…
- A 16 Ω wire is bend to form a square loop. A 9 V supply having internal resistance of 1 Ω is connected across…
- In the figure given, the electric current flowing through the 5 kΩ resistor is x mA. [Figure: a single loop c…
- A current of 6 A enters one corner P of an equilateral triangle PQR having 3 wires of resistance 2 Ω each and…
- A wire of resistance R is bent into a triangular pyramid as shown in figure with each segment having same len…
- The equivalent resistance of the circuit shown below between points a and b is [Figure: triangle with base co…
- Current passing through a wire as function of time is given as I(t)=0.02t+0.01 A. The charge that will flow t…
- The electric current through a wire varies with time as I=I₀+β t, where I₀=20 A and β=3 A/s. The amount of el…
- In a metallic conductor, under the effect of applied electric field, the free electrons of the conductor
- The charge flowing in a conductor changes with time as Q(t)=α t-β t²+γ t³, where α, β and γ are constants. Mi…
- The drift velocity of electrons for a conductor connected in an electrical circuit is V_d. The conductor is n…
- (A) The drift velocity of electrons decreases with the increase in the temperature of conductor. (B) The drif…
- A current of 5 A is passing through a non-linear magnesium wire of cross-section 0.04 m². At every point the…
- In the given figure, a battery of emf E is connected across a conductor PQ of length l and different area of…
- A current of 10 A exists in a wire of cross sectional area of 5 mm² with a drift velocity of 2×10⁻³ m s⁻¹. Th…
- A current through a wire depends on time as i=α₀ t+β t², where α₀=20 A s⁻¹ and β=8 A s⁻². Find the charge cro…
- In a conductor, if the number of conduction electrons per unit volume is 8.5×10²⁸ m⁻³ and mean free time is 2…
- A current of 5 A passes through a copper conductor (resistivity =1.7×10⁻⁸ Ω m) of radius of cross-section 5 m…
- Drift speed of electrons, when 1.5 A of current flows in a copper wire of cross section 5 mm², is v. If the e…
- The charge on a capacitor plate in a circuit, as a function of time, is shown in the figure. What is the valu…
- A copper rod of cross-sectional area A carries a uniform current I through it. At temperature T, if the volum…
- When 5 V potential difference is applied across a wire of length 0.1 m, the drift speed of electrons is 2.5×1…
- Consider a block of conducting material of resistivity ρ shown in the figure. Current I enters at A and leave…
- Consider a block of conducting material of resistivity ρ shown in the figure. Current I enters at A and leave…
- A cylindrical conductor of length 2 m and area of cross-section 0.2 mm² carries an electric current of 1.6 A…
- The current in a conductor is expressed as I=3t²+4t³, where I is in Ampere and t is in second. The amount of…
- A current of 2 A flows through a wire of cross-sectional area 25.0 mm². The number of free electrons in a cub…
- The number density of free electrons in copper is nearly 8×10²⁸ m⁻³. A copper wire has its area of cross sect…
- A 1 m long copper wire carries a current of 1 A. If the cross section of the wire is 2.0 mm² and the resistiv…
- The current density in a cylindrical wire of radius 4 mm is 4×10⁶ A m⁻². The current through the outer portio…
- The current density in a cylindrical wire of radius r=4.0 mm is 1.0×10⁶ A/m². The current through the outer p…
- A cylindrical wire of radius 0.5 mm and conductivity 5×10⁷ S/m is subjected to an electric field of 10 mV/m.…
- A 6.0 volt battery is connected to two light bulbs as shown in figure. Light bulb 1 has resistance 3 ohm whil…
- Model a torch battery of length l to be made up of a thin cylindrical bar of radius a and a concentric thin c…
- Two resistors of 200 Ω and 400 Ω are connected in series with a battery of 100 V. A bulb rated at 200 V, 100…
- A battery with EMF E and internal resistance r is connected across a resistance R. The power consumption in R…
- An electric power line having total resistance of 2 Ω, delivers 1 kW of power at 250 V. The percentage effici…
- The battery of a mobile phone is rated as 4.2 V, 5800 mAh. How much energy is stored in it when fully charged?
- There are n number of identical electric bulbs, each is designed to draw a power p independently from the mai…
- An electric bulb rated 50 W - 200 V is connected across a 100 V supply. The power dissipation of the bulb is
- The ratio of heat dissipated per second through the resistance 5 Ω and 10 Ω in the circuit given below is [Fi…
- The number of electrons flowing per second in the filament of a 110 W bulb operating at 220 V is (Given e=1.6…
- Water boils in an electric kettle in 20 minutes after being switched on. Using the same main supply, the leng…
- When a potential difference V is applied across a wire of resistance R, it dissipates energy at a rate W. If…
- By what percentage will the illumination of the lamp decrease if the current drops by 20%?
- Two identical heater filaments are connected first in parallel and then in series. At the same applied voltag…
- Different combination of 3 resistors of equal resistance R are shown in the figures. The increasing order for…
- Ratio of thermal energy released in two resistors R and 3R connected in parallel in an electric circuit is
- The H amount of thermal energy developed by a resistor in 10 s when a current of 4 A is passed through it. If…
- Due to cold weather a 1 m water pipe of cross-sectional area 1 cm² is filled with ice at -10°C. Resistive hea…
- An electric appliance supplies 6000 J per min heat to the system. If the system delivers a power of 90 W, how…
- In the given figure, the emf of the cell is 2.2 V and if internal resistance is 0.6 Ω. Calculate the power di…
- An electric bulb of 500 watt at 100 volt is used in a circuit having a 200 V supply. Calculate the resistance…
- A resistor develops 500 J of thermal energy in 20 s when a current of 1.5 A is passed through it. If the curr…
- An electrical power line, having a total resistance of 2 Ω, delivers 1 kW at 220 V. The efficiency of the tra…
- In a building, there are 15 bulbs of 45 W, 15 bulbs of 100 W, 15 small fans of 10 W and 2 heaters of 1 kW. Th…
- A cell of internal resistance r drives current through an external resistance R. The power delivered by the c…
- The resistive network shown below is connected to a D.C. source of 16 V. The power consumed by the network is…
- A current of 2 mA was passed through an unknown resistor which dissipated a power of 4.4 W. Dissipated power…
- Two equal resistances when connected in series to a battery, consume electric power of 60 W. If these resista…
- Two electric bulbs, rated at (25 W, 220 V) and (100 W, 220 V), are connected in series across a 220 V voltage…
- A constant voltage is applied between two ends of a metallic wire. If the length is halved and the radius of…
- The figure shows three circuits I, II and III which are connected to a 3 V battery. If the powers dissipated…
- In the circuit shown, the resistance r is a variable resistance. If for r=fR, the heat generation in r is max…
- The resistance of an electrical toaster has a temperature dependence given by R(T)=R₀[1+α(T-T₀)] in its range…
- In a large building, there are 15 bulbs of 40 W, 5 bulbs of 100 W, 5 fans of 80 W and 1 heater of 1 kW. The v…
- Four bulbs B₁, B₂, B₃ and B₄ of 100 W each are connected to 220 V main as shown in the figure. The reading in…
- The supply voltage to a room is 120 V. The resistance of the lead wires is 6 Ω. A 60 W bulb is already switch…
- Which of the four resistances P, Q, R and S generate the greatest amount of heat when a current flows from A…
- Two electric bulbs marked 25 W-220 V and 100 W-220 V are connected in series to a 440 V supply. Which of the…
- An electric bulb is rated 220 volt - 100 watt. The power consumed by it when operated on 110 volt will be
- The resistance of hot tungsten filament is about 10 times the cold resistance. What will be the resistance of…
- A heater coil is cut into two equal parts and only one part is now used in the heater. The heat generated wil…
- Time taken by a 836 W heater to heat one litre of water from 10°C to 40°C is
- A 220 volt, 1000 watt bulb is connected across a 110 volt mains supply. The power consumed will be
- A wire when connected to 220 V mains supply has power dissipation P₁. Now the wire is cut into two equal piec…
- If in the circuit, power dissipation is 150 W, then R is [Figure: a resistor R and a 2 Ω resistor in parallel…
- The heat generated in 1 minute between points A and B in the given circuit, when a battery of 9 V with intern…
- A heater is designed to operate with a power of 1000 W in a 100 V line. It is connected in combination with a…
- In the following circuit, the battery has an emf of 2 V and an internal resistance of 2/3 Ω. The power consum…
- A potential V₀ is applied across a uniform wire of resistance R. The power dissipation is P₁. The wire is the…
- An electrical bulb rated 220 V, 100 W, is connected in series with another bulb rated 220 V, 60 W. If the vol…
- A resistor develops 300 J of thermal energy in 15 s, when a current of 2 A is passed through it. If the curre…
- Two coils require 20 minutes and 60 minutes respectively to produce same amount of heat energy when connected…
- A uniform heating wire of resistance 36 Ω is connected across a potential difference of 240 V. The wire is th…
- A resistor dissipates 192 J of energy in 1 s when a current of 4 A is passed through it. Now, when the curren…
- An electric bulb rated as 200 W at 100 V is used in a circuit having 200 V supply. The resistance R that must…
- The energy dissipated by a resistor is 10 mJ in 1 s when an electric current of 2 mA flows through it. The re…
- Under steady state condition the potential difference across the capacitor in the circuit is V. [Figure: a le…
- Identify the valid statements relevant to the given circuit at the instant when the key is closed. [Figure: a…
- A galvanometer (G) of 2 Ω resistance is connected in the given circuit. The ratio of charge stored in C₁ and…
- A circuit to verify Ohm's law uses ammeter and voltmeter in series or parallel connected correctly to the res…
- In the figure shown below, a resistance of 150.4 Ω is connected in series to an ammeter A of resistance 240 Ω…
- At steady state the charge on the capacitor, as shown in the circuit below, is μC. [Figure: a 5 V cell in ser…
- In the given figure, the charge stored in 6 μF capacitor, when points A and B are joined by a connecting wire…
- Two resistor are connected in series across a battery as shown in figure. If a voltmeter of resistance 2000 Ω…
- For the circuit shown, the value of current at time t=3.2 s will be A. [Voltage distribution V(t) is shown by…
- Refer to the figure given below. The values of I₁, I₂ and I₃ are . [Figure: a diamond with left node L, top n…
- Two resistors of 100 Ω each are connected in series with a 9 V battery. A voltmeter of 400 Ω resistance is co…
- The reading of the ammeter (A) in steady state in the following circuit (assuming negligible internal resista…
- Three voltmeters, all having different internal resistances are joined as shown in figure. When some potentia…
- Figure shows a part of an electric circuit. The potentials at points a, b and c are 30 V, 12 V and 2 V respec…
- In this figure, the resistance of the coil of galvanometer G is 2 Ω. The emf of the cell is 4 V. The ratio of…
- In the network shown below, the charge accumulated in the capacitor in steady state will be [Figure: three pa…
- A cell of emf 90 V is connected across series combination of two resistors each of 100 Ω resistance. A voltme…
- Calculate the amount of charge on capacitor of 4 μF. The internal resistance of battery is 1 Ω. [Figure: thre…
- The value of current in the 6 Ω resistance is [Figure: a 140 V battery on the left and a 90 V battery on the…
- Two resistors 400 Ω and 800 Ω are connected in series across a 6 V battery. The potential difference measured…
- In the circuit, given in the figure currents in different branches and value of one resistor are shown. Then…
- In the figure shown, the current in the 10 V battery is close to [Figure: two nodes X (top middle) and Y (bot…
- For the circuit shown, with R₁=1.0 Ω, R₂=2.0 Ω, E₁=2 V and E₂=E₃=4 V, the potential difference between the po…
- Determine the charge on the capacitor in the following circuit. [Figure: a 72 V battery on the left. Top wire…
- When the switch S, in the circuit shown is closed, then the value of current i will be [Figure: point A at 20…
- In the given circuit the cells have zero internal resistance. The currents (in amperes) passing through resis…
- In the given circuit diagram, the currents, I₁=0.3 A, I₄=0.8 A and I₅=0.4 A, are flowing as shown. The curren…
- In the given circuit diagram when the current reaches steady state in the circuit, the charge on the capacito…
- [Figure: a ladder with three 1 Ω rungs. Top rail from left: a 2 V cell, first rung node, a 2 V cell, second r…
- In the circuit shown, the current in the 1 Ω resistor is [Figure: node P on the top wire, node Q on the botto…
- In the electric network shown, when no current flows through the 4 Ω resistor in the arm EB, the potential di…
- In the circuit shown, current (in A) through the 50 V and 30 V batteries are, respectively [Figure: from left…
- The Kirchhoff's first law (Σ i=0) and second law (Σ iR=Σ E), where the symbols have their usual meanings, are…
- In the circuit, the galvanometer G shows zero deflection. If the batteries A and B have negligible internal r…
- The stored charge in the capacitor in steady state of the following circuit is μC. [Figure: a ladder circuit.…
- The current flowing through the 1 Ω resistor is n/(10) A. The value of n is . [Figure: four nodes, A on the l…
- In an electrical circuit drawn below the amount of charge stored in the capacitor is μC. [Figure: three branc…
- The charge accumulated on the capacitor connected in the following circuit is μC. (Given C=150 μF) [Figure: a…
- A 16 Ω wire is bend to form a square loop. A 9 V battery with internal resistance 1 Ω is connected across one…
- As shown in the figure, the voltmeter reads 2 V across 5 Ω resistor. The resistance of the voltmeter is Ω. [F…
- In the circuit shown, the energy stored in the capacitor is n μJ. The value of n is . [Figure: a diamond brid…
- A network of four resistances is connected to 9 V battery, as shown in figure. The magnitude of voltage diffe…
- In the given circuit, the value of |(I₁+I₃)/(I₂)| is . [Figure: node L is the left vertical wire, node M a ju…
- In the following circuit, the magnitude of current I₁, is A. [Figure: node L is the left vertical wire, node…
- As shown in the figure, in steady state, the charge stored in the capacitor is ×10⁻⁶ C. [Figure: three branch…
- For the network shown below, the value of V_B-V_A is V. [Figure: a single loop. Top wire from A: a 15 V ideal…
- A capacitor of 50 μF is connected in a circuit as shown in figure. The charge on the upper plate of the capac…
- An ideal cell of emf 10 V is connected in circuit shown in figure. Each resistance is 2 Ω. The potential diff…
- For the given circuit, in the steady state, |V_B-V_D|= V. [Figure: a diamond A, B, C, D with a 6 V cell conne…
- Refer to the circuit diagram given below. The heat generated across the 6 Ω resistance in 100 second is α/(10…
- Which of the following resistivity (ρ) v/s temperature (T) curves is most suitable to be used in wire bound s…
- The resistances of the platinum wire of a platinum resistance thermometer at the ice point and steam point ar…
- The radius (r), length (l) and resistance (R) of a metal wire was measured in the laboratory as r=(0.35±0.05)…
- An electric toaster has resistance of 60 Ω at room temperature (27°C). The toaster is connected to a 220 V su…
- Two conductors have the same resistances at 0°C but their temperature coefficients of resistance are α₁ and α…
- The resistivity (ρ) of semiconductor varies with temperature. Which of the following curve represents the cor…
- A wire of resistance 160 Ω is melted and drawn in a wire of one-fourth of its length. The new resistance of t…
- A uniform metallic wire carries a current 2 A, when 3.4 V battery is connected across it. The mass of uniform…
- The resistance of a wire is 5 Ω. Its new resistance in ohm if stretched to 5 times of its original length wil…
- An electric cable of copper has just one wire of radius 9 mm. Its resistance is 14 Ω. If this single copper w…
- A wire of resistance R₁ is drawn out so that its length is increased by twice of its original length. The rat…
- Two metallic wires of identical dimensions are connected in series. If σ₁ and σ₂ are the conductivities of th…
- Given below are two statements: One is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- A 1 m long wire is broken into two unequal parts X and Y. The X part of the wire is stretched into another wi…
- An aluminium wire is stretched to make its length, 0.4% larger. The percentage change in resistance is
- Resistance of the wire is measured as 2 Ω and 3 Ω at 10°C and 30°C respectively. Temperature co-efficient of…
- What equal length of an iron wire and a copper-nickel alloy wire, each of 2 mm diameter connected parallel to…
- A copper (Cu) rod of length 25 cm and cross-sectional area 3 mm² is joined with a similar aluminium (Al) rod…
- The resistance of a conductor at 15°C is 16 Ω and at 100°C is 20 Ω. What will be the temperature coefficient…
- A conducting wire of length l, area of cross-section A and electric resistivity ρ is connected between the te…
- A wire of 1 Ω has a length of 1 m. It is stretched till its length increases by 25%. The percentage change in…
- Consider four conducting materials copper, tungsten, mercury and aluminium with resistivity ρ_C, ρ_T, ρ_M and…
- In an experiment, the resistance of a material is plotted as a function of temperature (in some range). As sh…
- Space between two concentric conducting spheres of radii a and b (b>a) is filled with a medium of resistivity…
- A copper wire is stretched to make it 0.5% longer. The percentage change in its electrical resistance if its…
- A heating element has a resistance of 100 Ω at room temperature. When it is connected to a supply of 220 V, a…
- A uniform wire of length l and radius r has a resistance of 100 Ω. It is recast into a wire of radius r/2. Th…
- The temperature dependence of resistances of Cu and undoped Si in the temperature range 300 to 400 K, is best…
- Suppose the drift velocity v_d in a material varied with the applied electric field E as v_d∝√E. Then V-I gra…
- If a wire is stretched to make it 0.1% longer, its resistance will
- This question contains Statement-1 and Statement-2. Of the four choices given after the statements, choose th…
- The resistance of a wire is 5 ohm at 50°C and 6 ohm at 100°C. The resistance of the wire at 0°C will be
- A material B has twice the specific resistance of A. A circular wire made of B has twice the diameter of a wi…
- The resistance of a bulb filament is 100 Ω at a temperature of 100°C. If its temperature coefficient of resis…
- The thermistors are usually made of
- An electric current is passed through a circuit containing two wires of the same material, connected in paral…
- A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 77 K, the resistance of
- The difference in the variation of resistance with temperature in a metal and a semiconductor arises essentia…
- A strip of copper and another germanium are cooled from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of
- The length of a given cylindrical wire is increased by 100%. Due to the consequent decrease in diameter the c…
- By increasing the temperature, the specific resistance of a conductor and a semiconductor
- A parallel plate capacitor is having separation between plates 0.885 mm. It has a capacitance of 1 μF when th…
- Two wires A and B are made up of the same material and have the same mass. Wire A has radius 2.0 mm and wire…
- A wire of resistance R and radius r is stretched till its radius became r/2. If new resistance of the stretch…
- Resistance of a wire at 0°C, 100°C and t°C is found to be 10 Ω, 10.2 Ω and 10.95 Ω, respectively. The tempera…
- At room temperature (27°C), the resistance of a heating element is 50 Ω. The temperature coefficient of the m…
- The length of a metallic wire is increased by 20% and its area of cross-section is reduced by 4%. The percent…
- A rectangular parallelopiped is measured as 1 cm×1 cm×100 cm. If its specific resistance is 3×10⁻⁷ Ω m, then…
- The current flowing through a conductor connected across a source is 2 A and 1.2 A at 0°C and 100°C respectiv…
- A hollow cylindrical conductor has length of 3.14 m, while its inner and outer diameters are 4 mm and 8 mm re…
- If a copper wire is stretched to increase its length by 20%. The percentage increase in resistance of the wir…
- Eight copper wire of length l and diameter d are joined in parallel to form a single composite conductor of r…
- The length of a given cylindrical wire is increased to double of its original length. The percentage increase…
- The variation of applied potential and current flowing through a given wire is shown in figure. The length of…
- Two wires of same length and thickness having specific resistances 6 Ω cm and 3 Ω cm respectively are connect…
- Wheatstone bridge principle is used to measure the specific resistance (S₁) of given wire, having length L, r…
- The equivalent resistance between A and B of the network shown in figure [Figure: from A, resistor R goes to…
- The total length of potentiometer wire AB is 50 cm in the arrangement as shown in figure. If P is the point w…
- A meter bridge with two resistances R₁ and R₂ as shown in figure was balanced (null point) at 40 cm from the…
- To compare EMF of two cells using potentiometer the balancing lengths obtained are 200 cm and 150 cm. The lea…
- Two resistors 2 Ω and 3 Ω are connected in the gaps of bridge as shown in figure. The null point is obtained…
- In the potentiometer, when the cell in the secondary circuit is shunted with 4 Ω resistance, the balance is o…
- A Wheatstone bridge is initially at room temperature and all arms of the bridge have same value of resistance…
- The value of unknown resistance (x) for which the potential difference between B and D will be zero in the ar…
- In a metre-bridge when a resistance in the left gap is 2 Ω and unknown resistance in the right gap, the balan…
- To measure the temperature coefficient of resistivity α of a semiconductor, an electrical arrangement shown i…
- A wire of length 10 cm and radius √7×10⁻⁴ m is connected across the right gap of a meter bridge. When a resis…
- The resistance per centimeter of a meter bridge wire is r, with X Ω resistance in left gap. Balancing length…
- The current I in the given circuit will be [Figure: a 40 V source between nodes P (positive) and N (negative)…
- A battery of 6 V is connected to the circuit as shown below. The current I drawn from the battery is [Figure:…
- The four arms of a Wheatstone bridge have resistances as shown in the figure. A galvanometer of 15 Ω resistan…
- The value of current i₁ flowing from A to C in the circuit diagram is [Figure: an 8 V cell connected directly…
- The resistance of the meter bridge AB in given figure is 4 Ω. With a cell of emf ε=0.5 V and rheostat resista…
- In a Wheatstone bridge (see figure), resistances P and Q are approximately equal. When R=400 Ω, the bridge is…
- In the experimental set up of metre bridge shown in the figure, the null point is obtained at a distance of 4…
- In a meter bridge, the wire of length 1 m has a non-uniform cross-section such that the variation (dR)/(dl) o…
- On interchanging the resistances, the balance point of a meter bridge shifts to the left by 10 cm. The resist…
- In a meter bridge, as shown in the figure, it is given that resistance Y=12.5 Ω and that the balance is obtai…
- Which of the following statement is false?
- In a meter bridge experiment resistances are connected as shown in the figure. Initially resistance P=4 Ω and…
- Shown in the figure below is a meter-bridge set up with null deflection in the galvanometer. The value of the…
- In a Wheatstone's bridge, three resistances P, Q and R connected in the three arms and the fourth arm is form…
- The current I drawn from the 5 volt source will be [Figure: a 5 V source between node L (positive) and node R…
- In a metre bridge experiment null point is obtained at 20 cm from one end of the wire when resistance X is ba…
- In a meter bridge experiment to determine the value of unknown resistance, first the resistances 2 Ω and 3 Ω…
- The value of current I in the electrical circuit as given below, when potential at A is equal to the potentia…
- In a metre bridge experiment the balance point is obtained if the gaps are closed by 2 Ω and 3 Ω. A shunt of…
- When two resistances R₁ and R₂ connected in series and introduced into the left gap of a meter bridge and a r…
- If the potential difference between B and D is zero, the value of x is 1/n Ω. The value of n is . [Figure: a…
- Resistance are connected in a meter bridge circuit as shown in the figure. The balancing length l₁ is 40 cm.…
- In a meter bridge experiment, for measuring unknown resistance S, the null point is obtained at a distance 30…
- In the given figure of meter bridge experiment, the balancing length AC corresponding to null deflection of t…
- A meter bridge setup is shown in the figure. It is used to determine an unknown resistance R using a given re…
- Current measured by the ammeter A in the reported circuit when no current flows through 10 Ω resistance, will…
- Consider a 72 cm long wire AB as shown in the figure. The galvanometer jockey is placed at P on AB at a dista…
- Four resistances 40 Ω, 60 Ω, 90 Ω and 110 Ω make the arms of a quadrilateral ABCD. Across AC is a battery of…
- Four resistances of 15 Ω, 12 Ω, 4 Ω and 10 Ω respectively in cyclic order to form Wheatstone's network. The r…
- In a meter bridge experiment, S is a standard resistance. R is a resistance wire. It is found that balancing…
- The de Broglie wavelength of an oxygen molecule at 27 is x×10⁻¹² m. The value of x is (take Planck's constant…
- A sub-atomic particle of mass 10⁻³⁰ kg is moving with a velocity 2.21×10⁶ m/s. Under the matter wave consider…
- A proton of mass mₚ has same energy as that of a photon of wavelength λ. If the proton is moving at non-relat…
- If λ and K are de Broglie wavelength and kinetic energy, respectively, of a particle with constant mass. The…
- A proton and an electron are associated with same de-Broglie wavelength. The ratio of their kinetic energies…
- A proton and an electron have the same de Broglie wavelength. If Kₚ and Kₑ be the kinetic energies of proton…
- A proton, an electron and an alpha particle have the same energies. Their de-Broglie wavelengths will be comp…
- The de Broglie wavelengths of a proton and an α particle are λ and 2λ respectively. The ratio of the velociti…
- The kinetic energy of an electron, α-particle and a proton are given as 4K, 2K and K respectively. The de Bro…
- Proton (P) and electron (e) will have same de Broglie wavelength when the ratio of their momentum is (assume,…
- The de Broglie wavelength of a molecule in a gas at room temperature (300 K) is λ₁. If the temperature of the…
- The ratio of the de Broglie wavelengths of proton and electron having same kinetic energy (Assume mₚ=mₑ×1849)
- The de Broglie wavelength of an electron having kinetic energy E is λ. If the kinetic energy of electron beco…
- A proton, a neutron, an electron and an α-particle have same energy. If λₚ, λₙ, λₑ and λ_α are the de Broglie…
- An α particle and a carbon 12 atom has same kinetic energy K. The ratio of their de-Broglie wavelengths (λ_α:…
- The de Broglie wavelength of a particle having kinetic energy E is λ. How much extra energy must be given to…
- A moving proton and electron have the same de Broglie wavelength. If K and P denote the K.E. and momentum res…
- The temperature of an ideal gas in 3-dimensions is 300 K. The corresponding de Broglie wavelength of the elec…
- A particle is travelling 4 times as fast as an electron. Assuming the ratio of de Broglie wavelength of a par…
- The de Broglie wavelength of a proton and α-particle are equal. The ratio of their velocities is
- An electron of mass mₑ and a proton of mass mₚ=1836 mₑ are moving with the same speed. The ratio of their de…
- A particle is moving 5 times as fast as an electron. The ratio of the de Broglie wavelength of the particle t…
- An electron, a doubly ionized helium ion (He⁺⁺) and a proton are having the same kinetic energy. The relation…
- Assuming the nitrogen molecule is moving with r.m.s. velocity at 400 K, the de Broglie wavelength of nitrogen…
- When photon of energy 4.0 eV strikes the surface of a metal A, the ejected photoelectrons have maximum kineti…
- A particle moving with kinetic energy E has de Broglie wavelength λ. If energy Δ E is added to its energy, th…
- In an electron microscope, the resolution that can be achieved is of the order of the wavelength of electrons…
- The de Broglie wavelength (λ_B) associated with the electron orbiting in the second excited state of hydrogen…
- The de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron in the n=4 level is
- If the kinetic energy of a free electron doubles, its de Broglie wavelength changes by the factor
- The ratio of de Broglie wavelength of a deutron with kinetic energy E to that of an alpha particle with kinet…
- Light source having wavelength 331 nm is used to generate photo-electrons whose stopping potential is 0.2 V.…
- K₁ and K₂ be the maximum kinetic energies of photoelectrons emitted from a surface of a given material for th…
- A light wave described by E=60[sin (3×10¹⁵t)+sin (12×10¹⁵t)] (in SI units) falls on a metal surface of work f…
- Light is incident on a metallic plate having work function 110×10⁻²⁰ J. If the produced photoelectrons have z…
- The work function of a metal is 3 eV. The color of the visible light that is required to cause emission of ph…
- The work functions of cesium (Cs) and lithium (Li) metals are 1.9 eV and 2.5 eV, respectively. If we incident…
- A light source of wavelength λ illuminates a metal surface and electrons are ejected with maximum kinetic ene…
- In photoelectric experiment energy of 2.48 eV irradiates a photo sensitive material. The stopping potential w…
- UV light of 4.13 eV is incident on a photosensitive metal surface having work function 3.13 eV. The maximum k…
- The threshold frequency of a metal with work function 6.63 eV is
- The work function of a substance is 3.0 eV. The longest wavelength of light that can cause the emission of ph…
- The difference between threshold wavelengths for two metal surfaces A and B having work function φ_A=9 eV and…
- The threshold frequency of a metal is f₀. When the light of frequency 2f₀ is incident on the metal plate, the…
- The threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission from a material is 5500 A. Photoelectrons will be emitted…
- If the two metals A and B are exposed to radiation of wavelength 350 nm. The work functions of metals A and B…
- A metal exposed to light of wavelength 800 nm and emits photoelectrons with a certain kinetic energy. The max…
- Two streams of photons, possessing energies equal to five and ten times the work function of metal are incide…
- The kinetic energy of emitted electron is E when the light incident on the metal has wavelength λ. To double…
- The light of two different frequencies whose photons have energies 3.8 eV and 1.4 eV respectively, illuminate…
- Let K₁ and K₂ be the maximum kinetic energies of photo-electrons emitted when two monochromatic beams of wave…
- The electric field at a point associated with a light wave is given by E=200[sin (6×10¹⁵t)+sin (9×10¹⁵t)] Vm⁻…
- Two identical photocathodes receive the light of frequencies f₁ and f₂ respectively. If the velocities of the…
- When the wavelength of radiation falling on a metal is changed from 500 nm to 200 nm, the maximum kinetic ene…
- The electric field of light wave is given as ⃗E=10⁻³ cos ((2π x)/(5×10⁻⁷)-2π×6×10¹⁴t)̂x N/C. This light falls…
- In a photoelectric effect experiment the threshold wavelength of light is 380 nm. If the wavelength of incide…
- Surface of certain metal is first illuminated with light of wavelength λ₁=350 nm and then, by light of wavele…
- The magnetic field associated with a light wave is given, at the origin, by B=B₀[sin (3.14×10⁷)ct+sin (6.28×1…
- The maximum velocity of the photoelectrons emitted from the surface is v when light of frequency u falls on a…
- Radiation of wavelength λ, is incident on a photocell. The fastest emitted electron has speed v. If the wavel…
- A photoelectric surface is illuminated successively by monochromatic light of wavelengths λ and λ/2. If the m…
- A copper ball of radius 1 cm and work function 4.47 eV is irradiated with ultraviolet radiation of wavelength…
- The surface of a metal is illuminated with the light of 400 nm. The kinetic energy of the ejected photoelectr…
- The work function of a substance is 4.0 eV. The longest wavelength of light that can cause photoelectron emis…
- Sodium and copper have work functions 2.3 eV and 4.5 eV respectively. Then the ratio of the wavelengths is ne…
- When a light of frequency twice the threshold frequency is incident on the metal plate, the maximum velocity…
- Two streams of photons, possessing energies equal to twice and ten times the work function of metal are incid…
- The surface of a metal is illuminated alternately with photons of energies E₁=4 eV and E₂=2.5 eV respectively…
- For a certain metal, when monochromatic light of wavelength λ is incident, the stopping potential for photoel…
- When a light of a given wavelength falls on a metallic surface the stopping potential for photoelectrons is 3…
- In photoelectric effect an em-wave is incident on a metal surface and electrons are ejected from the surface.…
- In an experiment with photoelectric effect, stopping potential
- Which of the following statement is not true about stopping potential (V₀)?
- When UV light of wavelength 300 nm is incident on the metal surface having work function 2.13 eV, electron em…
- When a metal surface is illuminated by light of wavelength λ, the stopping potential is 8 V. When the same su…
- A metallic surface is illuminated with radiation of wavelength λ, the stopping potential is V₀. If the same s…
- In a photoelectric experiment, ultraviolet light of wavelength 280 nm is used with lithium cathode having wor…
- A monochromatic neon lamp with wavelength of 670.5 nm illuminates a photo-sensitive material which has a stop…
- When radiation of wavelength λ is incident on a metallic surface, the stopping potential of ejected photoelec…
- The stopping potential in the context of photoelectric effect depends on the following property of incident e…
- The stopping potential for electrons emitted from a photosensitive surface illuminated by light of wavelength…
- In a photoelectric experiment, the wavelength of the light incident on a metal is changed from 300 nm to 400…
- When a certain photosensitive surface is illuminated with monochromatic light of frequency u, the stopping po…
- When photons of wavelength λ₁ are incident on an isolated sphere, the corresponding stopping potential is fou…
- The stopping potential for photoelectrons emitted from a surface illuminated by light of wavelength 6630 A is…
- A certain metallic surface is illuminated by monochromatic radiation of wavelength λ. The stopping potential…
- When radiation of wavelength λ is used to illuminate a metallic surface, the stopping potential is V. When th…
- Two point charges q₁=3 μC and q₂=-4 μC are placed at the points (2̂i+3̂j+3̂k) and (̂i+̂j+̂k) respectively. Th…
- Two metal spheres of radius R and 3R have the same surface charge density σ. If they are brought in contact a…
- A small uncharged conducting sphere is placed in contact with an identical sphere carrying a charge of 4×10⁻⁸…
- In a hydrogen like system, the ratio of the Coulomb force to the gravitational force between an electron and…
- Vehicles carrying inflammable fluids usually have metallic chains touching the ground,
- Two identical conducting spheres P and S, each with charge Q, repel each other with a force of 16 N. A third…
- Two charged conducting spheres of radii a and b are connected to each other by a conducting wire. The ratio o…
- The force between two point charges q₁ and q₂ placed in vacuum r cm apart is F. The force between them when t…
- A charge of 10 μC is divided into two parts which are placed 1 cm apart so that the repulsive force between t…
- Two charges q₁ and q₂ are separated by a distance d and placed in a medium of dielectric constant k. What is…
- Two isolated metallic solid spheres of radii R and 2R are charged so that both have the same charge density σ…
- Two identical positive charges Q each are fixed a distance 2a apart. Another point charge q₀ of mass m is pla…
- A charge of 4 μC is to be divided into two parts, the distance between the divided charges being constant. Th…
- Two identical metallic spheres A and B placed a certain distance apart in air repel each other with a force F…
- Two identical charged particles, each of mass 10 g and charge 2.0×10⁻⁷ C, are placed on a horizontal table wi…
- A certain charge Q is divided into two parts q and (Q-q). How should the charges Q and q be divided so that q…
- Two identical tennis balls each having mass m and charge q are suspended from a fixed point by threads of len…
- Two electrons each are fixed at a distance 2d. A third charge, a proton, placed at the midpoint is displaced…
- Three charges +Q, q, +Q are placed respectively at distances 0, d/2 and d from the origin on the x-axis. If t…
- Two identical conducting spheres A and B carry equal charge. They are separated by a distance much larger tha…
- Two charges, each equal to q, are kept at x=-a and x=a on the x-axis. A particle of mass m and charge q₀=q/2…
- Two identical charged spheres suspended from a common point by two massless strings of length l are initially…
- Two identical charged spheres are suspended by strings of equal lengths. The strings make an angle of 30° wit…
- A charge Q is placed at each of the opposite corners of a square. A charge q is placed at each of the other t…
- If gₑ and gₘ are the accelerations due to gravity on the surfaces of the earth and the moon respectively, and…
- Four charges equal to -Q are placed at the four corners of a square and a charge q is at its centre. If the s…
- Three charges -q₁, +q₂ and -q₃ are placed as shown in the figure [-q₁ at the origin, +q₂ on the +x-axis at di…
- If a charge q is placed at the centre of the line joining two equal charges Q such that the system is in equi…
- A point charge q=1 μC is located at a distance 2 cm from one end of a thin insulating wire of length 10 cm ha…
- A positive ion A and a negative ion B have charges 6.67×10⁻¹⁹ C and 9.6×10⁻¹⁰ C, and masses 19.2×10⁻²⁷ kg and…
- Two identical charged spheres are suspended by strings of equal lengths. The strings make an angle θ with eac…
- A thin metallic wire having a cross sectional area of 10⁻⁴ m² is used to make a ring of radius 30 cm. A posit…
- Two identical charged spheres are suspended by strings of equal lengths. The strings make an angle of 37° wit…
- As shown in the figure, a configuration of two equal point charges (q₀=+2 μC) is placed on an inclined plane…
- Three point charges q, -2q and 2q are placed on the x-axis at distances x=0, x=3/4R and x=R respectively from…
- Two equal positive point charges are separated by a distance 2a. The distance of a point from the centre of t…
- A particle of mass 1 mg and charge q is lying at the mid-point of two stationary particles kept a distance 2…
- An infinite number of point charges, each carrying 1 μC of charge, are placed along the y-axis at y=1 m, 2 m,…
- Two small spheres, each of mass 10 mg, are suspended from a point by threads 0.5 m long. They are equally cha…
- Two identical conducting spheres with negligible volume have charges 2.1 nC and -0.1 nC respectively. They ar…
- Three identical charged balls, each of charge 2 C, are suspended from a common point P by silk threads of 2 m…
- Two point charges Q each are placed a distance d apart. A third point charge q is placed at a distance x from…
- Three point charges of magnitude 5 μC, 0.16 μC and 0.3 μC are located at the vertices A, B, C of a right angl…
- Two short electric dipoles A and B having dipole moments p₁ and p₂ respectively are placed with their axes mu…
- A rigid dipole undergoes simple harmonic motion about its centre in the presence of an electric field ⃗E₁=E₀̂…
- Two short dipoles A and B, A having charges ±2 μC and length 1 cm and B having charges ±4 μC and length 1 cm,…
- Three charges +2q, +3q and -4q are situated at (0,-3a), (2a,0) and (-2a,0) respectively in the xy plane. The…
- Two small spherical balls of mass 10 g each, with charges -2 μC and 2 μC, are attached to the two ends of a v…
- A point particle of charge Q is located at P along the axis of an electric dipole 1 at a distance r as shown…
- An electric dipole of mass m, charge q and length l is placed in a uniform electric field ⃗E=E₀̂i. When the d…
- A dipole comprises two charged particles of identical magnitude q and opposite in nature. The mass m of the p…
- Two charges each of magnitude 0.01 C and separated by a distance of 0.4 mm constitute an electric dipole. If…
- The electric field due to a short electric dipole at a large distance r from the centre of the dipole, on the…
- Given below are two statements. Statement-I: A point charge is brought into an electric field. At a point nea…
- An electric dipole is placed on the x-axis near a line charge of linear charge density 3.0×10⁻⁶ C m⁻¹ lying a…
- Two ideal electric dipoles A and B, having dipole moments p₁ and p₂ respectively, are placed in a plane with…
- An electric dipole of moment ⃗p=(-̂i-3̂j+2̂k)×10⁻²⁹ C m is at the origin (0,0,0). The electric field due to t…
- An electric dipole is formed by two equal and opposite charges q with separation d. The charges have the same…
- Four point charges -q, +q, +q and -q are placed on the y-axis at y=-2d, y=-d, y=+d and y=+2d respectively. Th…
- Charges -q and +q located at A and B respectively constitute an electric dipole. The distance AB=2a, O is the…
- Determine the electric dipole moment of the system of three charges, placed on the vertices of an equilateral…
- An electric dipole has a fixed dipole moment ⃗p, which makes angle θ with respect to the x-axis. When subject…
- An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30° to a non-uniform electric field. The dipole will experience
- The electric field at a point P due to an electric dipole is E, where P lies on the axial line at a distance…
- Two charges of -4 μC and +4 μC are placed at the points A(1,0,4) m and B(2,-1,5) m in an electric field ⃗E=0.…
- A dipole made of two charges of magnitude 2 μC each, separated by 0.5 μm, is placed between the plates of a c…
- A short dipole is placed at the origin O with its dipole moment ⃗P along the x-axis, as shown in the figure […
- Two point charges -4 μC and 4 μC, constituting an electric dipole, are placed at (-9,0,0) cm and (9,0,0) cm i…
- An electric dipole is placed at a distance of 2 cm from an infinite plane sheet carrying a positive charge de…
- The electrostatic potential due to an electric dipole at a distance r varies as
- Two electric dipoles A and B with respective dipole moments ⃗d_A=-4qâi and ⃗d_B=-2qâi are placed on the x-a…
- A point dipole ⃗p=-p₀̂x is kept at the origin. The potential and electric field due to this dipole on the y-a…
- An electric field of 1000 V m⁻¹ is applied to an electric dipole at an angle of 45°. The value of the electri…
- An electric dipole of dipole moment 6×10⁻⁶ C m is placed in a uniform electric field of magnitude 10⁶ V m⁻¹.…
- The distance between the charges +q and -q is 2l, and that between +2q and -2q is 4l. The electrostatic poten…
- An electric dipole of dipole moment 6.0×10⁻⁶ C m is placed in a uniform electric field of 1.5×10³ N C⁻¹ in su…
- A point charge +q is placed at the origin. A second point charge +9q is placed at (d,0,0) in a Cartesian coor…
- Two particles A and B carrying charges 20 μC and -5 μC respectively are held fixed with a separation of 5 cm,…
- A point charge q₁=4q₀ is placed at the origin. Another point charge q₂=-q₀ is placed at x=12 cm. The charge o…
- Six point charges are kept 60° apart from each other on the circumference of a circle of radius R as shown in…
- Identify the correct statements: A. Electrostatic field lines form closed loops. B. The electric field lines…
- Two charges q and 3q are separated by a distance r in air. At a distance x from the charge q the resultant el…
- A point charge of 10 μC is placed at the origin. At what location on the X-axis should a point charge of 40 μ…
- The electric field in a certain region is given by ⃗E=(A/(x²)̂i+B/(y³)̂j). The SI units of A and B are
- Charges q/2, q and q/2 are placed at the corners A, B and C of a square of side a, where A is the top-left co…
- Two point charges A and B of magnitude +8×10⁻⁶ C and -8×10⁻⁶ C respectively are placed a distance d apart. Th…
- O is the centre of a square grid of spacing l, the grid lines being perpendicular to each other. The eight su…
- A cube of side a occupies the first octant, with one vertex at the origin and its edges of length a along the…
- Two charged thin infinite plane sheets of uniform surface charge density σ₊ and σ₋, where |σ₊|>|σ₋|, intersec…
- Charges Q₁ and Q₂ are at the points A and B of a right angled triangle OAB (see figure). The resultant electr…
- Three charged particles A, B and C with charges -4q, 2q and -2q are present on the circumference of a circle…
- Two point charges q₁ (√10 μC) and q₂ (-25 μC) are placed on the x-axis at x=1 m and x=4 m respectively. The e…
- A long cylindrical shell carries positive surface charge σ in the upper half and negative surface charge -σ i…
- Two point charges +8q and -2q are located at x=0 and x=L respectively. The location of a point on the x axis…
- If the net electric field at the point P along the Y axis is zero, then the ratio |(q₂)/(q₃)| is 8/(√25x), wh…
- Shown in the figure are two point charges +Q and -Q inside the cavity of a spherical shell. The charges are k…
- A cubical volume is bounded by the surfaces x=0, x=a, y=0, y=a, z=0, z=a. The electric field in the region is…
- Two point charges 8 μC and -2 μC are located at x=2 cm and x=4 cm on the x-axis. The ratio of the electric fl…
- Two point charges 2q and q are placed at the vertex A and at the centre of the face CDEF of a cube as shown i…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- Electric charge is transferred to an irregular metallic disk as shown in the figure [an isolated conductor of…
- An infinitely long wire has uniform linear charge density λ=2 nC m⁻¹. The net flux through a Gaussian cube of…
- A line charge of length a/2 is kept at the centre of an edge BC of a cube ABCDEFGH having edge length a as sh…
- The electric flux is φ=ασ+βλ where λ and σ are the linear and surface charge densities respectively. α/β repr…
- Match List-I with List-II. (A) Electric field inside (distance r>0 from the centre) a uniformly charged spher…
- A point charge causes an electric flux of -2×10⁴ N m² C⁻¹ to pass through a spherical Gaussian surface of 8.0…
- A charge q is placed at the centre of one of the surfaces of a cube. The flux linked with the cube is
- Five charges +q, +5q, -2q, +3q and -4q are situated as shown in the figure [the closed surface S encloses +5q…
- C₁ and C₂ are two hollow concentric cubes enclosing charges 2Q and 3Q respectively as shown in the figure [C₁…
- Two charges of 5Q and -2Q are situated at the points (3a,0) and (-5a,0) respectively. The electric flux throu…
- An electric field is given by (6̂i+5̂j+3̂k) N C⁻¹. The electric flux through a surface area 30̂i m² lying in…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- In a cuboid of dimensions 2L×2L× L, a charge q is placed at the centre of the surface S having an area of 4L²…
- A point charge Q is placed at the centre of a conducting spherical shell of inner radius a and outer radius b…
- A charge q is placed at the centre of the flat face of a closed hemispherical non-conducting surface. The tot…
- A cube of side 0.5 m is placed inside an electric field ⃗E=150y² ̂j, with one corner at the origin and its ed…
- A solid metal sphere of radius R carrying charge q is enclosed inside a concentric uncharged conducting spher…
- Choose the incorrect statement. (A) The electric lines of force entering a Gaussian surface provide negative…
- A charge q is placed at one corner of a cube as shown in the figure. The flux of the electrostatic field ⃗E t…
- Given below are two statements. Statement I: An electric dipole is placed at the centre of a hollow sphere. T…
- In finding the electric field using Gauss's law, the formula |⃗E|=(q_enc)/(ε₀|A|) is applicable. In the formu…
- Shown in the figure is a shell made of a conductor. It has an inner radius a and an outer radius b, and carri…
- A charge Q is placed at a distance a/2 above the centre of a square surface of edge a as shown in the figure…
- Four closed surfaces and corresponding charge distributions are shown below [S₁ encloses a single charge 2q;…
- The magnitude of the average electric field normally present in the atmosphere just above the surface of the…
- The flat base of a hemisphere of radius a with no charge inside it lies in a horizontal plane. A uniform elec…
- If the electric flux entering and leaving an enclosed surface respectively is φ₁ and φ₂, the electric charge…
- A charged particle q is placed at the centre O of a cube of length l (ABCDEFGH). Another same charge q is pla…
- The electric field in a region is given by ⃗E=(2̂i+3̂j+6̂k)×10³ N C⁻¹. The flux of the field through a rectan…
- A square loop of side a=1 m is held normally in front of a point charge q=1 C, the charge lying on the normal…
- An electric field ⃗E=(2̂i+6̂j+8̂k)/(√6) passes through a surface of area 4 m² having unit normal vector ̂n=(2…
- An electric field ⃗E=2x ̂i N C⁻¹ exists in space. A cube of side 2 m is placed in this space as in the figure…
- As shown in the figure, a cuboid lies in a region with electric field ⃗E=(2x²̂i-4ŷj+6̂k) N C⁻¹. The magnitud…
- The expression for an electric field is given by ⃗E=4000x² ̂i V m⁻¹. The electric flux through a cube of side…
- The volume charge density of a sphere of radius 6 m is 2 μC cm⁻³. The number of lines of force per unit surfa…
- The total charge enclosed in an incremental volume of 2×10⁻⁹ m³ located at the origin is nC, if the electric…
- The electric field in a region is given by ⃗E=2/5E₀̂i+3/5E₀̂j with E₀=4.0×10³ N C⁻¹. The flux of this field t…
- A point charge of +12 μC is at a distance of 6 cm vertically above the centre of a square of side 12 cm, as s…
- The electric field in a region is given by ⃗E=(3/5E₀̂i+4/5E₀̂j) N C⁻¹. The ratio of the flux of this field th…
- An electric field ⃗E=4x ̂i-(y²+1)̂j N C⁻¹ passes through the box shown in the figure, a cuboidal box with A(0…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- A parallel plate air capacitor has a capacitance C. When it is half filled as shown in the figure with a diel…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- A parallel plate capacitor has capacitance C when there is vacuum between the plates. A sheet of thickness on…
- A parallel plate capacitor with plate separation 5 mm is charged by a battery. On introducing a mica sheet of…
- Three parallel plate capacitors, each with plate area A and separation d, are filled with two dielectrics k₁…
- Identify the correct statements. A. The effective capacitance of a series combination of capacitors is always…
- A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and plate separation d is filled equally with two dielectrics of c…
- Which one of the following is the correct dimensional formula for the capacitance, whose unit is the farad F?…
- A parallel plate capacitor is made with two rectangular plates, each of length l=3 cm and breadth b=1 cm, the…
- A capacitor has air as the dielectric medium and two conducting plates of area 12 cm² placed 0.6 cm apart. Wh…
- A capacitor is made of a flat plate of area A and a second plate having a stair-like structure, as shown in t…
- The distance between the two plates of a capacitor is d and its capacitance is C₁ when air is the medium betw…
- A capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential V. The flux of the electric field through a closed sur…
- Given below are two statements, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Assertion (A):…
- A parallel plate capacitor has plate area 40 cm² and plate separation 2 mm. The space between the plates is p…
- A condenser of capacitance 2 μ F is charged steadily from 0 to 5 C. Which of the following graphs correctly r…
- The capacitance of an isolated conducting sphere of radius R₁ becomes n times when it is enclosed by a concen…
- Two capacitors, each of capacitance 40 μ F, are connected in series. The space inside one of them is then fil…
- A slab of dielectric constant K has the same cross-sectional area as the plates of a parallel plate capacitor…
- Two identical thin metal plates carry charges q₁ and q₂ respectively, with q₁>q₂. The plates are brought clos…
- A parallel plate capacitor is formed by two plates each of area 30π cm², separated by 1 mm. A material of die…
- Two metallic plates form a parallel plate capacitor. The distance between the plates is d. A metal sheet of t…
- A parallel plate capacitor with plate area A and plate separation d=2 m has a capacitance of 4 μ F. The new c…
- C₀ is the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air as the medium between the plates (Fig. 1). If ha…
- A parallel plate capacitor with plate area A has separation d between the plates. Two dielectric slabs of die…
- A parallel plate capacitor with plate area A and distance of separation d is filled with a dielectric. What i…
- If q_f is the free charge on the capacitor plates and q_b is the bound charge on the dielectric slab of diele…
- Two capacitors of capacitances 2C and C are joined in parallel and charged up to a potential difference V. Th…
- In the figure a capacitor is formed by placing a compound dielectric between the plates of a parallel plate c…
- To change the capacitance of a given parallel plate capacitor, a dielectric material of dielectric constant K…
- A parallel plate capacitor has plates of length l, width w and plate separation d. It is connected to a batte…
- A parallel plate capacitor has plates of area A separated by a distance d. It is filled with a dielectric who…
- A capacitor is made of two square plates each of side a making a very small angle α between them: the lower p…
- The voltage rating of a parallel plate capacitor is 500 V. Its dielectric can withstand a maximum electric fi…
- A parallel plate capacitor has 1 μ F capacitance. One of its two plates is given +2 μC charge and the other p…
- Two identical parallel plate capacitors, of capacitance C each, have plates of area A separated by a distance…
- A parallel plate capacitor is made of two square plates of side a, separated by a distance d with d a. The lo…
- A parallel plate capacitor with square plates of side L is filled with four dielectrics of dielectric constan…
- A parallel plate capacitor is of area 6 cm² and separation 3 mm. The gap is filled with three dielectric slab…
- A parallel plate capacitor has plates of area 1 m² each at a separation of 0.1 m. If the electric field betwe…
- A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 90 pF is connected to a battery of emf 20 V. If a dielectric materi…
- A parallel plate capacitor with plate area 200 cm² and separation between the plates 1.5 cm is connected acro…
- A capacitance of 2 μ F is required in an electrical circuit across a potential difference of 1.0 kV. A large…
- The energy stored in the electric field produced by a metal sphere is 4.5 J. If the sphere contains 4 μC char…
- A combination of parallel plate capacitors is maintained at a certain potential difference. The combination i…
- In the given circuit a capacitor C is in series with the parallel pair 1 μ F and 2 μ F, the whole combination…
- A parallel plate capacitor is made of two circular plates separated by a distance of 5 mm and with a dielectr…
- A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a capacitance of 9 pF. The separation between its…
- A sheet of aluminium foil of negligible thickness is introduced between the plates of a capacitor. The capaci…
- The capacitance (in farad) of a spherical conductor of radius 1 m is
- The space between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C (without any dielectric) is now f…
- A parallel plate capacitor has charge 5×10⁻⁶ C. A dielectric slab is inserted between the plates and almost f…
- The space between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor of plate area 4 cm² and separation d=1.77 mm is fi…
- A parallel plate capacitor consisting of two circular plates of radius 10 cm is being charged by a constant c…
- A capacitor of 10 μ F capacitance, whose plates are separated by 10 mm through air and each plate having area…
- A parallel plate capacitor with plate separation 5 mm is charged up by a battery. It is found that on introdu…
- A parallel plate capacitor with plate area A and plate separation d is filled with a dielectric material of d…
- A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a capacitance of 15 pF. The separation between the…
- A capacitor has capacitance 5 μ F when its parallel plates are separated by an air medium of thickness d. A s…
- A composite parallel plate capacitor is made up of two different dielectric materials of different thicknesse…
- A parallel plate capacitor with width 4 cm, length 8 cm and separation between the plates of 4 mm is connecte…
- A parallel plate capacitor is made up of a stair-like structure with a plate area A of each stair, the steps…
- In a parallel plate capacitor set-up, the plate area is 2 m² and the plates are separated by 1 m. The space b…
- A parallel plate capacitor has plate area 100 m² and plate separation of 10 m. The space between the plates i…
- A parallel plate air capacitor is connected to a battery. The plates are pulled apart at a uniform speed v. I…
- From the circuit given below, the capacitance between the terminals A and B is μ F. Take C₁=C₂=C₃=1 μ F and C…
- A sphere of capacitance 100 pF is charged to a potential of 100 V. Another identical uncharged metal sphere i…
- Using a battery, a 100 pF capacitor is charged to 60 V and then the battery is removed. After that, a second…
- Three parallel plate capacitors C₁, C₂ and C₃, each of capacitance 5 μ F, are connected between the points A…
- A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 40 μ F is connected to a 100 V power supply. The space between the…
- Consider a parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and separation d between the plates. If E is the electric…
- A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 1 μ F is charged to a potential difference of 20 V. The distance be…
- A capacitor C₁=6 μ F is charged to a potential difference V₀=5 V using a 5 V battery. The battery is then rem…
- Two identical capacitors have the same capacitance C. One of them is charged to a potential V and the other t…
- Four identical capacitors, each of capacitance C, are connected as shown in the figure: two of them lie in tw…
- A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 2 F is charged to a potential V. The energy stored in it is E₁. The…
- Four capacitors C₁=1 μ F, C₂=2 μ F, C₃=4 μ F and C₄=3 μ F are connected in parallel across a battery of 20 V.…
- A source of potential difference V is connected to a combination of two identical capacitors, each of capacit…
- If the charge on a capacitor is increased by 2 C, the energy stored in it increases by 44%. The original char…
- Two capacitors having capacitances C₁ and C₂ respectively are connected as shown in the figure [C₁ and C₂ sta…
- The charge on the capacitor of capacitance 15 μ F in the circuit shown is [capacitors of 10 μ F, 15 μ F and 2…
- A parallel plate capacitor filled with a medium of dielectric constant 10 is connected across a battery and c…
- The material filled between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor has resistivity 200 Ω m. The capacitance…
- Three capacitors C₁=2 μ F, C₂=6 μ F and C₃=12 μ F are connected as shown in the figure [C₂ and C₃ are in seri…
- A capacitor is connected to a 20 V battery through a resistance of 10 Ω. It is found that the potential diffe…
- Two equal capacitors are first connected in series and then in parallel. The ratio of the equivalent capacita…
- Consider the combination of two capacitors C₁ and C₂, with C₂>C₁. When connected in parallel, the equivalent…
- A 10 μ F capacitor is fully charged to a potential difference of 50 V. After removing the source voltage it i…
- In the circuit shown in the figure, the total charge is 750 μC and the voltage across capacitor C₂ is 20 V. T…
- A capacitor C is fully charged with voltage V₀. After disconnecting the voltage source, it is connected in pa…
- Two capacitors of capacitances C and 2C are charged to potential differences V and 2V respectively. These are…
- In the circuit shown, a 2 μ F capacitor runs from the left terminal, held at 6 V, to the junction P; a 4 μ F…
- The effective capacitance of the parallel combination of two capacitors C₁ and C₂ is 10 μ F. When these capac…
- A capacitor with capacitance 5 μ F is charged to 5 μC. If the plates are pulled apart to reduce the capacitan…
- The parallel combination of two air-filled parallel plate capacitors of capacitance C and nC is connected to…
- A graph of charge q against voltage V is drawn for the series and the parallel combination of two given capac…
- In the given circuit a 4 μ F capacitor is in series with the parallel pair 1 μ F and 5 μ F; this branch is in…
- A parallel plate capacitor having capacitance 12 pF is charged by a battery to a potential difference of 10 V…
- In the circuit shown, a 10 μ F capacitor is in series with the parallel pair 6 μ F and 4 μ F, which in turn i…
- Seven capacitors, each of capacitance 2 μ F, are to be connected in a configuration to obtain an effective ca…
- In the circuit shown, the pole of a switch S is joined to the upper plate of a capacitor C; contact A leads t…
- In the circuit shown, all values are in μ F. From the terminal A a capacitor C leads to a node P. From P a 2…
- In the circuit shown, A is joined through a 6 μ F capacitor to a node P. Two 5 μ F capacitors hang in paralle…
- A capacitor C₁=1.0 μ F is charged up to a voltage V=60 V by connecting it to a battery B through switch (1).…
- A combination of capacitors is set up as shown in the figure: a 4 μ F capacitor is in series with the paralle…
- Three capacitors each of 4 μ F are to be connected in such a way that the effective capacitance is 6 μ F. Thi…
- The figure shows a network of capacitors in which the numbers indicate capacitances in μ F. From A the capaci…
- A system of four capacitors is connected across a 10 V battery. The upper branch is a 2 μ F from the left bat…
- A parallel plate capacitor is made of two plates of length l, width w, separated by a distance d. A dielectri…
- Two capacitors C₁ and C₂ are charged to 120 V and 200 V respectively. It is found that by connecting them tog…
- Two circuits (a) and (b) have charged capacitors with open switches. In circuit (a) a capacitor 3C carrying c…
- A series combination of n₁ capacitors, each of value C₁, is charged by a source of potential difference 4V. W…
- A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric constant K between the plates has a capacity C and is charged to…
- A battery is used to charge a parallel plate capacitor till the potential difference between the plates becom…
- A fully charged capacitor has a capacitance C. It is discharged through a small coil of resistance wire embed…
- A parallel plate capacitor is made by stacking n equally spaced plates connected alternately. If the capacita…
- The work done in placing a charge of 8×10⁻¹⁸ coulomb on a condenser of capacity 100 μ F is
- If there are n capacitors, each of capacitance C, connected in parallel across a source of V volt, then the e…
- A capacitor P with capacitance 10×10⁻⁶ F is fully charged with a potential difference of 6.0 V and disconnect…
- Four capacitors each of capacitance 16 μ F are connected in one horizontal row, so that the five nodes along…
- A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 12.5 pF is charged by a battery connected between its plates to a p…
- Three capacitors of capacitances 25 μ F, 30 μ F and 45 μ F are connected in parallel to a supply of 100 V. Th…
- A capacitor of capacitance C at potential V has energy E. It is connected to another capacitor of capacitance…
- Two parallel plate capacitors having equal plate area of 200 cm² are formed as follows: a conducting middle p…
- A 600 pF capacitor is charged by a 200 V supply. It is then disconnected from the supply and is connected to…
- In the given circuit, C₁=2 μ F, C₂=0.2 μ F, C₃=2 μ F, C₄=4 μ F, C₅=2 μ F and C₆=2 μ F. A 10 V cell sits in th…
- Three capacitors C₁=2 μ F, C₂=x μ F and C₃=3 μ F are connected in parallel across a supply of V=10 V. The tot…
- A capacitor of capacitance 900 μ F is charged by a 100 V battery. The capacitor is disconnected from the batt…
- Two parallel plate capacitors C₁ and C₂, each having a capacitance of 10 μ F, are individually charged by a 1…
- Two parallel plate capacitors of capacity C and 3C are connected in parallel combination and charged to a pot…
- Six capacitors of 8 μ F each lie in one horizontal row between A and B, so the seven nodes along the row are…
- A capacitor of capacitance 50 pF is charged by a 100 V source. It is then connected to another uncharged iden…
- A capacitor C₁ of capacitance 5 μ F is charged to a potential of 30 V using a battery. The battery is then re…
- A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 200 μ F is connected to a battery of 200 V. A dielectric slab of di…
- Four identical rectangular plates with length l=2 cm and breadth b=3/2 cm are arranged as follows: the plates…
- A parallel plate capacitor whose capacitance C is 14 pF is charged by a battery to a potential difference V=1…
- A 2 μ F capacitor C₁ is first charged to a potential difference of 10 V using a battery through a switch S₁.…
- A 5 μ F capacitor is charged fully by a 220 V supply. It is then disconnected from the supply and is connecte…
- A 60 pF capacitor is fully charged by a 20 V supply. It is then disconnected from the supply and is connected…
- Two charged conducting spheres S₁ and S₂ of radii 8 cm and 18 cm are connected to each other by a wire. After…
- The electric potential as a function of x and y is given by V=5(x²-y²) V. The electric field at the point (2,…
- The electric field in a region is given by ⃗E=Ax ̂i+By ̂j, where A=10 V m⁻² and B=5 V m⁻². If the electric po…
- Five positive charges, each of magnitude q, are placed at the vertices of a regular pentagon as shown in the…
- The electrostatic potential in a charged spherical region of radius r varies as V=ar³+b, where a and b are co…
- There are three concentric conducting spherical shells A, B and C of radii a, b and c respectively (c>b>a), c…
- The electrostatic potential on the surface of a uniformly charged spherical shell of radius R=10 cm is 120 V.…
- Given below are two statements, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Assertion (A):…
- Three infinitely long wires, each with linear charge density λ, are placed along the x-axis, the y-axis and t…
- An electric charge of 10⁻⁶ μC is placed at the origin (0,0) of the X-Y coordinate system. Two points P and Q…
- Given below are two statements, one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Assertion (A):…
- For a uniformly charged thin spherical shell, the electric potential V measured radially away from the centre…
- The electric potential at a point P due to a point charge of 5×10⁻⁹ C is 50 V. The distance of P from the poi…
- The electric potential at the centre of two concentric half rings of radii R₁ and R₂, having the same linear…
- Which of the following correctly represents the variation of the electric potential V of a charged spherical…
- Considering a group of positive charges, which of the following statements is correct?
- Two uniformly charged spherical conductors A and B of radii 5 mm and 10 mm are separated by a distance of 2 c…
- Given below are two statements. Statement I: Electric potential is constant within and at the surface of each…
- If the electric potential at any point (x,y,z) in space is given by V=3x² volt, the electric field at the poi…
- Two thin coaxial rings, each of radius a and carrying charges +Q and -Q respectively, are separated by a dist…
- A charge Q is distributed over two concentric conducting thin spherical shells of radii r and R (R>r). If the…
- Two isolated conducting spheres S₁ and S₂ of radii 2/3R and 1/3R carry 12 μC and -3 μC of charge respectively…
- Consider two concentric metallic hollow spheres of radii R and 4R holding charges Q₁ and Q₂ respectively. Giv…
- Ten charges are placed on the circumference of a circle of radius R with a constant angular separation betwee…
- Consider two charged metallic spheres S₁ and S₂ of radii R₁ and R₂ respectively. The electric fields E₁ (on S…
- A charge Q is distributed over three concentric spherical shells of radii a, b, c (a<b<c) such that their sur…
- A solid conducting sphere carrying a charge Q is surrounded by an uncharged conducting hollow spherical shell…
- The electric field in a region is given by ⃗E=(Ax+B)̂i, where E is in N C⁻¹ and x is in metres. The values of…
- The given graph shows the variation (with distance r from the centre) of [the plotted quantity stays constant…
- Three concentric metal shells A, B and C of respective radii a, b and c (a<b<c) have surface charge densities…
- There is a uniform electrostatic field in a region. The potential at various points on a small sphere centred…
- The potential (in volts) of a charge distribution is given by V(z)=30-5z² for |z|≤1 m and V(z)=35-10|z| for |…
- Within a spherical charge distribution of charge density ρ(r), N equipotential surfaces of potential V₀, V₀+Δ…
- A uniformly charged solid sphere of radius R has potential V₀ (measured with respect to ∞) on its surface. Fo…
- An electric field ⃗E=(30̂i+30̂j) N C⁻¹ exists in a region of space. If the potential at the origin is taken t…
- Assume that an electric field ⃗E=30x²̂i exists in space. Then the potential difference V_A-V_O, where V_O is…
- A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a long rod AB of length L as shown in the figure [the rod AB and the…
- Two small equal point charges of magnitude q are suspended from a common point on the ceiling by insulating m…
- Consider a finite, insulated, uncharged conductor placed near a finite positively charged conductor. The unch…
- This question has Statement 1 and Statement 2. Of the four choices given after the statements, choose the one…
- The electrostatic potential inside a charged spherical ball is given by φ=ar²+b, where r is the distance from…
- This question contains Statement-1 and Statement-2. Of the four choices given after the statements, choose th…
- The potential at a point x (measured in μm) due to some charges situated on the x-axis is given by V(x)=(20)/…
- Charges are placed on the vertices of a square as shown [+q at the top-left corner A and +q at the top-right…
- An electric charge 10⁻³ μC is placed at the origin (0,0) of an X-Y coordinate system. Two points A and B are…
- Two thin wire rings each having a radius R are placed a distance d apart with their axes coinciding. The char…
- A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R carries a charge q. Another charge Q is placed at the centre of…
- At the centre of a half ring of radius R=10 cm and linear charge density 4 nC m⁻¹, the potential is xπ V. The…
- Three concentric spherical metallic shells X, Y and Z of radii a, b and c respectively (a<b<c) have surface c…
- For a charged spherical ball the electrostatic potential inside the ball varies with r as V=2ar²+b, where a a…
- Two spherical conductors A and B of radii 1 mm and 2 mm are separated by a distance of 5 cm and are uniformly…
- A point charge 2×10⁻² C is moved from P to S in a uniform electric field of 30 N C⁻¹ directed along the posit…
- There is a uniform spherically symmetric surface charge density at a distance R₀ from the origin. The charge…
- A particle of mass m and charge q is fastened to one end A of a massless string having equilibrium length l,…
- A three coulomb charge moves from the point (0,-2,-5) to the point (5,1,2) in an electric field expressed as…
- A point charge of 10⁻⁸ C is placed at the origin. The work done in moving a point charge of 2 μC from the poi…
- Consider two identical metallic spheres of radius R, each having charge Q and mass m. Their centres have an i…
- Three small identical drops of water carrying the same charge on each coalesce to form a bigger drop. The rat…
- Two charges 7 μC and -2 μC are placed at (-9,0,0) cm and (9,0,0) cm respectively, in an external field ⃗E=A/(…
- Two point charges of 1 nC and 2 nC are placed at two corners of an equilateral triangle of side 3 cm. The wor…
- Two large plane parallel conducting plates are kept 10 cm apart as shown in the figure [the two plates are ve…
- Two charges q₁ and q₂ are separated by a distance of 30 cm. A third charge q₃, initially at C as shown in the…
- Two charges 7 μC and -4 μC are placed at (-7 cm,0,0) and (7 cm,0,0) respectively. Given ε₀=8.85×10⁻¹² C² N⁻¹…
- In the first configuration (1) shown in the figure, four identical charges q₀ are kept at the corners A, B, C…
- Sixty four conducting drops, each of radius 0.02 m and each carrying a charge of 5 μC, are combined to form a…
- Two point charges 4q and -q are fixed on the x-axis at x=-d/2 and x=d/2 respectively. If a third point charge…
- A solid sphere of radius R carries a charge Q+q distributed uniformly over its volume. A very small point-lik…
- Two identical electric point dipoles have dipole moments ⃗p₁=p̂i and ⃗p₂=-p̂i and are held on the x-axis at a…
- A system of three charges is placed as shown in the figure [+q and -q separated by a distance d, and a charge…
- A uniformly charged ring of radius 3a and total charge q is placed in the xy-plane centred at the origin. A p…
- In free space, a particle A of charge 1 μC is held fixed at a point P. Another particle B of the same charge…
- Four equal point charges Q each are placed in the xy-plane at (0,2), (4,2), (4,-2) and (0,-2). The work requi…
- Three charges Q, +q and +q are placed at the vertices of a right-angle isosceles triangle as shown in the fig…
- Two positive charges of magnitude q are placed at the ends of a side (side 1) of a square of side 2a. Two neg…
- Two points P and Q are maintained at the potentials of 10 V and -4 V respectively. The work done in moving 10…
- Two insulating plates are both uniformly charged in such a way that the potential difference between them is…
- A charged particle q is shot with speed v towards another charged particle Q which is held fixed. It approach…
- On moving a charge of 20 C through a displacement of 2 cm, 2 J of work is done. The potential difference betw…
- 64 identical drops each charged up to a potential of 10 mV combine to form a bigger drop. The potential of th…
- 27 identical drops are charged to 22 V each. They combine to form a bigger drop. The potential of the bigger…
- Eight similar drops of mercury are maintained at 12 V each. All these spherical drops combine into a single b…
- 512 identical drops of mercury are charged to a potential of 2 V each. The drops are joined to form a single…
- In an electrical circuit a battery passes 20 C of charge through it in a certain given time. The potential di…
- 27 similar drops of mercury are maintained at 10 V each. All these spherical drops combine into a single big…
- At time t = 0 a magnetic field of 1000 gauss is passing perpendicularly through the area defined by the close…
- A square loop of side 10 cm and resistance 0.7 Ω is placed vertically in the east–west plane. A uniform magne…
- A conducting circular loop is placed in the X–Y plane in the presence of a magnetic field B = (3t³ ĵ + 3t² k̂…
- A loop ABCDEFA of straight edges has six corner points A(0, 0, 0), B(5, 0, 0), C(5, 5, 0), D(0, 5, 0), E(0, 5…
- Consider a circular coil of wire carrying a constant current I, forming a magnetic dipole. The magnetic flux…
- In an electromagnetic system, the quantity representing the ratio of electric flux and magnetic flux has the…
- Consider I₁ and I₂ are the currents flowing simultaneously in two nearby coils 1 and 2, respectively. If L₁ =…
- Two coils are placed close to each other. The mutual inductance of the pair of coils depends upon
- Two coils have mutual inductance 0.002 H. The current changes in the first coil according to the relation i =…
- Suppose a long solenoid of 100 cm length, radius 2 cm having 500 turns per unit length, carries a current I =…
- A square loop of side 2.0 cm is placed inside a long solenoid that has 50 turns per centimetre and carries a…
- There are two long co-axial solenoids of the same length l. The inner and outer coils have radii r₁ and r₂ an…
- Two coaxial solenoids are made by winding thin insulated wire over a pipe of cross-sectional area A = 10 cm²…
- At the centre of a fixed large circular coil of radius R, a much smaller circular coil of radius r is placed.…
- Two concentric circular coils, C₁ and C₂, are placed in the XY plane. C₁ has 500 turns and a radius of 1 cm.…
- Two conducting circular loops A and B are placed in the same plane with their centres coinciding as shown in…
- A small circular loop of wire of radius a is located at the centre of a much larger circular wire loop of rad…
- Two concentric circular coils with radii 1 cm and 1000 cm, and number of turns 10 and 200 respectively, are p…
- Two coils 'P' and 'Q' are separated by some distance. When a current of 3 A flows through coil P, a magnetic…
- A circular loop of radius 0.3 cm lies parallel to a much bigger circular loop of radius 20 cm. The centre of…
- Two coils of self inductance L₁ and L₂ are connected in series combination having mutual inductance of the co…
- A circular current loop of radius R is placed inside a square loop of side length L (L >> R) such that they a…
- Find the mutual inductance in the arrangement, when a small circular loop of wire of radius R is placed insid…
- A small square loop of wire of side l is placed inside a large square loop of wire of side L (L >> l). Both l…
- A small square loop of side a and one turn is placed inside a larger square loop of side b and one turn (b >>…
- A small square loop of wire of side l is placed inside a large square loop of wire of side L (L = l²). The lo…
- A square loop of side 20 cm and resistance 1 Ω is moved towards right with a constant speed v₀. The right arm…
- The figure shows a square loop L of side 5 cm which is connected to a network of resistances. The whole setup…
- A rectangular loop has a sliding connector PQ of length l and resistance R Ω and it is moving with a speed v…
- A conducting bar moves on two conducting rails as shown in the figure. A constant magnetic field B exists int…
- XPQY is a vertical smooth long loop having a total resistance R, where PX is parallel to QY and the separatio…
- A copper rod of mass m slides under gravity on two smooth parallel rails, with separation l and set at an ang…
- A 1 m long metal rod AB completes the circuit as shown in figure. The area of the circuit is perpendicular to…
- A 20 m long uniform copper wire held horizontally is allowed to fall under gravity (g = 10 m/s²) through a un…
- An emf of 0.08 V is induced in a metal rod of length 10 cm held normal to a uniform magnetic field of 0.4 T,…
- A wire of length 1 m moving with a velocity 8 m/s at right angles to a magnetic field of 2 T. The magnitude o…
- A solid metal cube of edge length 2 cm is moving in a positive y-direction at a constant speed of 6 m/s. Ther…
- Consider a thin metallic sheet perpendicular to the plane of the paper moving with speed v in a uniform magne…
- A metallic cube of side 15 cm is moving along the y-axis at a uniform velocity of 2 m s⁻¹, in a region of uni…
- The magnetic field in a region is given by B = B₀(x/a) k̂. A square loop of side d is placed with its edges a…
- An infinitely long straight wire carrying current I, a one-side opened rectangular loop and a conductor C wit…
- A square frame of side 10 cm and a long straight wire carrying current 1 A are in the plane of the paper. Sta…
- An aeroplane with its wings spread 10 m is flying at a speed of 180 km/h in a horizontal direction. The total…
- A 10 m long horizontal wire extends from North East to South West. It is falling with a speed of 5.0 m s⁻¹, a…
- A fighter plane of length 20 m, wing span 15 m and height 5 m is flying towards east over Delhi. Its speed is…
- A horizontal straight wire 20 m long extending from east to west is falling with a speed of 5.0 m/s, at right…
- A boat is moving due east in a region where the earth's magnetic field is 5.0 × 10⁻⁵ N A⁻¹ m⁻¹ due north and…
- A horizontal straight wire 5 m long extending from east to west is falling freely at right angles to the hori…
- One conducting U tube can slide inside another as shown in figure, maintaining electrical contacts between th…
- Conductor wire ABCDE with each arm 10 cm in length is placed in a magnetic field of 1/ tesla, perpendicular t…
- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 50 MHz travels in free space along the positive x-direction. At a p…
- If the magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given by (The speed of light = 3 × 10⁸ m/s) B = 100…
- The magnetic field in a travelling electromagnetic wave has a peak value of 20 nT. The peak value of electric…
- A plane electromagnetic wave with frequency of 30 MHz travels in free space. At particular point in space and…
- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 20 MHz travels in free space along the +x direction. At a particula…
- The amplitude of magnetic field in an electromagnetic wave propagating along y-axis is 6.0 × 10⁻⁷ T. The maxi…
- The electric field and magnetic field components of an electromagnetic wave going through vacuum is described…
- Light wave traveling in air along x-direction is given by E_y = 540 sin π × 10⁴ (x - ct) V m⁻¹. Then, the pea…
- The oscillating magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by B_y = 5 × 10⁻⁶ sin 1000 π (5x - 4…
- An expression for oscillating electric field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given as E_z = 300 sin (5π ×…
- Consider an electromagnetic wave propagating in vacuum. Choose the correct statement.
- For plane electromagnetic wave propagating in the z direction, which one of the following combination gives t…
- A plane electromagnetic wave propagates along the +x direction in free space. The components of the electric…
- In an electromagnetic wave, at an instant and at a particular position, the electric field is along the negat…
- An electromagnetic wave is transporting energy in the negative z direction. At a certain point and certain ti…
- Identify the correct statements from the following descriptions of various properties of electromagnetic wave…
- In an electromagnetic wave the electric field vector and magnetic field vector are given as E = E₀ı̂ and B =…
- A plane electromagnetic wave propagating along y-direction can have the following pair of electric field (E)…
- In a plane electromagnetic wave, the directions of electric field and magnetic field are represented by k̂ an…
- A plane electromagnetic wave having a frequency u = 23.9 GHz propagates along the positive z-direction in fre…
- The electric field of a plane polarized electromagnetic wave in free space at time t = 0 is given by an expre…
- A monochromatic beam of light has a frequency u = 3/(2π) × 10¹² Hz and is propagating along the direction (ı̂…
- Magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by B⃗ = B₀ sin(kx + ω t) ȷ̂ T. Expression for corresp…
- A plane electromagnetic wave is moving in free space with velocity c = 3 × 10⁸ m/s and its electric field is…
- An electromagnetic wave with frequency ω and wavelength λ travels in the +y direction. Its magnetic field is…
- The electric field of an electromagnetic wave in free space is E⃗ = 57 cos[7.5 × 10⁶ t - 5 × 10⁻³ (3x + 4y)](…
- An electromagnetic wave travels in free space along the x-direction. At a particular point in space and time,…
- The magnetic field of an E.M. wave is given by B⃗ = (√3/4 ı̂ + 1/2 ȷ̂) 30 sin[ω(t - z/c)] (S.I. Units). The c…
- The electric field in an electromagnetic wave is given by E⃗ = ı̂ 40 cos(ω(t - z/c)) NC⁻¹. The magnetic field…
- A plane EM wave is propagating along x direction. It has a wavelength of 4 mm. If electric field is in y dire…
- A magnetic field vector in an electromagnetic wave is represented by B = B₀ sin(2π u t - 2π x/λ) ȷ̂. Its asso…
- The magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is B_y = (3.5 × 10⁻⁷) sin (1.5 × 10³ x + 0.5 × 10¹¹ t) T.…
- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 35 MHz travels in free space along the X-direction. At a particular…
- The electric field of an electromagnetic wave in free space is represented as E⃗ = E₀ cos(ω t - kz) ı̂. The c…
- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 20 MHz propagates in free space along x-direction. At a particular…
- If E⃗ and K⃗ represent electric field and propagation vectors of the EM waves in vacuum, then magnetic field…
- The magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given by B⃗ = 2 × 10⁻⁸ sin(0.5 × 10³ x + 1.5 × 10¹¹ t)…
- For an electromagnetic wave propagating through vacuum, k, E and ω represent propagation vector, electric fie…
- The electric field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by : E_y = 69 sin[0.6 × 10³ x - 1.8 × 10¹¹ t] V/m…
- An EM wave propagating in x-direction has a wavelength of 8 mm. The electric field vibrating in y-direction h…
- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 500 MHz is travelling in vacuum along y-direction. At a particular…
- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 100 MHz is travelling in vacuum along the x-direction. At a perpend…
- The magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is B⃗ = 3 × 10⁻⁸ sin[200π (y + ct)] ı̂ T, where c = 3 × 10…
- The electric field of a plane electromagnetic wave propagating along the x direction in vacuum is E⃗ = E₀ ȷ̂…
- The electric field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given by E⃗ = E₀ (x̂ + ŷ) sin(kz - ω t). Its magnetic…
- For a plane electromagnetic wave, the magnetic field at a point x and time t is B⃗(x,t) = [1.2 × 10⁻⁷ sin(0.5…
- If the magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by B⃗ = 3 × 10⁻⁸ sin(1.6 × 10³ x + 48 × 10¹⁰ t…
- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 25 GHz is propagating in vacuum along the z-direction. At a particu…
- A plane electromagnetic wave is propagating along the direction (ı̂ + ȷ̂)/(√2), with its polarization along t…
- A plane electromagnetic wave travels in free space along the x-direction. The electric field component of the…
- The magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave is given by B⃗ = 1.6 × 10⁻⁶ cos(2 × 10⁷ z + 6 × 10¹⁵ t)(2ı̂ + ȷ…
- An electromagnetic wave is represented by the electric field E⃗ = E₀ n̂ sin[ω t + (6y - 8z)]. Taking unit vec…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Con…
- Paramagnetic substances: (A) align themselves along the direction of external magnetic field. (B) attract str…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: The diamagnetic property depends on temperature. Statement II: T…
- Statement-I: The ferromagnetic property depends on temperature. At high temperature, ferromagnet becomes para…
- A soft ferromagnetic material is placed in an external magnetic field. The magnetic domains
- In a ferromagnetic material, below the curie temperature, a domain is defined as
- A perfectly diamagnetic sphere has a small spherical cavity at its centre, which is filled with a paramagneti…
- Three identical bars A, B and C are made of different magnetic materials. When kept in a uniform magnetic fie…
- Needles N₁, N₂ and N₃ are made of a ferromagnetic, a paramagnetic and a diamagnetic substance respectively. A…
- If B is magnetic field and μ₀ is permeability of free space, then the dimensions of (B/(μ₀)) is
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) Magnetic induction, (B) Magnetic intensity, (C) Magnetic flux, (D) Mag…
- A solenoid has a core made of material with relative permeability 400. The magnetic field produced in the int…
- The relationship between the magnetic susceptibility (χ) and the magnetic permeability (μ) is given by: (μ₀ i…
- The percentage increase in magnetic field (B) when space within a current carrying solenoid is filled with ma…
- The space inside a straight current carrying solenoid is filled with a magnetic material having magnetic susc…
- The coercivity of a magnet is 5 × 10³ A/m. The amount of current required to be passed in a solenoid of lengt…
- The current required to be passed through a solenoid of 15 cm length and 60 turns in order to demagnetise a b…
- A solenoid having area A and length l is filled with a material having relative permeability 2. The magnetic…
- A long solenoid is formed by winding 70 turns cm⁻¹. If 2.0 A current flows, then the magnetic field produced…
- A solenoid of 1200 turns is wound uniformly in a single layer on a glass tube 2 m long and 0.2 m in diameter.…
- A long solenoid carrying a current produces a magnetic field B along its axis. If the current is doubled and…
- A solenoid of 1000 turns per metre has a core with relative permeability 500. Insulated windings of the solen…
- Four identical long solenoids A, B, C and D are connected to each other as shown in the figure. If the magnet…
- A long solenoid has 200 turns per cm and carries a current i. The magnetic field at its centre is 6.28×10⁻² w…
- The magnetic field inside a 200 turns solenoid of radius 10 cm is 2.9×10⁻⁴ Tesla. If the solenoid carries a c…
- A solenoid of length 0.5 m has a radius of 1 cm and is made up of m number of turns. It carries a current of…
- The magnetic intensity at the center of a long current carrying solenoid is found to be 1.6×10³ A m⁻¹. If the…
- A long cylindrical conductor with large cross section carries an electric current distributed uniformly over…
- N equally spaced charges each of value q are placed on a circle of radius R. The circle rotates about its axi…
- A long straight wire of a circular cross-section with radius a carries a steady current I. The current I is u…
- Consider a long straight wire of a circular cross-section (radius a) carrying a steady current I. The current…
- In a co-axial straight cable, the central conductor and the outer conductor carry equal currents in opposite…
- A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady current I. The current is uniformly distributed across its…
- Given below are two statements: Statement (I): When currents vary with time, Newton's third law is valid only…
- A long straight wire of circular cross-section (radius a) is carrying steady current I. The current I is unif…
- A long straight wire with a circular cross-section having radius R, is carrying a steady current I. The curre…
- An infinitely long hollow conducting cylinder with radius R carries a uniform current along its surface. Choo…
- A coaxial cable consists of an inner wire of radius a surrounded by an outer shell of inner and outer radii b…
- Figures A and B show two long straight wires of circular cross-section (a and b with a<b), carrying current I…
- A long, straight wire of radius a carries a current distributed uniformly over its cross-section. The ratio o…
- A current I flows along the length of an infinitely long, straight, thin walled pipe. Then
- A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady current i. The current is uniformly distributed across its…
- A current i ampere flows along an infinitely long straight thin walled tube, then the magnetic induction at a…
- Match List-I with List-II: List-I (Y vs X) (A) Y = magnetic susceptibility, X = magnetising field (B) Y = mag…
- Two identical long current carrying wires are bent into the shapes shown in the following figures. If the mag…
- An infinitely long straight wire carrying current I is bent in a planar shape as shown in the diagram. The ra…
- An infinite wire has a circular bend of radius a, and carries a current I as shown in figure. The magnitude o…
- Find the magnetic field at the point P in figure. The curved portion is a semicircle connected to two long st…
- As shown in the figure, a long straight conductor with a semi-circular arc of radius π/(10) m is carrying cur…
- Match List I (current configuration) with List II (magnitude of magnetic field at point O). List I: (A) Long…
- A hairpin like shape as shown in figure is made by bending a long current carrying wire. What is the magnitud…
- A wire A, bent in the shape of an arc of a circle, carrying a current of 2 A and having radius 2 cm and anoth…
- A very long wire ABDMNDC is shown in figure carrying current I. AB and BC parts are straight, long and at rig…
- A current loop, having two circular arcs joined by two radial lines is shown in the figure. It carries a curr…
- Two identical wires A and B, each of length l, carry the same current I. Wire A is bent into a circle of radi…
- Directions: Questions 69 and 70 are based on the following paragraph. A current loop ABCD is held fixed on th…
- A loop ABCDA, carrying current I=12 A, is placed in a plane, consists of two semi-circular segments of radius…
- The magnetic field at the centre of a wire loop formed by two semicircular wires of radii R₁=2π m and R₂=4π m…
- A straight wire carrying a current of 14 A is bent into a semicircular arc of radius 2.2 cm as shown in the f…
- A current of 30 A each flows in opposite directions in two conducting wires placed parallel to each other at…
- The current passing through a conducting loop in the form of an equilateral triangle of side 4√3 cm is 2 A. T…
- Figure shows a current carrying square loop ABCD of edge length a lying in a plane. If the resistance of the…
- An element Δl⃗=Δ x ı̂ is placed at the origin and carries a large current I=10 A. The magnetic field on the y…
- As shown in the figure, a current of 2 A flows in an equilateral triangle of side 4√3 cm. The magnetic field…
- A current of 1.5 A is flowing through a triangle, of side 9 cm each. The magnetic field at the centroid of th…
- There are two infinitely long straight current carrying conductors and they are held at right angles to each…
- Magnitude of magnetic field (in SI units) at the centre of a hexagonal shape coil of side 10 cm, 50 turns and…
- Two very long, straight, and insulated wires are kept at 90° angle from each other in xy-plane as shown in th…
- The magnitude of the magnetic field at the center of an equilateral triangular loop of side 1 m which is carr…
- Find the magnetic field at point P due to a straight line segment AB of length 6 cm carrying a current of 5 A…
- As shown in the figure, two infinitely long, identical wires are bent by 90° and placed in such a way that th…
- A current of 1 A is flowing on the sides of an equilateral triangle of side 4.5×10⁻² m. The magnetic field at…
- A current i is flowing in a straight conductor of length L. The magnetic induction at a point on its perpendi…
- Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They carry steady equal currents flowing out of the plane…
- A horizontal overhead powerline is at a height of 4 m from the ground and carries a current of 100 A from eas…
- Two identical conducting wires AOB and COD are placed at right angles to each other. The wire AOB carries an…
- Two long parallel wires X and Y, separated by a distance of 6 cm, carry currents of 5 A and 4 A respectively,…
- A current of 5 A exists in a square loop of side 1/(√2) m. Then the magnitude of the magnetic field B at the…
- Two parallel long current carrying wires separated by a distance 2r are shown in the figure. The ratio of mag…
- A regular polygon of 6 sides is formed by bending a wire of length 4π meter. If an electric current of 4π√3 A…
- Two long, straight wires carry equal currents in opposite directions as shown in figure. The separation betwe…
- The current 5 A flows in a square loop of sides 1 m is placed in air. The magnetic field at the centre of the…
- Two long parallel wires carrying currents 8 A and 15 A in opposite directions are placed at a distance of 7 c…
- Two long current carrying conductors are placed parallel to each other at a distance of 8 cm between them. Th…
- Two long straight wires P and Q carrying equal current 10 A each were kept parallel to each other at 5 cm dis…
- A current carrying rectangular loop PQRS is made of uniform wire. The length PR=QS=5 cm and PQ=RS=100 cm. If…
- A wire X of length 50 cm carrying a current of 2 A is placed parallel to a long wire Y of length 5 m. The wir…
- Two parallel, long wires are kept 0.20 m apart in vacuum, each carrying a current of x A in the same directio…
- A rigid square loop of side a and carrying current I₂ is lying on a horizontal surface near a long wire carry…
- Two wires A and B are carrying currents I₁ and I₂ as shown in the figure. The separation between them is d. A…
- Two long current carrying thin wires, both with current I, are held by insulating threads of length L and are…
- Two long straight parallel wires, carrying (adjustable) currents I₁ and I₂, are kept at a distance d apart. I…
- Currents of 10 A and 2 A are passed through two parallel thin wires A and B respectively in opposite directio…
- Two thin long, parallel wires, separated by a distance d carry a current of i A in the same direction. They w…
- Two long conductors, separated by a distance d carry currents I₁ and I₂ in the same direction. They exert a f…
- If a current is passed through a spring then the spring will
- Two 10 cm long, straight wires, each carrying a current of 5 A are kept parallel to each other. If each wire…
- Refer to the paragraph and figure of the previous question (current loop ABCD with arcs BC of radius b and DA…
- A rigid wire consists of a semicircular portion of radius R and two straight sections. The wire is partially…
- A massless square loop, of wire of resistance 10 Ω, supporting a mass of 1 g, hangs vertically with one of it…
- As shown in the figure, a metallic rod of linear density 0.45 kg m⁻¹ is lying horizontally on a smooth inclin…
- A triangular shaped wire carrying 10 A current is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T, as shown in th…
- A loop of flexible wire of irregular shape carrying current is placed in an external magnetic field. Identify…
- Two coaxial solenoids of different radii carry current I in the same direction. Let F⃗₁ be the magnetic force…
- A wire carrying current I is tied between points P and Q and is in the shape of a circular arch of radius R d…
- A conductor lies along the z-axis at -1.5≤ z<1.5 m and carries a fixed current of 10.0 A in the -â_z directi…
- The circuit in the figure consists of wires at the top and bottom and identical springs as the left and right…
- A 4.0 cm long straight wire carrying a current of 8 A is placed perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field of…
- The magnetic field existing in a region is given by B⃗=0.2(1+2x)k̂ T. A square loop of edge 50 cm carrying 0.…
- A 2 A current carrying straight metal wire of resistance 1 Ω, resistivity 2×10⁻⁶ Ω m, area of cross-section 1…
- A square loop of edge length 2 m carrying current of 2 A is placed with its edges parallel to the x-y axis. A…
- The horizontal component of earth's magnetic field at a place is 3.5×10⁻⁵ T. A very long straight conductor c…
- A 1 m long metal rod XY completes the circuit as shown in the figure. The plane of the circuit is perpendicul…
- A straight wire AB of mass 40 g and length 50 cm is suspended by a pair of flexible leads in a uniform magnet…
- A single turn current loop in the shape of a right angle triangle with sides 5 cm, 12 cm, 13 cm is carrying a…
- A square loop of area 25 cm² has a resistance of 10 Ω. The loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field of magn…
- A tightly wound long solenoid carries a current of 1.5 A. An electron is executing uniform circular motion in…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R) Asse…
- A particle of charge q, mass m and kinetic energy E enters in magnetic field perpendicular to its velocity an…
- A proton and a deutron (q = +e, m = 2.0 u) having same kinetic energies enter a region of uniform magnetic fi…
- Two particles X and Y having equal charges are being accelerated through the same potential difference. There…
- Two charged particles, having same kinetic energy, are allowed to pass through a uniform magnetic field perpe…
- A proton, a deuteron and α-particle with same kinetic energy enter into a uniform magnetic field at right ang…
- A proton and an alpha particle of the same velocity enter in a uniform magnetic field which is acting perpend…
- Two ions of masses 4 amu and 16 amu have charges +2e and +3e respectively. These ions pass through the region…
- A deuteron and an alpha particle having equal kinetic energy enter perpendicularly into a magnetic field. Let…
- Two ions having same mass have charges in the ratio 1:2. They are projected normally in a uniform magnetic fi…
- A proton and an α-particle, having kinetic energies Kₚ and K_α respectively, enter into a magnetic field at r…
- A proton, an electron and a Helium nucleus, have the same energy. They are in circular orbits in a plane due…
- In an experiment, electrons are accelerated, from rest, by applying a voltage of 500 V. Calculate the radius…
- A proton and an α-particle (with their masses in the ratio 1:4 and charges in the ratio of 1:2) are accelerat…
- An electron, a proton and an alpha particle having the same kinetic energy are moving in circular orbits of r…
- Proton, deuteron and alpha particle of the same kinetic energy are moving in circular trajectories in a const…
- A charged particle of mass m and charge q travels on a circular path of radius r that is perpendicular to a m…
- The time period of a charged particle undergoing a circular motion in a uniform magnetic field is independent…
- If an electron and a proton having same momenta enter perpendicular to a magnetic field, then
- A particle of charge 1.6 μC and mass 16 μg is present in a strong magnetic field of 6.28 T. The particle is t…
- A charged particle of 2 μC accelerated by a potential of 100 V enters a region of uniform magnetic field of m…
- A deuteron and a proton moving with equal kinetic energy enter into a uniform magnetic field at right angle t…
- A singly ionized magnesium atom (A=24) ion is accelerated to kinetic energy 5 keV, and is projected perpendic…
- Uniform magnetic fields of different strengths (B₁ and B₂), both normal to the plane of the paper exist as sh…
- Consider a long thin conducting wire carrying a uniform current I. A particle having mass M and charge q is r…
- A charge particle moving in a magnetic field B, has the components of velocity along B as well as perpendicul…
- A particle of charge q and mass m is moving with a velocity -vı̂ (v eq 0) towards a large screen placed in th…
- A particle of mass m and charge q has an initial velocity v⃗ = v₀ȷ̂. If an electric field E⃗ = E₀ı̂ and magne…
- A charged particle of mass m and charge q moving under the influence of uniform electric field Eı̂ and a unif…
- An electron gun is placed inside a long solenoid of radius R on its axis. The solenoid has n turns/length and…
- In a region, steady and uniform electric and magnetic fields are present. These two fields are parallel to ea…
- A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field are acting along the same direction in a certain region…
- A 5 mg particle carrying a charge of 5π×10⁻⁶ C is moving with velocity (3ı̂+2k̂)×10⁻² m/s in a region having…
- A voltmeter with internal resistance of x Ω can be used to measure upto 20 V. In order to increase its measur…
- A moving coil galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω shows a full scale deflection for a current of 1 mA. The value…
- A galvanometer having a coil of resistance 30 Ω need 20 mA of current for full-scale deflection. If a maximum…
- A galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω when connected in series with 400 Ω measures a voltage of upto 10 V. The v…
- A galvanometer has a coil of resistance 200 Ω with a full scale deflection at 20 μA. The value of resistance…
- A galvanometer has a resistance of 50 Ω and it allows maximum current of 5 mA. It can be converted into voltm…
- The deflection in moving coil galvanometer falls from 25 divisions to 5 division when a shunt of 24 Ω is appl…
- A galvanometer having coil resistance 10 Ω shows a full scale deflection for a current of 3 mA. For it to mea…
- A student is provided with a variable voltage source V, a test resistor R_T = 10 Ω, two identical galvanomete…
- For designing a voltmeter of range 50 V and an ammeter of range 10 mA using a galvanometer which has a coil o…
- Given below are two statements: One is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- A 72 Ω galvanometer is shunted by a resistance of 8 Ω. The percentage of the total current which passes throu…
- A galvanometer of resistance G is converted into a voltmeter of range 0-1 V by connecting a resistance R₁ in…
- A galvanometer having a coil resistance 100 Ω gives a full scale deflection when a current of 1 mA is passed…
- A moving coil galvanometer has resistance 50 Ω and it indicates full deflection at 4 mA current. A voltmeter…
- The resistance of a galvanometer is 50 ohm and the maximum current which can be passed through it is 0.002 A.…
- A galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω has 50 divisions on its scale and has sensitivity of 20 μA/division. It is…
- A moving coil galvanometer, having a resistance G, produces full scale deflection when a current I_g flows th…
- A galvanometer having a resistance of 20 Ω and 30 divisions on both sides has figure of merit 0.005 ampere/di…
- A galvanometer, whose resistance is 50 ohm, has 25 divisions in it. When a current of 4 × 10⁻⁴ A passes throu…
- A galvanometer with its coil resistance 25 Ω requires a current of 1 mA for its full deflection. In order to…
- When a current of 5 mA is passed through a galvanometer having a coil of resistance 15 Ω, it shows full scale…
- A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100 Ω gives a full scale deflection, when a current of 1 mA is pas…
- A 50 Ω resistance is connected to a battery of 5 V. A galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω is to be used as an am…
- This question has Statement-I and Statement-II. Of the four choices given after the Statements, choose the on…
- A moving coil galvanometer has 150 equal divisions. Its current sensitivity is 10 divisions per milliampere a…
- An ammeter reads upto 1 ampere. Its internal resistance is 0.81 ohm. To increase the range to 10 A the value…
- If an ammeter is to be used in place of a voltmeter, then we must connect with the ammeter a
- A moving coil of galvanometer when shunted with 2 Ω resistance gives a full scale deflection for a current of…
- In the given figure an ammeter A consists of a 240 Ω coil connected in parallel to a 10 Ω shunt. The reading…
- Two resistance of 100 Ω and 200 Ω are connected in series with a battery of 4 V and negligible internal resis…
- When a resistance of 5 Ω is shunted with a moving coil galvanometer, it shows a full scale deflection for a c…
- In a moving coil galvanometer, two moving coils M₁ and M₂ have the following particulars: R₁ = 5 Ω, N₁ = 15,…
- Consider a moving coil galvanometer (MCG): A. The torsional constant in moving coil galvanometer has dimensio…
- A current of 200 μA deflects the coil of a moving coil galvanometer through 60°. The current to cause deflect…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: If the number of turns in the coil of a moving coil galvanometer…
- The current sensitivity of moving coil galvanometer is increased by 25%. This increase is achieved only by ch…
- For a moving coil galvanometer, the deflection in the coil is 0.05 rad when a current of 10 mA is passed thro…
- The current sensitivity of a galvanometer can be increased by (A) decreasing the number of turns (B) increasi…
- A teacher in his physics laboratory allotted an experiment to determine the resistance (G) of a galvanometer.…
- If n represents the actual number of deflection in a converted galvanometer of resistance G and shunt resista…
- For full scale deflection of total 50 divisions, 50 mV voltage is required in galvanometer. The resistance of…
- A galvanometer is used in laboratory for detecting, the null point in electrical experiments. If, on passing…
- A moving coil galvanometer has a coil with 175 turns and area 1 cm². It uses a torsion band of torsion consta…
- The galvanometer deflection, when key K₁ is closed but K₂ is open, equals θ₀ (see figure). On closing K₂ also…
- To know the resistance G of a galvanometer by half deflection method, a battery of emf V_E and resistance R i…
- A galvanometer has a 50 division scale. Battery has no internal resistance. It is found that there is deflect…
- In the circuit diagrams (A, B, C and D) shown below, R is a high resistance and S is a resistance of the orde…
- To find the resistance of a galvanometer by the half deflection method, the following circuit is used with re…
- In the experiment to determine the galvanometer resistance by half-deflection method, the plot of 1/θ vs the…
- A moving coil galvanometer has 100 turns and each turn has an area of 2.0 cm². The magnetic field produced by…
- An insulated wire is wound so that it forms a flat coil with N=200 turns. The radius of the innermost turn is…
- In an electromagnetic system, a quantity defined as the ratio of electric dipole moment and magnetic dipole m…
- Match List-I with List-II. List-I: (A) Permeability of free space, (B) Magnetic field, (C) Magnetic moment, (…
- The magnetic moments associated with two closely wound circular coils A and B of radius r_A = 10 cm and r_B =…
- Two concentric circular loops of radii r₁ = 30 cm and r₂ = 50 cm are placed in the X-Y plane as shown in the…
- A wire carrying current I is bent in the shape ABCDEFA as shown, where rectangle ABCDA and ADEFA are perpendi…
- A charged particle going around in a circle can be considered to be a current loop. A particle of mass m carr…
- A square loop is carrying a steady current I and the magnitude of its magnetic dipole moment is m. If this sq…
- An insulating thin rod of length l has a linear charge density ρ(x) = ρ₀ x/l on it. The rod is rotated about…
- A charge q is spread uniformly over an insulated loop of radius r. If it is rotated with an angular velocity…
- A thin circular disk of radius R is uniformly charged with density σ > 0 per unit area. The disk rotates abou…
- A wire of length 314 cm carrying current of 14 A is bent to form a circle. The magnetic moment of the coil is…
- A uniform conducting wire of length 24a, and resistance R is wound up as a current carrying coil in the shape…
- A current carrying circular loop of radius 2 cm with unit normal n̂=(k̂+ı̂)/(√2) is placed in a magnetic fiel…
- A magnetic dipole experiences a torque of 80√3 N m when placed in a uniform magnetic field in such a way that…
- A uniform magnetic field of 2×10⁻³ T acts along the positive Y-direction. A rectangular loop of sides 20 cm a…
- A small circular loop of conducting wire has radius a and carries current I. It is placed in a uniform magnet…
- A square loop of side 2a and carrying current I is kept in xz plane with its centre at origin. A long wire ca…
- A circular coil having N turns and radius r carries a current I. It is held in the XZ plane in a magnetic fie…
- A rectangular coil (dimension 5 cm × 2.5 cm) with 100 turns, carrying a current of 3 A in the clockwise direc…
- A circular coil of radius 2 cm and 125 turns carries a current of 1 A. The coil is placed in a uniform magnet…
- A circular coil having 200 turns, 2.5 × 10⁻⁴ m² area and carrying 100 μA current is placed in a uniform magne…
- A coil having 100 turns, area of 5 × 10⁻³ m², carrying current of 1 mA is placed in uniform magnetic field of…
- A coil in the shape of an equilateral triangle of side 10 cm lies in a vertical plane between the pole pieces…
- A galvanometer coil has 500 turns and each turn has an average area 3 × 10⁻⁴ m². If a torque of 1.5 N m is re…
- The binding energy per nucleon of ²⁰⁹₈₃Bi is MeV. [Take m(²⁰⁹₈₃Bi)=208.980388 u, mₚ=1.007825 u, mₙ=1.008665 u…
- Assuming the experimental mass of ¹²₆C as 12u, the mass defect of ¹²₆C atom is MeV/c². (Mass of proton =1.007…
- The minimum frequency of photon required to break a particle of mass 15.348 amu into 4α particles is kHz. [Ma…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: For all elements, greater the mass of the nucleus, greater is th…
- The binding energy for the following nuclear reactions are expressed in MeV. ₂He³+₀n¹→₂He⁴+20 MeV ₂He⁴+₀n¹→₂H…
- Given below are two statements. One is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- Binding energy of a certain nucleus is 18×10⁸ J. How much is the difference between total mass of all the nuc…
- If M₀ is the mass of isotope ¹²₅B, Mₚ and Mₙ are the masses of proton and neutron, then nuclear binding energ…
- The energy equivalent of 1 g of substance is
- From the statements given below: (A) The angular momentum of an electron in n^th orbit is an integral multipl…
- The atomic mass of ₆C¹² is 12.000000 u and that of ₆C¹³ is 13.003354 u. The required energy to remove a neutr…
- For a nucleus ^A_ZX having mass number A and atomic number Z. A. The surface energy per nucleon (bₛ)=-a₁A^2/3…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- The mass of proton, neutron and helium nucleus are respectively 1.0073 u, 1.0087 u and 4.0015 u. The binding…
- Find the Binding energy per nucleon for ¹²⁰₅₀Sn. Mass of proton mₚ=1.00783 U, mass of neutron mₙ=1.00867 U an…
- (Same situation as above: a nucleus of mass M+Δ m at rest decays into two daughter nuclei of equal mass /M2 e…
- The figure is a plot of binding energy per nucleon E_b, against the nuclear mass M; A, B, C, D, E, F correspo…
- Statement-1: Energy is released when heavy nuclei undergo fission or light nuclei undergo fusion. Statement-2…
- If M_O is the mass of an oxygen isotope ₈O¹⁷, M_P and M_N are the masses of a proton and a neutron respective…
- The mass defect in a particular reaction is 0.4 g. The amount of energy liberated is n×10⁷ kWh, where n= . (S…
- Nucleus A having Z=17 and equal number of protons and neutrons has 1.2 MeV binding energy per nucleon. Anothe…
- From the given data, the amount of energy required to break the nucleus of aluminium ²⁷₁₃Al is x×10⁻³ J. Mass…
- A nucleus at rest disintegrates into two smaller nuclei with their masses in the ratio of 2:1. After disinteg…
- Two nuclei of mass number 3 combine with another nucleus of mass number 4 to yield a nucleus of mass number 1…
- The energy released if hydrogen atoms are combined to form ⁴₂He is MeV. (Take binding energies per nucleon of…
- Energy released when two deuterons (₁H²) fuse to form a helium nucleus (₂He⁴) is (Given: Binding energy per n…
- ²³⁸₉₂A→²³⁴₉₀B+⁴₂D+Q. In the given nuclear reaction, the approximate amount of energy released will be [Given,…
- Nucleus A is having mass number 220 and its binding energy per nucleon is 5.6 MeV. It splits in two fragments…
- The Q-value of a nuclear reaction and kinetic energy of the projectile particle, Kₚ are related as
- A nucleus of mass M emits γ-ray photon of frequency u. The loss of internal energy by the nucleus is [Take c…
- A nucleus with mass number 184 initially at rest emits an α-particle. If the Q value of the reaction is 5.5 M…
- You are given the Mass of ⁷₃Li=7.0160 u, Mass of ⁴₂He=4.0026 u and Mass of ¹₁H=1.0079 u. When 20 g of ⁷₃Li is…
- A nucleus of mass M+Δ m is at rest and decays into two daughter nuclei of equal mass /M2 each. Speed of light…
- If the binding energy per nucleon in ⁷₃Li and ⁴₂He nuclei are 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV respectively, then in the…
- The binding energy per nucleon of deuteron (²₁H) and helium nucleus (⁴₂He) is 1.1 MeV and 7 MeV respectively.…
- The disintegration energy Q for the nuclear fission of ²³⁵U→¹⁴⁰Ce+⁹⁴Zr+n is MeV. Given atomic masses of ²³⁵U:…
- If three helium nuclei combine to form a carbon nucleus then the energy released in this reaction is ×10⁻² Me…
- A nucleus with mass number 242 and binding energy per nucleon as 7.6 MeV breaks into two fragment each with m…
- A common example of alpha decay is ²³⁸₉₂U→²³⁴₉₀Th+₂He⁴+Q. Given: ²³⁸₉₂U=238.05060 u, ²³⁴₉₀Th=234.04360 u, ⁴₂H…
- Two lighter nuclei combine to form a comparatively heavier nucleus by the relation given below: ²₁X+²₁X=⁴₂Y.…
- Match the List-I with List-II. List-I: A. ¹₀n+²³⁵₉₂U→¹⁴⁰₅₄Xe+⁹⁴₃₈Sr+2 ¹₀n B. 2H₂+O₂→2H₂O C. ²₁H+²₁H→³₂He+¹₀n…
- Choose the correct nuclear process from the below options [p: proton, n: neutron, e⁻: electron, e⁺: positron,…
- Which of the following nuclear fragments corresponding to nuclear fission between neutron (¹₀n) and uranium i…
- In a hypothetical fission reaction, ₉₂X²³⁶→₅₆Y¹⁴¹+₃₆Z⁹²+3R. The identity of emitted particles (R) is
- The energy released in the fusion of 2 kg of hydrogen deep in the sun is E_H and the energy released in the f…
- The explosive in a Hydrogen bomb is a mixture of ₁H², ₁H³ and ₃Li⁶ in some condensed form. The chain reaction…
- In a nuclear fission reaction of an isotope of mass M. Three similar daughter nuclei of same mass are formed.…
- In a reactor, 2 kg of ₉₂U²³⁵ fuel is fully used up in 30 days. The energy released per fission is 200 MeV. Gi…
- Given the masses of various atomic particles mₚ=1.0072 u, mₙ=1.0087 u, mₑ=0.000548 u, mᵤ=0, m_d=2.0141 u, whe…
- Consider the nuclear fission Ne²⁰→2He⁴+C¹². Given that the binding energy/nucleon of Ne²⁰, He⁴ and C¹² are, r…
- Two deuterons undergo nuclear fusion to form a Helium nucleus. Energy released in this process is (given bind…
- Imagine that a reactor converts all given mass into energy and that it operates at a power level of 10⁹ watt.…
- Statement-I: A nucleus having energy E₁ decays by β⁻ emission to daughter nucleus having energy E₂, but the β…
- When ₃Li⁷ nuclei are bombarded by protons, and the resultant nuclei are ₄Be⁸, the emitted particles will be
- A nuclear transformation is denoted by X(n,α) ⁷₃Li. Which of the following is the nucleus of element X?
- In the nuclear fusion reaction, ²₁H+³₁H→⁴₂He+n given that the repulsive potential energy between the two nucl…
- The energy released when 7/(17.13) kg of ⁷₃Li is converted into ⁴₂He by proton bombardment is α×10³² eV. The…
- The average energy released per fission for the nucleus of ²³⁵₉₂U is 190 MeV. When all the atoms of 47 g pure…
- A star has 100% helium composition. It starts to convert three ⁴He into one ¹²C via triple alpha process as ⁴…
- In a nuclear fission process, a high mass nuclide (A=236) with binding energy 7.6 MeV/Nucleon dissociated int…
- The energy released per fission of nucleus of ²⁴⁰X is 200 MeV. The energy released if all the atoms in 120 g…
- Two radioactive substances A and B of mass numbers 200 and 212 respectively, shows spontaneous α-decay with s…
- A radioactive material P first decays into Q and then Q decays to non-radioactive material R. Which of the fo…
- A radioactive nucleus n₂ has 3 times the decay constant as compared to the decay constant of another radioact…
- If sunlight is focused on a paper using convex lens, it starts burning the paper in shortest time when the le…
- A convex lens is made from glass material having refractive index of 1.4 with same radius of curvature on bot…
- The magnitudes of power of a biconvex lens (refractive index = 1.5) and that of a plano-concave lens (refract…
- A bi-convex lens has radius of curvature of both the surfaces same as 1/6 cm. If this lens is required to be…
- The radii of curvature for a thin convex lens are 10 cm and 15 cm respectively. The focal length of the lens…
- A lens having refractive index 1.6 has focal length of 12 cm, when it is in air. Find the focal length of the…
- A symmetric thin biconvex lens is cut into four equal parts by two planes AB and CD as shown in figure. If th…
- What is the relative decrease in focal length of a lens for an increase in optical power by 0.1D from 2.5D? […
- A plano-convex lens having radius of curvature of first surface 2 cm exhibits focal length of f₁ in air. Anot…
- A convex lens made of glass (refractive index = 1.5) has focal length 24 cm in air. When it is totally immers…
- Two identical symmetric double convex lenses of focal length f are cut into two equal parts L₁, L₂ by AB plan…
- For the thin convex lens, the radii of curvature are at 15 cm and 30 cm respectively. The focal length of the…
- A biconvex lens of refractive index 1.5 has a focal length of 20 cm in air. Its focal length when immersed in…
- The power of a lens (biconvex) is 1.25 m⁻¹ in particular medium. Refractive index of the lens is 1.5 and radi…
- A convex lens has power P. It is cut into two halves along its principal axis. Further one piece (out of the…
- The refractive index of a converging lens is 1.4. What will be the focal length of this lens if it is placed…
- The thickness at the centre of a plano convex lens is 3 mm and the diameter is 6 cm. If the speed of light in…
- A double convex lens has power P and same radii of curvature R of both the surfaces. The radius of curvature…
- A thin lens made of glass (refractive index = 1.5) of focal length f=16 cm is immersed in a liquid of refract…
- Formation of real image using a biconvex lens is shown here. If the whole set up is immersed in water without…
- A thin convex lens made from crown glass (μ = 3/2) has focal length f. When it is measured in two different l…
- When monochromatic red light is used instead of blue in a convex lens, its focal length will
- A convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and focal length f = 18 cm is immersed in water. The difference in foca…
- The radius of curvature of each surface of a convex lens having refractive index 1.8 is 20 cm. The lens is no…
- A bi convex lens of focal length 10 cm is cut in two identical parts along a plane perpendicular to the princ…
- A convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and focal length 18 cm in air is immersed in water. The change in focal…
- The graph between 1/u and 1/v for a thin convex lens in order to determine its focal length is plotted as sho…
- A point object in air is in front of the curved surface of a plano-convex lens. The radius of curvature of th…
- A slanted object AB is placed on one side of convex lens as shown in the diagram. The image is formed on the…
- Let u and v be the distance of the object and the image from a lens of focal length f. The correct graphical…
- In an experiment to measure focal length (f) of convex lens, the least counts of the measuring scales for the…
- Given below are two statements: Statement (I): When an object is placed at the centre of curvature of a conca…
- For an object placed at a distance 2.4 m from a lens, a sharp focused image is observed on a screen placed at…
- An object is placed at the focus of concave lens having focal length f. What is the magnification and distanc…
- For a concave lens of focal length f, the relation between object and image distances u and v, respectively,…
- A convex lens of focal length 20 cm produces images of the same magnification 2 when an object is kept at two…
- The graph shows how the magnification m produced by a thin lens varies with image distance v. What is the foc…
- A convex lens is put 10 cm from a light source and it makes a sharp image on a screen, kept 10 cm from the le…
- An object is at a distance of 20 m from a convex lens of focal length 0.3 m. The lens forms an image of the o…
- An object is located in a fixed position in front of a screen. Sharp image is obtained on the screen for two…
- An object 2.4 m in front of a lens forms a sharp image on a film 12 cm behind the lens. A glass plate 1 cm th…
- A student measures the focal length of a convex lens by putting an object pin at a distance u from the lens a…
- The size of the images of an object, formed by a thin lens are equal when the object is placed at two differe…
- The distance between object and its 3 times magnified virtual image as produced by a convex lens is 20 cm. Th…
- The distance between object and its two times magnified real image as produced by a convex lens is 45 cm. The…
- In an experiment with a convex lens. The plot of the image distance (v') against the object distance (u') mea…
- The same size images formed by a convex lens when the object is placed at 20 cm or at 10 cm from the lens. Th…
- The distance between an object and a screen is 100 cm. A lens can produce real image of the object on the scr…
- A photograph of a landscape is captured by a drone camera at a height of 18 km. The size of the camera film i…
- A hemispherical glass body of radius 10 cm and refractive index 1.5 is silvered on its curved surface. A smal…
- A thin convex lens and a thin concave lens are kept in contact and are co-axial. Which of the following state…
- An object AB is placed 15 cm on the left of a convex lens P of focal length 10 cm. Another convex lens Q is n…
- A thin biconvex lens is prepared from the glass (μ = 1.5) both curved surfaces of which have equal radii of 2…
- A biconvex lens is formed by using two thin planoconvex lenses, as shown in the figure. The refractive index…
- Two thin convex lenses of focal lengths 30 cm and 10 cm are placed coaxially, 10 cm apart. The power of this…
- A convex lens of focal length 30 cm is placed in contact with a concave lens of focal length 20 cm. An object…
- A concave-convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and the radii of curvature of its surfaces are 30 cm and 20 cm,…
- In the diagram given below, there are three lenses formed. Considering negligible thickness of each of them a…
- Given is a thin convex lens of glass (refractive index μ) and each side having radius of curvature R. One sid…
- Given a thin convex lens (refractive index μ₂), kept in a liquid (refractive index μ₁, μ₁<μ₂) having radii of…
- A thin plano convex lens made of glass of refractive index 1.5 is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.…
- An effective power of a combination of 5 identical convex lenses which are kept in contact along the principa…
- The position of image formed by the combination of lenses is
- The following figure represents two biconvex lenses L₁ and L₂ having focal length 10 cm and 15 cm respectivel…
- Find the distance of the image from object O, formed by the combination of lenses in the figure.
- Curved surfaces of a plano-convex lens of refractive index μ₁ and a plano-concave lens of refractive index μ₂…
- A point like object is placed at a distance of 1 m in front of a convex lens of focal length 0.5 m. A plane m…
- A convex lens (of focal length 20 cm) and a concave mirror, having their principal axes along the same lines,…
- A thin convex lens L (refractive index = 1.5) is placed on a plane mirror M. When a pin is placed at A, such…
- One plano-convex and one plano-concave lens of same radius of curvature 'R' but of different materials are jo…
- A plano convex lens of refractive index μ₁ and focal length f₁ is kept in contact with another plano concave…
- What is the position and nature of image formed by lens combination shown in figure? (f₁, f₂ are focal length…
- A plano-convex lens (focal length f₂, refractive index μ₂, radius of curvature R) fits exactly into a plano-c…
- A planoconvex lens becomes an optical system of 28 cm focal length when its plane surface is silvered and ill…
- A convergent doublet of separated lenses, corrected for spherical aberration, has resultant focal length of 1…
- A diverging lens with magnitude of focal length 25 cm is placed at a distance of 15 cm from a converging lens…
- A convex lens, of focal length 30 cm, a concave lens of focal length 120 cm, and a plane mirror are arranged…
- A thin convex lens of focal length f is put on a plane mirror as shown in the figure. When an object is kept…
- Two lenses of power -15 D and +5 D are in contact with each other. The focal length of the combination is
- A plano convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and radius of curvature 30 cm is silvered at the curved surface.…
- A collimated beam of light of diameter 2 mm is propagating along x-axis. The beam is required to be expanded…
- A point object, 'O' is placed in front of two thin symmetrical coaxial convex lenses L₁ and L₂ with focal len…
- Two convex lenses of focal length 20 cm each are placed coaxially with a separation of 60 cm between them. Th…
- As shown in the figure, a combination of a thin plano concave lens and a thin plano convex lens is used to im…
- An object is placed on the principal axis of convex lens of focal length 10 cm as shown. A plane mirror is pl…
- A convex lens of focal length 20 cm is placed in front of a convex mirror with principal axis coinciding each…
- Two identical thin biconvex lenses of focal length 15 cm and refractive index 1.5 are in contact with each ot…
- An object is placed at a distance of 12 cm from a convex lens. A convex mirror of focal length 15 cm is place…
- An object is placed at a distance of 12 cm in front of a plane mirror. The virtual and erect image is formed…
- When one light ray is reflected from a plane mirror with 30° angle of reflection, the angle of deviation of t…
- The light rays from an object have been reflected towards an observer from a standard flat mirror, the image…
- Two plane mirrors M₁ and M₂ are at right angle to each other as shown. A point source P is placed at a and 2a…
- Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other such that a ray of light incident on the first mirror M₁ and par…
- A point source of light, S is placed at a distance L in front of the centre of plane mirror of width d which…
- To get three images of a single object, one should have two plane mirrors at an angle of
- If two mirrors are kept at 60° to each other, then the number of images formed by them is
- Two vertical parallel mirrors A and B are separated by 10 cm. A point object O is placed at a distance of 2 c…
- A light ray is incident, at an incident angle θ₁, on the system of two plane mirrors M₁ and M₂ having an incl…
- A point source of light S, placed at a distance 60 cm in front of the centre of a plane mirror of width 50 cm…
- A rod of length 10 cm lies along the principal axis of a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm as shown in fig…
- Distance between an object and three times magnified real image is 40 cm. The focal length of the mirror used…
- Two identical objects are placed in front of convex mirror and concave mirror having same radii of curvature…
- When an object is placed 40 cm away from a spherical mirror an image of magnification 1/2 is produced. To obt…
- A finite size object is placed normal to the principal axis at a distance of 30 cm from a convex mirror of fo…
- A mirror is used to produce an image with magnification of 1/4. If the distance between object and its image…
- A concave mirror produces an image of an object such that the distance between the object and image is 20 cm.…
- A convex mirror of radius of curvature 30 cm forms an image that is half the size of the object. The object d…
- If the distance between object and its two times magnified virtual image produced by a curved mirror is 15 cm…
- Two objects A and B are placed at 15 cm and 25 cm from the pole in front of a concave mirror having radius of…
- An object is placed beyond the centre of curvature C of the given concave mirror. If the distance of the obje…
- The focal length f is related to the radius of curvature r of the spherical convex mirror by
- A short straight object of height 100 cm lies before the central axis of a spherical mirror whose focal lengt…
- A spherical mirror is obtained as shown in the figure from a hollow glass sphere. If an object is positioned…
- An object is gradually moving away from the focal point of a concave mirror along the axis of the mirror. The…
- A concave mirror for face viewing has focal length of 0.4 m. The distance at which you hold the mirror from y…
- A particle is oscillating on the x-axis with an amplitude 2 cm about the point x₀=10 cm, with a frequency ω.…
- You are asked to design a shaving mirror assuming that a person keeps it 10 cm from his face and views the ma…
- A car is fitted with a convex side-view mirror of focal length 20 cm. A second car 2.8 m behind the first car…
- A concave mirror of focal length 10 cm forms an image which is double the size of object when the object is p…
- Distance between object and its image (magnified by -1/3) is 30 cm. The focal length of the mirror used is (x…
- The driver sitting inside a parked car is watching vehicles approaching from behind with the help of his side…
- A thin cylindrical rod of length 10 cm is placed horizontally on the principal axis of a concave mirror of fo…
- An object 'O' is placed at a distance of 100 cm in front of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 200 cm as…
- When an object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from a concave mirror, the image is formed at a distance of 10…
- A concave mirror of focal length f in air is dipped in a liquid of refractive index μ. Its focal length in th…
- A concave mirror has radius of curvature of 40 cm. It is at the bottom of a glass that has water filled up to…
- Light ray incident along a vector AO (AO=2î-3ĵ) emerges out along vector OB (OB=Cî-4ĵ) as shown in the fi…
- The wavelength of light, while it is passing through water is 540 nm. The refractive index of water is 4/3. T…
- The electric field of an electromagnetic wave travelling through a medium is given by E⃗(x,t)=25 sin (2.0×10¹…
- A monochromatic light of frequency 5×10¹⁴ Hz travelling through air, is incident on a medium of refractive in…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- What is the lateral shift of a ray refracted through a parallel-sided glass slab of thickness 'h' in terms of…
- A monochromatic light wave with wavelength λ₁ and frequency υ₁ in air enters another medium. If the angle of…
- An ice cube has a bubble inside. When viewed from one side the apparent distance of the bubble is 12 cm. When…
- A vessel of depth 'd' is half filled with oil of refractive index n₁ and the other half is filled with water…
- A microscope is focused on an object at the bottom of a bucket. If liquid with refractive index 5/3 is poured…
- Time taken by light to travel in two different materials A and B of refractive indices μ_A and μ_B of same th…
- Light enters from air into a given medium at an angle of 45° with interface of the air-medium surface. After…
- The difference of speed of light in the two media A and B, (v_A-v_B) is 2.6×10⁷ m/s. If the refractive index…
- Consider a light travelling in air is incident into a medium of refractive index √2n. The incident angle is t…
- If a wave gets refracted into a denser medium, then which of the following is true?
- A glass tumbler having inner depth of 17.5 cm is kept on a table. A student starts pouring water (μ=4/3) into…
- A vessel of depth 2h is half filled with a liquid of refractive index 2√2 and the upper half with another liq…
- A ray of light AO in vacuum is incident on a glass slab at angle 60° and refracted at angle 30° along OB as s…
- A beaker contains water up to a height h₁ and kerosene of height h₂ above water so that the total height of (…
- Let the x-y plane be the boundary between two transparent media. Medium 1 in z ≥ 0 has a refractive index of…
- A container contains a liquid with refractive index of 1.2 up to a height of 60 cm and another liquid having…
- Two light beams fall on a transparent material block at point 1 and 2 with angle θ₁ and θ₂, respectively, as…
- A light ray is incident on a glass slab of thickness 4√3 cm and refractive index √2. The angle of incidence i…
- Two immiscible liquids of refractive indices 8/5 and 3/2 respectively are put in a beaker as shown in the fig…
- A pole is vertically submerged in swimming pool, such that it gives a length of shadow 2.15 m within water wh…
- As shown in the figure, a plane mirror is fixed at a height of 50 cm from the bottom of tank containing water…
- A fish rising vertically upward with a uniform velocity of 8 m s⁻¹, observes that a bird is diving vertically…
- A ray of light is incident from air on a glass plate having thickness √3 cm and refractive index √2. The angl…
- The X-Y plane be taken as the boundary between two transparent media M₁ and M₂. M₁ in Z ≥ 0 has a refractive…
- A ray of light is incident at an angle of incidence 60° on the glass slab of refractive index √3. After refra…
- An observer can see through a small hole on the side of a jar (radius 15 cm) at a point at height of 15 cm fr…
- Consider light travelling from a medium A to medium B separated by a plane interface. If the light undergoes…
- A transparent block A having refractive index μ=1.25 is surrounded by another medium of refractive index μ=1.…
- A hemispherical vessel is completely filled with a liquid of refractive index μ. A small coin is kept at the…
- Critical angle of incidence for a pair of optical media is 45°. The refractive indices of first and second me…
- The critical angle for a denser-rarer interface is 45°. The speed of light in rarer medium is 3×10⁸ m/s. The…
- Light travels in two media M₁ and M₂ with speeds 1.5×10⁸ m s⁻¹ and 2.0×10⁸ m s⁻¹ respectively. The critical a…
- A light wave travelling linearly in a medium of dielectric constant 4, incidents on the horizontal interface…
- The speed of light in media 'A' and 'B' are 2.0×10¹⁰ cm/s and 1.5×10¹⁰ cm/s respectively. A ray of light ente…
- A ray of light passes from a denser medium to a rarer medium at an angle of incidence i. The reflected and re…
- A ray of laser of a wavelength 630 nm is incident at an angle of 30° at the diamond-air interface. It is goin…
- A ray of light entering from air into a denser medium of refractive index 4/3, as shown in figure. The light…
- The critical angle of a medium for a specific wavelength, if the medium has relative permittivity 3 and relat…
- There is a small source of light at some depth below the surface of water (refractive index =4/3) in a tank o…
- In figure, the optical fiber is l=2 m long and has a diameter of d=20 μm. If a ray of light is incident on on…
- A transparent cube of side d, made of a material of refractive index μ₂, is immersed in a liquid of refractiv…
- Let the refractive index of a denser medium with respect to a rarer medium be n₁₂ and its critical angle θ_C.…
- A green light is incident from the water to the air-water interface at the critical angle (θ). Select the cor…
- Light is incident from a medium into air at two possible angles of incidence (a) 20° and (b) 40°. In the medi…
- A transparent solid cylindrical rod has a refractive index of 2/(√3). It is surrounded by air. A light ray is…
- A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive…
- A light ray is incident perpendicular to one face of a 90° prism and is totally internally reflected at the g…
- Which of the following is used in optical fibres?
- In the given figure, the face AC of the equilateral prism is immersed in a liquid of refractive index n. For…
- A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a tank containing water to a depth of √7 m. The refractive index of w…
- One side of an equilateral prism is painted by a transparent material of refractive index n₂. The refractive…
- Three rays of light, namely red (R), green (G) and blue (B) are incident on the face PQ of a right angled pri…
- Monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism of angle A. If the refractive index of the material of the p…
- A glass prism of refractive index 1.5 is immersed in water (refractive index 4/3) as shown in figure. A light…
- For a thin symmetric prism made of glass (refractive index 1.5), the ratio of incident angle and minimum devi…
- A ray of light passing through an equilateral prism is having velocity 2.12 × 10⁸ m/s in the prism material,…
- Angle of minimum deviation is equal to the half of the angle of prism in an equilateral prism. The refractive…
- As shown in the diagram, when the incident ray is parallel to base of the prism, the emergent ray grazes alon…
- Consider an equilateral prism (refractive index √2). A ray of light is incident on its one surface at a certa…
- The exit surface of a prism with refractive index n is coated with a material having refractive index n/2. Wh…
- For a transparent prism, if the angle of minimum deviation is equal to its refracting angle, the refractive i…
- Consider following statements for refraction of light through prism, when angle of deviation is minimum. (A)…
- The refractive index of the material of a glass prism is √3. The angle of minimum deviation is equal to the a…
- If the refractive index of the material of a prism is cot (A/2), where A is the angle of prism then the angle…
- A prism of refractive index μ and angle of prism A is placed in the position of minimum angle of deviation. I…
- The expected graphical representation of the variation of angle of deviation δ with angle of incidence i in a…
- The angle of deviation through a prism is minimum when (A) incident ray and emergent ray are symmetric to the…
- A monochromatic light is incident at a certain angle on an equilateral triangular prism and suffers minimum d…
- A ray of light is incident at an angle of 60° on one face of a prism of angle 30°. The emergent ray of light…
- The graph between angle of deviation (δ) and angle of incidence (i) for a triangular prism is represented by
- A ray of light suffers minimum deviation when incident on a prism having angle of the prism equal to 60°. The…
- The refractive index of prism is μ = √3 and the ratio of the angle of minimum deviation to the angle of prism…
- The refractive index of a transparent liquid filled in an equilateral hollow prism is √2. The angle of minimu…
- The refractive index of an equilateral prism is √2. The angle of emergence under minimum deviation position o…
- Cross-section view of a prism is the equilateral triangle ABC shown in the figure. The minimum deviation is o…
- A ray of light passing through a prism (μ = √3) suffers minimum deviation. It is found that the angle of inci…
- A prism of angle A = 1° has a refractive index μ = 1.5. A good estimate for the minimum angle of deviation (i…
- Which of the following statement is correct?
- When a beam of white light is allowed to pass through convex lens parallel to principal axis, the different c…
- A thin prism with angle 5° of refractive index 1.72 is combined with another prism of refractive index 1.9 to…
- A thin prism P₁ with angle 4° made of glass having refractive index 1.54, is combined with another thin prism…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: When the white light passed through a prism, the red light bends…
- The variation of refractive index of a crown glass thin prism with wavelength of the incident light is shown.…
- The refractive index of glass is 1.520 for red light and 1.525 for blue light. Let D₁ and D₂ be angles of min…
- A prism of refractive index n₁ and another prism of refractive index n₂ are stuck together (as shown in figur…
- If X and Y are the inputs, the given circuit works as . [Figure: X drives a NAND gate with both inputs tied t…
- Two 4-bit binary numbers, A=1101 and B=1010 are given in the inputs of a logic circuit shown in figure below.…
- For the given logic circuit, which of the following inputs combination will make both LED-1 and LED-2 to glow…
- Refer to the logic circuit given below. For two inputs (A=1,B=1) and (A=0,B=1), output (Y) will be . [Figure:…
- The output Y for the given inputs A and B to the circuit is: [Figure: inputs against time. A is 0 from 0 to 1…
- The given circuit works as [Figure: A feeds a NOR gate with both inputs tied; B feeds another NOR gate with b…
- Find the correct combination of A, B, C and D inputs which can cause the LED to glow. [Figure: A feeds a NOR…
- The correct truth table for the given input data of the following logic gate is [Figure: A and B feed an AND…
- For the given logic gate circuit, which of the following is the correct truth table? [Figure: n and m feed an…
- Identify the correct truth table of the given logic circuit. [Figure: A feeds an AND gate with both inputs ti…
- Two p-n junction diodes D₁ and D₂ are connected as shown in figure. A and B are input signals and C is the ou…
- In the digital circuit shown in the figure, for the given inputs the P and Q values are [Figure: both inputs…
- Choose the correct logic circuit for the given truth table having inputs A and B. Truth table (A, B, Y): 0 0…
- The truth table corresponding to the circuit given below is [Figure: A and B feed an OR gate; the OR output a…
- The Boolean expression Y=ABC+AC can be realised with which of the following gate configurations. A. One 3-inp…
- Consider the following logic circuit. The output is Y=0 when [Figure: A and B feed an AND gate. B and A (from…
- The output of the circuit is low (zero) for: (A) X=0,Y=0 (B) X=0,Y=1 (C) X=1,Y=0 (D) X=1,Y=1. Choose the corr…
- Which of the following circuits has the same output as that of the given circuit? [Figure: A and B drive two…
- For the circuit shown above, equivalent gate is [Figure: A and B feed a NAND gate and also a NOR gate; the tw…
- The truth table for the circuit given below is [Figure: upper AND gate with inputs A and B; lower AND gate wi…
- Identify the logic gate given in the circuit. [Figure: A and B each pass through a NOT gate; the two outputs…
- Following gates section is connected in a complete suitable circuit. For which of the following combination,…
- The output (Y) of logic circuit given below is 0 only when [Figure: A and B feed an OR gate; B and a constant…
- The correct truth table for the following logic circuit is [Figure: A passes through a NOT gate into an OR ga…
- The output Y of following circuit for given input is [Figure: an OR gate with inputs A and B; an AND gate wit…
- In the truth table of the above circuit the value of X and Y are [Figure: an AND gate with inputs A and B, an…
- The truth table of the given circuit diagram is [Figure: upper AND gate with inputs A and B; lower AND gate w…
- The truth table for this given circuit is [Figure: upper AND gate with inputs A and B; lower AND gate with in…
- Identify the logic operation performed by the given circuit. [Figure: A and B each pass through a NOT gate in…
- The output of the given circuit diagram is [Figure: an upper OR gate with inputs A and B; a lower OR gate wit…
- Name the logic gate equivalent to the diagram attached [Figure: a +5 V supply feeds the top wire of a rectang…
- For the logic circuit shown, the output waveform at Y is [Figure: A is 0 from 0 to 2 and 1 from 2 to 4. B is…
- The logic performed by the circuit shown in figure is equivalent to [Figure: a and b each go into a NOR gate…
- The logic operations performed by the given digital circuit is equivalent to [Figure: A and B feed an OR gate…
- The output from a NAND gate having inputs A and B given below will be [Figure: time is split into seven inter…
- The logic gate equivalent to the given circuit diagram is [Figure: a +5 V supply feeds a top wire. On the lef…
- The output waveform of the given logical circuit for the following inputs A and B as shown below, is [Figure:…
- The output Y for the inputs A and B of circuit is given by [Figure: four NAND gates. A and B feed NAND 1. NAN…
- In the circuit, the logical value of A=1 or B=1 when potential at A or B is 5 V and the logical value of A=0…
- A logic gate circuit has two inputs A and B and output Y. The voltage waveforms of A, B and Y are shown below…
- Identify the logic operation performed by the given circuit [Figure: A and B each go into a NOR gate with tie…
- Identify the correct logic gate for the following output (Y) of two inputs A and B. [Figure: seven equal inte…
- In the following circuit, the correct relation between output (Y) and inputs A and B will be [Figure: inputs…
- Identify the logic operation carried out by the given circuit. [Figure: A and B each go into a NAND gate with…
- Four NOR gates are connected as shown in figure. The truth table for the given figure is [Figure: A and B fee…
- In the following logic circuit the sequence of inputs A, B are (0,0), (0,1), (1,0) and (1,1). The output Y fo…
- If V_A and V_B are the input voltages (either 5 V or 0 V) and V₀ is the output voltage then the two gates rep…
- Identify the logic operation carried out. [Figure: A and B each go into a NAND gate with tied inputs; the out…
- Find the truth table for the function Y of A and B represented in the following figure. [Figure: A and B feed…
- The following logic gate is equivalent to [Figure: A and B each go into a NAND gate with tied inputs; the out…
- The output of the given combination gates represents [Figure: A and B each go into a NOR gate with tied input…
- Which one of the following will be the output of the given circuit? [Figure: A and B feed an AND gate followe…
- The logic circuit shown above is equivalent to [Figure: A and B (B through a NOT gate) feed an OR gate, follo…
- The truth table for the following logic circuit is [Figure: upper AND gate with inputs A and B; lower AND gat…
- Draw the output signal Y in the given combination of gates. [Figure: A is 1 from 0 to 2 s, 0 from 2 to 3 s, 1…
- In the following digital circuit, what will be the output at Z, when the input (A,B) are (1,0), (0,0), (1,1),…
- Identify the operation performed by the circuit given below [Figure: A, B and C each go into a NOR gate with…
- Which of the following gives a reversible operation? [Figure: (a) a two-input NOR gate; (b) a NOR gate with b…
- Boolean relation at the output stage-Y for the following circuit is [Figure: a 5 V source connects through sw…
- In the given circuit, value of Y is [Figure: input 1 passes through a NOT gate; its output feeds both inputs…
- The truth table for the circuit given in the figure is [Figure: A and B feed an OR gate; the OR output and A…
- The output of the given logic circuit is [Figure: A and B feed NAND 1. NAND 2 takes A and the NAND 1 output.…
- Truth table for the following digital circuit will be [Figure: an AND gate with inputs x and y, and a second…
- If a, b, c, d are inputs to a gate and x is its output, then, as per the following time graph, the gate is [F…
- The truth table given in figure represents: A, B, Y: 0 0 0; 0 1 1; 1 0 1; 1 1 1.
- To get an output of 1 from the circuit shown in figure the input must be [Figure: a and b feed an OR gate; it…
- Given: A and B are input terminals. Logic 1 = >5 V, Logic 0 = <1 V. Which logic gate operation the following…
- Which logic gate with inputs A and B performs the same operation as that performed by the following circuit?…
- The output of an OR gate is connected to both the inputs of a NAND gate. The combination will serve as a
- The combination of gates shown below yields [Figure: A and B each go into a NAND gate with tied inputs; the o…
- The logic circuit shown below has the input waveforms A and B as shown. Pick out the correct output waveform.…
- In the circuit below, A and B represent two inputs and C represents the output. The circuit represents [Figur…
- In the logic circuit shown in the figure, if input A and B are 0 to 1 respectively, the output at Y would be…
- The energy band gap of semiconducting material to produce violet (wavelength =4000 Å) LED is eV. (Round off t…
- Consider a situation in which reverse biased current of a particular P-N junction increases when it is expose…
- The maximum rated power of the LED is 2 mW and it is used in the circuit with input voltage of 5 V as shown i…
- Consider the following statements: A. The junction area of solar cell is made very narrow compared to a photo…
- A light emitting diode (LED) is fabricated using GaAs semiconducting material whose band gap is 1.42 eV. The…
- Conductivity of a photodiode starts changing only if the wavelength of incident light is less than 660 nm. Th…
- Given below are two statements: ONE is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- Given below are two statements: One is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- Which one of the following statement is not correct in the case of light emitting diodes? (A) It is a heavily…
- Identify the solar cell characteristics from the following options. [Figure: four I-V sketches. (a) current r…
- The photodiode is used to detect the optical signals. These diodes are preferably operated in reverse biased…
- LED is constructed from Ga-As-P semiconducting material. The energy gap of this LED is 1.9 eV. Calculate the…
- If a semiconductor photodiode can detect a photon with a maximum wavelength of 400 nm, then its band gap ener…
- With increasing biasing voltage of a photodiode, the photocurrent magnitude
- Identify the semiconductor devices whose characteristics are given below, in the order (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)…
- The I-V characteristic of an LED is [Figure: four sketches. (a) curves for R, Y, G, B drawn in the reverse (t…
- A potential divider circuit is connected with a dc source of 20 V, a light emitting diode of glow in voltage…
- Consider a circuit consisting of a capacitor (20 μF), resistor (100 Ω) and two identical diodes as shown in f…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. Asserti…
- The charge stored by the capacitor C in the given circuit in the steady state is μC. [Figure: a left rail and…
- Assuming in forward bias condition there is a voltage drop of 0.7 V across a silicon diode, the current throu…
- Which of the following circuits represents a forward biased diode? [Figure: five circuits, each a diode betwe…
- Refer to the circuit diagram given in the figure. Which of the following observations are correct? A. Total r…
- What is the current through the battery in the circuit shown below? [Figure: two parallel branches, each an i…
- The value of net resistance of the network as shown in the given figure is [Figure: three parallel branches b…
- Which of the diode circuit shows correct biasing used for the measurement of dynamic resistance of p-n juncti…
- Which of the following circuits is reverse-biased? [Figure: (a) +2 V, diode pointing right, resistor, +4 V. (…
- In the given circuit, the voltage across load resistance (R_L) is [Figure: a 15 V cell in series with a germa…
- If each diode has a forward bias resistance of 25 Ω in the below circuit, which of the following option is co…
- In the given circuit, the current (I) through the battery will be [Figure: a 10 V battery on the bottom side,…
- The I-V characteristics of a p-n junction diode in forward bias is shown in the figure. The ratio of dynamic…
- For using a multimeter to identify diode from electrical component, choose the correct statement out of the f…
- In the given figure, each diode has a forward bias resistance of 30 Ω and infinite resistance in reverse bias…
- A 5 V battery is connected across the points X and Y. Assume D₁ and D₂ to be normal silicon diodes. Find the…
- When a diode is forward biased, it has a voltage drop of 0.5 V. The safe limit of current through the diode i…
- In the figure, potential difference between A and B is [Figure: a 30 V cell (positive at top) in series with…
- The current i in the network is [Figure: a diamond network. Left vertex L, top vertex T, bottom vertex M, rig…
- Two identical capacitors A and B, charged to the same potential 5 V are connected in two different circuits a…
- Ge and Si diodes start conducting at 0.3 V and 0.7 V respectively. In the following figure if Ge diode connec…
- The circuit shown below contains two ideal diodes, each with a forward resistance of 50 Ω. If the battery vol…
- The reading of the ammeter for a silicon diode in the given circuit is [Figure: a 3 V cell, a silicon diode (…
- The V-I characteristic of a diode is shown in the figure. The ratio of forward to reverse bias resistance is…
- A 2 V battery is connected across AB as shown in the figure. The value of the current supplied by the battery…
- The current voltage relation of diode is given by I=(e^1000V/T-1) mA, where the applied voltage V is in volts…
- The forward biased diode connection is [Figure: each option is a diode pointing right followed by a resistor.…
- Figure shows a circuit in which three identical diodes are used. Each diode has forward resistance of 20 Ω an…
- The circuit has two oppositely connected ideal diodes in parallel. What is the current flowing in the circuit…
- In the following, which one of the diodes is reverse biased? [Figure: (a) ground, then a diode pointing right…
- As per the given circuit, the value of current through the battery will be A. [Figure: a 10 V battery on the…
- The cut-off voltage of the diode (shown in figure) in forward bias is 0.6 V. The current through the resistor…
- For the forward biased diode characteristics shown in the figure, the dynamic resistance at I_D=3 mA will be…
- The circuit contains two diodes each with a forward resistance of 50 Ω and with infinite reverse resistance.…
- Both the diodes used in the circuit shown are assumed to be ideal and have negligible resistance when these a…
- The output voltage in the following circuit is (Consider ideal diode case) [Figure: a resistor from +5 V pull…
- Zener breakdown occurs in a p-n junction having p and n both
- The following diagram shows a zener diode as a voltage regulator. The zener diode is rated at V_z=5 V and the…
- A zener diode with 5 V zener voltage is used to regulate an unregulated dc voltage input of 25 V. For a 400 Ω…
- In the following circuit, the reading of the ammeter will be (Take Zener breakdown voltage =4 V) [Figure: a 1…
- The I-V characteristics of an electronic device shown in the figure. The device is [Figure: I against V. In t…
- In the given circuit, the breakdown voltage of the Zener diode is 3.0 V. What is the value of I_z? [Figure: a…
- A Zener diode of breakdown voltage 10 V is used as a voltage regulator as shown in the figure. The current th…
- A zener diode of power rating 1.6 W is to be used as voltage regulator. If the zener diode has a breakdown of…
- Choose the correct statement about zener diode
- For the circuit shown below, calculate the value of I_z. [Figure: a 100 V source Vᵢ in series with Rₛ=1000 Ω…
- Take the breakdown voltage of the zener diode used in the given circuit as 6 V. For the input voltage shown i…
- Two Zener diodes (A and B) having breakdown voltages of 6 V and 4 V respectively, are connected as shown in t…
- The reverse break-down voltage of a Zener diode is 5.6 V in the given circuit. The current I_Z through the Ze…
- The figure represents a voltage regulator circuit using a Zener diode. The breakdown voltage of the Zener dio…
- Figure shows a DC voltage regulator circuit, with a Zener diode of breakdown voltage =6 V. If the unregulated…
- For the circuit shown here, the current through the Zener diode is [Figure: a 120 V source, 5 kΩ in series, a…
- In the given circuit the current through Zener Diode is close to [Figure: a 12 V cell, R₁=500 Ω in series, th…
- In the given circuit, the current through zener diode is [Figure: a 15 V cell, R₁=500 Ω in series, then R₂=15…
- The value of the resistor, R_S, needed in the dc voltage regulator circuit shown here, equals [Figure: input…
- A Zener diode is connected to a battery and a load as shown below. The currents I, I_Z and I_L are respective…
- A diode has Zener voltage of 10 V and maximum power dissipation of 0.5 W, then the minimum resistance to be u…
- A voltage regulating circuit consisting of Zener diode, having break-down voltage of 10 V and maximum power d…
- In the circuit shown below, maximum zener diode current will be mA. [Figure: a variable source (100 to 120) V…
- A 8 V Zener diode along with a series resistance R is connected across a 20 V supply (as shown in the figure)…
- In the given circuit, the value of current I_L will be mA. (When R_L=1 kΩ) [Figure: a 10 V cell, a series res…
- A zener of breakdown voltage V_Z=8 V and maximum zener current, I_ZM=10 mA is subjected to an input voltage V…
- The circuit diagram used to study the characteristic curve of a zener diode is connected variable power suppl…
- For the given circuit, the power across the zener diode is mW. [Figure: a 24 V source, 1 kΩ in series, a Zene…
- A zener diode of power rating 2 W is to be used as a voltage regulator. If the zener diode has a breakdown of…
- A zener diode having zener voltage 8 V and power dissipation rating of 0.5 W is connected across a potential…
- In a given circuit diagram, a 5 V zener diode along with a series resistance is connected across a 50 V power…
- The value of power dissipated across the zener diode (V_z=15 V) connected in the circuit as shown in the figu…
- In connection with the circuit drawn below, the value of current flowing through 2 kΩ resistor is ×10⁻⁴ A. [F…
- The zener diode has a V_z=30 V. The current passing through the diode for the following circuit is mA. [Figur…
- The circuit shown here is working as a 8 V dc regulated voltage source. When 12 V is used as input, the power…
- A single slit of width a is illuminated by a monochromatic light of wavelength 600 nm. The value of a for whi…
- Consider the diffraction pattern obtained from the sunlight incident on a pinhole of diameter 0.1 μm. If the…
- In a double-slit experiment, green light (5303 Å) falls on a double slit having a separation of 19.44 μm and…
- Two slits are 1 mm apart and the screen is located 1 m away from the slits. A light of wavelength 500 nm is u…
- A slit of width a is illuminated by light of wavelength λ. The linear separation between 1^st and 3^rd minima…
- A monochromatic light of wavelength 6000 Å is incident on the single slit of width 0.01 mm. If the diffractio…
- A microwave of wavelength 2.0 cm falls normally on a slit of width 4.0 cm. The angular spread of the central…
- The diffraction pattern of a light of wavelength 400 nm diffracting from a slit of width 0.2 mm is focused on…
- Visible light of wavelength 6000×10⁻⁸ cm falls normally on a single slit and produces a diffraction pattern.…
- The angular width of the central maximum in a single slit diffraction pattern is 60°. The width of the slit i…
- Light of wavelength 550 nm falls normally on a slit of width 22.0×10⁻⁵ cm. The angular position of the second…
- A single slit of width b is illuminated by a coherent monochromatic light of wavelength λ. If the second and…
- A single slit of width 0.1 mm is illuminated by a parallel beam of light of wavelength 6000 Å and diffraction…
- The box of a pin hole camera, of length L, has a hole of radius a. It is assumed that when the hole is illumi…
- In an experiment of single slit diffraction pattern, first minimum for red light coincides with first maximum…
- The first diffraction minimum due to the single slit diffraction is seen at θ = 30° for a light of wavelength…
- If I₀ is the intensity of the principal maximum in the single slit diffraction pattern, then what will be its…
- In single slit diffraction pattern, the wavelength of light used is 628 nm and slit width is 0.2 mm, the angu…
- If the measured angular separation between the second minimum to the left of the central maximum and the thir…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, two slits are located 1.5 mm apart. The distance of screen from slits is…
- In a single slit experiment, a parallel beam of green light of wavelength 550 nm passes through a slit of wid…
- A parallel beam of monochromatic light of wavelength 600 nm passes through single slit of 0.4 mm width. Angul…
- A parallel beam of monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 Å is incident normally on a single narrow slit of w…
- In a single slit diffraction pattern, a light of wavelength 6000 Å is used. The distance between the first an…
- Sodium light of wavelengths 650 nm and 655 nm is used to study diffraction at a single slit of aperture 0.5 m…
- Orange light of wavelength 6000×10⁻¹⁰ m illuminates a single slit of width 0.6×10⁻⁴ m. The maximum possible n…
- A telescope with objective diameter R is used to observe a distant star emitting light of wavelength 500 nm,…
- Some distant star is to be observed by some telescope of diameter of objective lens a, at an angular resoluti…
- In Young's double slit experiment, the distance between slits and the screen is 1.0 m and monochromatic light…
- In free space, an electromagnetic wave of 3 GHz frequency strikes over the edge of an object of size λ/(100),…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: In a Young's double slit experiment, the angular separation of f…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the slits are separated by 0.2 mm. If the slits separation is increased…
- Given below are two statements. One is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- The Young's double slit interference experiment is performed using light consisting of 480 nm and 600 nm wave…
- The width of fringe is 2 mm on the screen in a double slits experiment for the light of wavelength of 400 nm.…
- In Young's double slit experiment, the position of 5th bright fringe from the central maximum is 5 cm. The di…
- Using Young's double slit experiment, a monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 Å produces fringes of fringe w…
- In the Young's double slit experiment, the distance between the slits varies in time as d(t) = d₀ + a₀ sin ω…
- In Young's double slit experiment, if the source of light changes from orange to blue, then
- In a Young's double slit arrangement, slits are separated by a gap of 0.5 mm, and the screen is placed at a d…
- If the source of light used in a Young's double slit experiment is changed from red to violet
- In a Young's double slit experiment two slits are separated by 2 mm and the screen is placed one meter away.…
- Interference fringes are observed on a screen by illuminating two thin slits 1 mm apart with a light source (…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, 16 fringes are observed in a certain segment of the screen when light of…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, light of 500 nm is used to produce an interference pattern. When the dis…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the separation between the slits is 0.15 mm. In the experiment, a source…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the slits are placed 0.320 mm apart. Light of wavelength λ = 500 nm is i…
- In a Young's double slit experiment with slit separation 0.1 mm, one observes a bright fringe at angle 1/(40)…
- Consider a Young's double slit experiment as shown in figure. What should be the slit separation d in terms o…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, slits are separated by 0.5 mm and the screen is placed 150 cm away. A be…
- Two coherent point sources S₁ and S₂ are separated by a small distance d as shown. The fringes obtained on th…
- The source that illuminates the double-slit in 'double-slit interference experiment' emits two distinct monoc…
- The maximum number of possible interference maxima for slit separation equal to 1.8λ, where λ is the waveleng…
- A mixture of light, consisting of wavelength 590 nm and an unknown wavelength, illuminates Young's double sli…
- A Young's double slit experiment uses a monochromatic source. The shape of the interference fringes formed on…
- The maximum number of possible interference maxima for slit-separation equal to twice the wavelength in Young…
- In two separate Young's double-slit experimental set-ups and two monochromatic light sources of different wav…
- A beam of light consisting of wavelengths 650 nm and 550 nm illuminates the Young's double slits with separat…
- A double slit interference experiment performed with a light of wavelength 600 nm forms an interference fring…
- Two wavelengths λ₁ and λ₂ are used in Young's double slit experiment. λ₁ = 450 nm and λ₂ = 650 nm. The minimu…
- In Young's double slit experiment, carried out with light of wavelength 5000 Å, the distance between the slit…
- In a double slit experiment shown in figure, when light of wavelength 400 nm is used, dark fringe is observed…
- A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths 7000 Å and 5500 Å is used to obtain interference pattern in You…
- Two light waves of wavelengths 800 and 600 nm are used in Young's double slit experiment to obtain interferen…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, a laser light of 560 nm produces an interference pattern with consecutiv…
- In Young's double slit experiment the two slits are 0.6 mm distance apart. Interference pattern is observed o…
- In a double slit experiment with monochromatic light, fringes are obtained on a screen placed at some distanc…
- White light is passed through a double slit and interference is observed on a screen 1.5 m away. The separati…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the slits are separated by 0.3 mm and the screen is 1.5 m away from the…
- A fringe width of 6 mm was produced for two slits separated by 1 mm apart. The screen is placed 10 m away. Th…
- In a Young's double slit experiment 15 fringes are observed on a small portion of the screen when light of wa…
- The maximum intensity in a Young's double slit experiment is I₀. Distance between the slits (d) is 5λ, where…
- In interference experiment the path difference between two interfering waves at a point A on the screen is λ/…
- In a Young double slit experiment, the wavelength of incident light is 6000 Å, the separation between slits S…
- In the Young's double slit experiment the intensity produced by each one of the individual slits is I₀. The d…
- Two monochromatic light beams have intensities in the ratio 1 : 9. An interference pattern is obtained by the…
- Width of one of the two slits in a Young's double slit interference experiment is half of the other slit. The…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the source is white light. One of the slits is covered by red filter and…
- The width of one of the two slits in Young's double slit experiment is d while that of the other slit is xd.…
- The width of one of the two slits in a Young's double slit experiment is 4 times that of the other slit. The…
- In Young's double slit experiment, light from two identical sources are superimposing on a screen. The path d…
- The ratio of intensities at two points P and Q on the screen in a Young's double slit experiment where phase…
- In a Young's double slits experiment, the ratio of amplitude of light coming from slits is 2 : 1. The ratio o…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, two slits are illuminated with a light of wavelength 800 nm. The line jo…
- Two coherent sources of light interfere. The intensity ratio of two sources is 1 : 4. For this interference p…
- Two light beams of intensities in the ratio of 9 : 4 are allowed to interfere. The ratio of the intensity of…
- The two light beams having intensities I and 9I interfere to produce a fringe pattern on a screen. The phase…
- The interference pattern is obtained with two coherent light sources of intensity ratio 4 : 1. And the ratio…
- Find the ratio of maximum intensity to the minimum intensity in the interference pattern if the width of the…
- The light waves from two coherent sources have same intensity I₁ = I₂ = I₀. In interference pattern the inten…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the width of one of the slit is three times the other slit. The amplitud…
- Two coherent light sources having intensity in the ratio 2x produce an interference pattern. The ratio (Iₘₐₓ…
- Two coherent sources of sound S₁ and S₂ produce sound waves of the same wavelength, λ = 1 m, in phase. S₁ and…
- In the given figure, P and Q are two equally intense coherent sources emitting radiation of wavelength 20 m.…
- In a double-slit experiment, at a certain point on the screen the path difference between the two interfering…
- In an interference experiment the ratio of amplitudes of coherent waves is (a₁)/(a₂) = 1/3. The ratio of maxi…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the ratio of the slit's width is 4:1. The ratio of the intensity of maxi…
- Two coherent sources produce waves of different intensities which interfere. After interference, the ratio of…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the path difference, at a certain point on the screen, between two inter…
- In a Young's double slit experiment with light of wavelength λ the separation of slits is d and distance of s…
- Interference pattern is observed at P due to superimposition of two rays coming out from a source S as shown…
- In Young's double slit experiment, one of the slit is wider than other, so that the amplitude of the light fr…
- At two points P and Q on a screen in Young's double slit experiment, waves from slits S₁ and S₂ have a path d…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the two slits act as coherent sources of waves of equal amplitude A and…
- In a Young's double slit experiment the intensity at a point where the path difference is λ/6 (λ being the wa…
- To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference we require two sources which emit radiation of
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the intensity at some point on the screen is found to be 3/4 times of th…
- Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities 4I and 9I are superimposed. The difference between the…
- Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities I and 4I are superimposed. The difference between maxim…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the intensity at a point is (1/4)^th of the maximum intensity, the minim…
- In Young's double slit experiment, monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 Å is used. The slits are 1.0 mm apa…
- Two waves of intensity ratio 1:9 cross each other at a point. The resultant intensities at that point, when (…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, the intensities at two points, for the path differences λ/4 and λ/3 (λ b…
- Two beams of light having intensities I and 4I interfere to produce a fringe pattern on a screen. The phase d…
- Two light beams of intensities 4I and 9I interfere on a screen. The phase difference between these beams on t…
- The width of one of the two slits in a Young's double slit experiment is three times the other slit. If the a…
- A Young's double-slit experiment is performed using monochromatic light of wavelength λ. The intensity of lig…
- Two plane polarized light waves combine at a certain point whose electric field components are E₁=E₀ sin ω t…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, three polarizers are kept as shown in the figure. The transmission axes…
- In Young's double slit experiment, the fringe width of the interference pattern produced on the screen is 2.4…
- In a double slit experiment the distance between the slits is 0.1 cm and the screen is placed at 50 cm from t…
- Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Ass…
- A transparent film of refractive index 2.0 is coated on a glass slab of refractive index 1.45. What is the mi…
- Young's double slit interference apparatus is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.44. It has slit sepa…
- In Young's double slit experiment, the fringe width is 12 mm. If the entire arrangement is placed in water of…
- In Young's double slit experiment performed using a monochromatic light of wavelength λ, when a glass plate (…
- Two light waves having the same wavelength λ in vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first wave travels a…
- The figure shows a Young's double slit experimental setup. It is observed that when a thin transparent sheet…
- In a double slit experiment, when a thin film of thickness t having refractive index μ is introduced in front…
- Using monochromatic light of wavelength λ, an experimentalist sets up the Young's double slit experiment in t…
- Direction: The question has a paragraph followed by two statements, Statement-1 and Statement-2. Of the given…
- In a double slit experiment, when one of the slits is covered by a transparent mica sheet of refractive index…
- In a Young's double slit experiment set up, the two slits are kept 0.4 mm apart and screen is placed at 1 m f…
- A thin transparent film with refractive index 1.4 is held on a circular ring of radius 1.8 cm. The fluid in t…
- Monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm is used in Young's double slit experiment. An interference pattern i…
- As shown in the figure, in Young's double slit experiment, a thin plate of thickness t = 10 μm and refractive…
- In Young's double slit experiment, two slits S₁ and S₂ are d distance apart and the separation from slits to…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, an angular width of the fringe is 0.35° on a screen placed at 2 m away f…
- The difference in the number of waves when yellow light propagates through air and vacuum columns of the same…
- An unpolarized light of certain intensity passes through a combination of two polarizers whose transmission a…
- Two polarisers P₁ and P₂ are placed in such a way that the intensity of the transmitted light will be zero. A…
- When a polaroid sheet is rotated between two crossed polaroids then the transmitted light intensity will be m…
- A beam of unpolarised light of intensity I₀ is passed through a polaroid A and then through another polaroid…
- 'n' polarising sheets are arranged such that each makes an angle 45° with the preceding sheet. An unpolarised…
- Two polaroid A and B are placed in such a way that the pass-axis of polaroids are perpendicular to each other…
- An unpolarised light beam of intensity 2I₀ is passed through a polaroid P and then through another polaroid Q…
- A beam of plane polarised light of large cross-sectional area and uniform intensity of 3.3 W m⁻² falls normal…
- A polariser - analyser set is adjusted such that the intensity of light coming out of the analyser is just 10…
- A system of three polarisers P₁, P₂, P₃ is set up such that the pass axis of P₃ is crossed with respect to th…
- Unpolarised light of intensity I passes through an ideal polarizer A. Another identical polariser B is placed…
- A plane polarised light is incident on a polariser with its pass axis making angle θ with x-axis, as shown in…
- Unpolarised light of intensity I is incident on a system of two polarizers, A followed by B. The intensity of…
- Two beams, A and B, of plane polarised light with mutually perpendicular planes of polarisation are seen thro…
- Statement I: On viewing the clear blue portion of the sky through a Calcite Crystal, the intensity of transmi…
- When an unpolarised light of intensity I₀ is incident on a polarizing sheet, the intensity of the light which…
- An unpolarized light of intensity I₀ passes through polarizer and then through a certain optically active sol…
- As shown in the figure, three identical polaroids P₁, P₂ and P₃ are placed one after another. The pass axis o…
- An unpolarised light beam is incident on the polarizer of a polarisation experiment and the intensity of ligh…
- A source of light is placed in front of a screen. Intensity of light on the screen is I. Two polaroids P₁ and…
- An unpolarized light is incident on the plane interface of air-dielectric medium shown in figure. If the inci…
- When an unpolarized light falls at a particular angle on a glass plate (placed in air), it is observed that t…
- An unpolarised light is incident at an interface of two dielectric media having refractive indices of 2 (inci…
- When unpolarised light is incident at an angle of 60° on a transparent medium from air, the reflected ray is…
- Given below are two statements: Statement I: If the Brewster's angle for the light propagating from air to gl…
- A light whose electric field vectors are completely removed by using a good polaroid, allowed to incident on…
- Consider a tank made of glass (refractive index 1.5) with a thick bottom. It is filled with a liquid of refra…
- Unpolarised light of intensity I₀ is incident on surface of a block of glass at Brewster's angle. In that cas…
- A person lives in a high-rise building on the bank of a river 50 m wide. Across the river is a well lit tower…
- The angle of incidence at which reflected light is totally polarised for reflection from air to glass (refrac…
- Unpolarised light is incident on the boundary between two dielectric media, whose dielectric constants are 2.…
- An object flying in air with velocity (20̂i+25̂j-12̂k) suddenly breaks into two pieces whose masses are in th…
- An explosion breaks a rock into three parts in a horizontal plane. Two of them go off at right angles to each…
- A person holding a rifle (mass of person and rifle together is 100 kg) stands on a smooth surface and fires 1…
- Sand is being dropped on a conveyor belt at the rate of M kg/s. The force necessary to keep the belt moving w…
- A 1 kg stationary bomb is exploded in three parts having masses in the ratio 1:1:3 respectively. The parts ha…
- If the force on a rocket, moving with a velocity of 300 m/s, is 210 N, then the rate of combustion of the fue…
- A 5000 kg rocket is set for vertical firing. The exhaust speed is 800 m s⁻¹. To give an initial upward accele…
- A man fires a bullet of mass 200 g at a speed of 5 m/s. The gun is of one kg mass. By what velocity does the…
- In a rocket, fuel burns at the rate of 1 kg/s. This fuel is ejected from the rocket with a velocity of 60 km/…
- A 600 kg rocket is set for a vertical firing. If the exhaust speed is 1000 m s⁻¹, the mass of the gas ejected…
- A body of mass 5 kg explodes at rest into three fragments with masses in the ratio 1:1:3. The fragments with…
- A particle of mass 5m at rest suddenly breaks on its own into three fragments. Two fragments of mass m each m…
- A body of mass 4m is lying in x-y plane at rest. It suddenly explodes into three pieces. Two pieces, each of…
- An explosion blows a rock into three parts. Two parts go off at right angles to each other. These two are, 1…
- A shell of mass 200 gm is ejected from a gun of mass 4 kg by an explosion that generates 1.05 kJ of energy. T…
- A bomb of mass 30 kg at rest explodes into two pieces of masses 18 kg and 12 kg. The velocity of 18 kg mass i…
- A stationary particle explodes into two particles of masses m₁ and m₂ which move in opposite directions with…
- A mass of 1 kg is thrown up with a velocity of 100 m s⁻¹. After 5 seconds, it explodes into two parts. One pa…
- A shell, in flight, explodes into four unequal parts. Which of the following is conserved?
- If the magnitude of the sum of two vectors is equal to the magnitude of the difference of the two vectors, th…
- Six vectors, a⃗ through f⃗, have the magnitudes and directions indicated in the figure. Which of the followin…
- A particle starting from the origin (0,0) moves in a straight line in the (x,y) plane. Its coordinates at a l…
- The vectors A⃗ and B⃗ are such that |A⃗+B⃗|=|A⃗-B⃗|. The angle between the two vectors is
- If |A⃗×B⃗|=√3 A⃗·B⃗, then the value of |A⃗+B⃗| is
- The vector sum of two forces is perpendicular to their vector difference. In that case, the forces
- If |A⃗+B⃗|=|A⃗|+|B⃗|, then the angle between A⃗ and B⃗ will be
- If a unit vector is represented by 0.5î-0.8ĵ+ck̂, then the value of c is
- Identify the vector quantity among the following.
- A bus is moving on a straight road towards north with a uniform speed of 50 km/hour then it turns left throug…
- The magnitudes of vectors A⃗, B⃗ and C⃗ are 3, 4 and 5 units respectively. If A⃗+B⃗=C⃗, the angle between A⃗…
- A light rod of length l has two masses m₁ and m₂ attached to its two ends. The moment of inertia of the syste…
- From a circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, a small disc of mass M and radius R/3 is removed concentrically…
- The ratio of the radii of gyration of a circular disc to that of a circular ring, each of same mass and radiu…
- Three particles, each of mass m gram, are situated at the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC of side l c…
- A circular disc is to be made by using iron and aluminium so that it acquires maximum moment of inertia about…
- The ABC is a triangular plate of uniform thickness. The sides are in the ratio shown in the figure. I_AB, I_B…
- In a rectangle ABCD (BC=2AB). The moment of inertia is minimum along axis through
- From a disc of radius R and mass M, a circular hole of diameter R, whose rim passes through the centre is cut…
- Three identical spherical shells, each of mass m and radius r are placed as shown in figure. Consider an axis…
- The moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc is maximum about an axis perpendicular to the disc and passi…
- The moment of inertia of a thin uniform rod of mass M and length L about an axis passing through its midpoint…
- Four identical thin rods each of mass M and length l, form a square frame. Moment of inertia of this frame ab…
- A thin rod of length L and mass M is bent at its midpoint into two halves so that the angle between them is 9…
- The moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc of radius R and mass M about an axis touching the disc at it…
- The ratio of the radii of gyration of a circular disc about a tangential axis in the plane of the disc and of…
- The moment of inertia of a disc of mass M and radius R about an axis, which is tangential to the circumferenc…
- Moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc about a diameter is I. Its moment of inertia about an axis perpe…
- The moment of inertia of a thin rod about an axis passing through its mid point and perpendicular to the rod…
- The ratio of radius of gyration of a solid sphere of mass M and radius R about its own axis to the radius of…
- The ratio of the radius of gyration of a thin uniform disc about an axis passing through its centre and norma…
- From a circular ring of mass M and radius R an arc corresponding to a 90° sector is removed. The moment of in…
- The power radiated by a black body is P and it radiates maximum energy at wavelength λ₀. If the temperature o…
- A spherical black body with a radius of 12 cm radiates 450 W power at 500 K. If the radius were halved and th…
- A black body is at a temperature of 5760 K. The energy of radiation emitted by the body at wavelength 250 nm…
- A body cools from a temperature 3T to 2T in 10 minutes. The room temperature is T. Assume that Newton's law o…
- On observing light from three different stars P, Q and R, it was found that the intensity of violet colour is…
- A certain quantity of water cools from 70 °C to 60 °C in the first 5 minutes and to 54 °C in the next 5 minut…
- A piece of iron is heated in a flame. It first becomes dull red, then becomes reddish yellow and finally turn…
- If the radius of a star is R and it acts as a black body, what would be the temperature of the star, in which…
- The total radiant energy per unit area, normal to the direction of incidence, received at a distance R from t…
- A black body at 227 °C radiates heat at the rate of 7 cal cm⁻²s⁻¹. At a temperature of 727 °C, the rate of he…
- A black body is at 727 °C. It emits energy at a rate which is proportional to
- A black body at 1227 °C emits radiation with maximum intensity at a wavelength of 5000 A. If the temperature…
- If λₘ denotes the wavelength at which the radiative emission from a black body at a temperature T kelvin is m…
- The unit of Stefan's constant is
- For a black body at temperature 727 °C, its radiating power is 60 W and the temperature of the surroundings i…
- Which of the following is closest to an ideal black body?
- Wien's displacement law expresses a relation between
- A black body has maximum wavelength λₘ at 2000 K. Its corresponding wavelength at 3000 K will be
- The radiant energy from the sun, incident normally at the surface of the earth, is 20 kcal m⁻²min⁻¹. What wou…
- A black body is at a temperature of 500 K. It emits energy at a rate which is proportional to
- A beaker full of hot water is kept in a room. If it cools from 80 °C to 75 °C in t₁ minutes, from 75 °C to 70…
- If the temperature of the sun is doubled, the rate of energy received on the earth will be increased by a fac…
- A cup of coffee cools from 90°C to 80°C in t minutes, when the room temperature is 20°C. The time taken by a…
- Consider that σₛ, k_B and b represent the Stefan-Boltzmann constant, Boltzmann's constant and Wien's displace…
- The mechanical quantity which has the dimensions of the reciprocal of mass (M⁻¹) is:
- Plane angle and solid angle have
- If E and G respectively denote energy and the gravitational constant, then E/G has the dimensions of
- The dimensions of stress are:
- The dimensions of (μ₀ε₀)^-1/2 are
- The dimension of 1/2ε₀ E², where ε₀ is the permittivity of free space and E is the electric field, is
- If the dimensions of a physical quantity are given by M^aL^bT^c, then the physical quantity will be
- The dimensions of resistance in an electrical circuit, in terms of the dimension of mass M, of length L, of t…
- The dimensions of the universal gravitational constant are
- The dimensional formula of magnetic flux is
- Which of the following is a dimensional constant?
- The dimensions of RC are
- Which of the following has the dimensions of pressure?
- Turpentine oil is flowing through a tube of length l and radius r. The pressure difference between the two en…
- The dimensional formula of the permeability of free space, μ₀, is
- According to Newton, the viscous force acting between liquid layers of area A and velocity gradient (Δ v)/(Δ…
- The dimensional formula of self-inductance is
- The dimensional formula of torque is
- If C and R denote capacitance and resistance, the dimensional formula of CR is
- The dimensional formula of angular momentum is
- A physical quantity P is related to four observations a, b, c and d as follows: P=(a³b²)/(c√d). The percentag…
- In an electrical circuit, the voltage is measured as V=(200±4) volt and the current is measured as I=(20±0.2)…
- A metal wire has mass (0.4±0.002) g, radius (0.3±0.001) mm and length (5±0.02) cm. The maximum possible perce…
- In an experiment, the percentage errors that occurred in the measurement of the physical quantities A, B, C a…
- In an experiment four quantities a, b, c and d are measured with percentage errors 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% respecti…
- A student measures the distance traversed in free fall of a body, initially at rest, in a given time. He uses…
- If the error in the measurement of the radius of a sphere is 2%, then the error in the determination of the v…
- The density of a cube is measured by measuring its mass and the length of its sides. If the maximum errors in…
- The percentage errors in the measurement of mass and speed are 2% and 3% respectively. The error in the estim…
- A certain body weighs 22.42 g and has a measured volume of 4.7 cc. The possible errors in the measurement of…
- For a travelling harmonic wave y(x,t)=2.0 cos 2π(10t-0.0080x+0.35), where x and y are in cm and t in s, the p…
- The displacement of a travelling wave is y=C sin (2π)/λ(at-x), where t is time, x is distance and λ is the wa…
- A wave travelling in the +ve x-direction having displacement along y-direction as 1 m, wavelength 2π m and fr…
- The equation of a simple harmonic wave is given by y=3 sin π/2(50t-x), where x and y are in metres and t is i…
- Two waves are represented by the equations y₁=a sin(ω t+kx+0.57) m and y₂=a cos(ω t+kx) m, where x is in metr…
- A transverse wave is represented by y=A sin(ω t-kx). For what value of the wavelength is the wave velocity eq…
- A wave in a string has an amplitude of 2 cm. The wave travels in the +ve direction of x axis with a speed of…
- The wave described by y=0.25 sin(10π x-2π t), where x and y are in metres and t in seconds, is a wave travell…
- A transverse wave propagating along x-axis is represented by y(x,t)=8.0 sin (0.5π x-4π t-π/4) where x is in m…
- Which one of the following statements is true?
- The phase difference between two waves, represented by y₁=10⁻⁶ sin [100t+(x/(50))+0.5] m and y₂=10⁻⁶ cos [100…
- If a wave travelling in positive x-direction with A=0.2 m, velocity =360 m/s and λ=60 m, then correct express…
- The equation of a wave is represented by y=10⁻⁴ sin (100t-x/(10)) m, then the velocity of wave will be
- A transverse wave is represented by the equation y=y₀ sin (2π)/λ(vt-x). For what value of λ is the maximum pa…
- In a sinusoidal wave, the time required for a particular point to move from maximum displacement to zero disp…
- The equation of a sound wave is y=0.0015 sin(62.4x+316t). The wavelength of this wave is
- The frequency of sinusoidal wave y=0.40 cos[2000t+0.80] would be
- With the propagation of a longitudinal wave through a material medium, the quantities transmitted in the prop…
- Equation of progressive wave is given by y=4 sin [π(t/5-x/9)+π/6] where y, x are in cm and t is in seconds. T…
- In the circuit shown, an inductance L is connected to an ac source. The current flowing in the circuit is I=I…
- A 10 μF capacitor is connected to a 210 V, 50 Hz source as shown in the figure. The peak current in the circu…
- Given below are two statements. Statement I: In an ac circuit, the current through a capacitor leads the volt…
- An inductor of inductance 2 mH is connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz ac source. Let the inductive reactance in the c…
- For very high frequencies, the effective impedance of the circuit shown in the figure will be: the source fee…
- A 40 μF capacitor is connected to a 200 V, 50 Hz ac supply. The rms value of the current in the circuit is, n…
- A small signal voltage V(t)=V₀ sin ω t is applied across an ideal capacitor C. Then
- A coil of self-inductance L is connected in series with a bulb B and an ac source. The brightness of the bulb…
- The current I in an inductance is varying with time according to the plot shown in the figure: it rises linea…
- In an ac circuit, an alternating voltage e=200√2 sin 100t volt is connected to a capacitor of capacity 1 μF.…
- Two cables of copper are of equal length. One of them has a single wire of cross-sectional area A, while the…
- A capacitor of capacity C has reactance X. If the capacitance and the frequency become double, then the react…
- In the circuit given in the figure, A₁ and A₂ are ammeters, one in a branch containing a capacitor and the ot…
- When the key K is pressed at time t=0 in the circuit shown, which of the following statements about the curre…
- The time constant of a C-R circuit is
- The maximum power is dissipated for an ac in a/an:
- A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac voltage source. When L is removed from the circuit, the phase diff…
- An inductor of 20 mH, a capacitor of 100 μF and a resistor of 50 Ω are connected in series across a source of…
- An inductor of 20 mH, a capacitor of 50 μF and a resistor of 40 Ω are connected in series across a source of…
- The potential differences across the resistance, capacitance and inductance are 80 V, 40 V and 100 V respecti…
- A resistance R draws power P when connected to an ac source. If an inductance is now placed in series with th…
- In an electrical circuit, R, L, C and an ac voltage source are all connected in series. When L is removed fro…
- The instantaneous values of alternating current and voltage in a circuit are given as i=1/(√2)sin (100π t) am…
- The power dissipated in an LCR series circuit connected to an ac source of emf ε is
- In an ac circuit, the emf (ε) and the current (i) at any instant are given respectively by ε=E₀ sin ω t and i…
- A coil of inductive reactance 31 Ω has a resistance of 8 Ω. It is placed in series with a condenser of capaci…
- In an ac circuit, the current flowing is I=5 sin (100t-π/2) ampere and the potential difference is V=200 sin(…
- In an ac circuit carrying a current I under a voltage V, the power dissipation is
- The total energy of an electron in the nth stationary orbit of the hydrogen atom can be obtained by
- For which one of the following, Bohr model is not valid?
- The radius of the first permitted Bohr orbit for the electron, in a hydrogen atom equals 0.51 A and its groun…
- The total energy of an electron in an atom in an orbit is -3.4 eV. Its kinetic and potential energies are, re…
- The ratio of kinetic energy to the total energy of an electron in a Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom, is
- Consider 3rd orbit of He⁺ (Helium), using non-relativistic approach, the speed of electron in this orbit will…
- The energy of a hydrogen atom in the ground state is -13.6 eV. The energy of a He⁺ ion in the first excited s…
- The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. When its electron is in the first excited state, its ex…
- The total energy of electron in the ground state of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. The kinetic energy of an elect…
- The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of hydrogen is about -3.4 eV. Its kinetic energy i…
- The Bohr model of atoms
- In the Bohr's model of a hydrogen atom, the centripetal force is furnished by the Coulomb attraction between…
- The energy of ground electronic state of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. The energy of the first excited state wil…
- When hydrogen atom is in its first excited level, its radius is
- When a hydrogen atom is raised from the ground state to an excited state
- The radius of hydrogen atom in its ground state is 5.3×10⁻¹¹ m. After collision with an electron it is found…
- In terms of Bohr radius a₀, the radius of the second Bohr orbit of a hydrogen atom is given by
- The ground state energy of H-atom is 13.6 eV. The energy needed to ionise H-atom from its second excited state
- Consider an electron in the nth orbit of a hydrogen atom in the Bohr model. The circumference of the orbit ca…
- The valence electron in alkali metal is a
- To explain his theory, Bohr used
- The ionisation energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV, the ionisation energy of helium atom would be
- Two metal wires of identical dimensions are connected in series. If σ₁ and σ₂ are the conductivities of the m…
- A 12 cm wire is given the shape of a right-angled triangle ABC having sides 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 cm, as shown in…
- A ring is made of a wire having a resistance R₀=12 Ω. Find the points A and B, as shown in the figure, at whi…
- A wire of resistance 12 ohms per metre is bent to form a complete circle of radius 10 cm. The resistance betw…
- In the circuit shown, the current through the 4 Ω resistor is 1 amp when the points P and M are connected to…
- When a wire of uniform cross-section a, length l and resistance R is bent into a complete circle, the resista…
- n resistances, each of r ohm, when connected in parallel give an equivalent resistance of R ohm. If these res…
- The current in the given circuit is
- The current in the following circuit is
- What will be the equivalent resistance between the two points A and D?
- Six resistors of 3 Ω each are connected along the sides of a hexagon and three resistors of 6 Ω each are conn…
- Three resistances each of 4 Ω are connected to form a triangle. The resistance between any two terminals is
- Current through 3 Ω resistor is 0.8 ampere, then potential drop through 4 Ω resistor is
- In the network shown in figure each resistance is 1 Ω. The effective resistance between A and B is
- You are given several identical resistances each of value R=10 Ω and each capable of carrying a maximum curre…
- n equal resistors are first connected in series and then connected in parallel. What is the ratio of the maxi…
- Five equal resistances each of resistance R are connected as shown in the figure. A battery of V volts is con…
- In the network shown in the figure, each of the resistance is equal to 2 Ω. The resistance between the points…
- Which of the following acts as a circuit protection device?
- The charge flowing through a resistance R varies with time t as Q = at - bt², where a and b are positive cons…
- Two cities are 150 km apart. Electric power is sent from one city to another city through copper wires. The f…
- If voltage across a bulb rated 220 volt-100 watt drops by 2.5% of its rated value, the percentage of the rate…
- An electric kettle takes 4 A current at 220 V. How much time will it take to boil 1 kg of water from temperat…
- A 5 ampere fuse wire can withstand a maximum power of 1 watt in the circuit. The resistance of the fuse wire…
- In India electricity is supplied for domestic use at 220 V. It is supplied at 110 V in USA. If the resistance…
- Fuse wire is a wire of
- Two bulbs are of (40 W, 200 V) and (100 W, 200 V). Then the correct relation for their resistances is
- A 5°C rise in temperature is observed in a conductor by passing a current. When the current is doubled, the r…
- A (100 W, 200 V) bulb is connected to a 160 volt supply. The power consumption would be
- One kilowatt hour is equal to
- A 4 μF capacitor is charged to 400 V. If its plates are joined through a resistance of 2 kΩ, then the heat pr…
- An electric bulb is rated 60 W, 220 V. The resistance of its filament is
- A current of 2 A, passing through a conductor, produces 80 J of heat in 10 seconds. The resistance of the con…
- Six similar bulbs are connected as shown in the figure with a DC source of emf E and zero internal resistance…
- A filament bulb (500 W, 100 V) is to be used in a 230 V main supply. When a resistance R is connected in seri…
- The power dissipated in the circuit shown in the figure is 30 watts. The value of R is
- If the power dissipated in the 9 Ω resistor in the circuit shown is 36 watt, the potential difference across…
- A current of 3 amp flows through the 2 Ω resistor shown in the circuit. The power dissipated in the 5 Ω resis…
- The total power dissipated in watt in the circuit shown here is
- Power dissipated across the 8 Ω resistor in the circuit shown here is 2 watt. The power dissipated in watt un…
- When three identical bulbs of 60 watt, 200 volt rating are connected in series to a 200 volt supply, the powe…
- Two 220 volt, 100 watt bulbs are connected first in series and then in parallel. Each time the combination is…
- An electric kettle has two heating coils. When one of the coils is connected to an a.c. source, the water in…
- Three equal resistors connected in series across a source of e.m.f. together dissipate 10 watt of power. What…
- If two bulbs, whose resistances are in the ratio of 1:2 are connected in series, the power dissipated in them…
- A heating coil is labelled 100 W, 220 V. The coil is cut in half and the two pieces are joined in parallel to…
- 40 electric bulbs are connected in series across a 220 V supply. After one bulb is fused the remaining 39 are…
- A battery of e.m.f 10 V and internal resistance 0.5 Ω is connected across a variable resistance R. The value…
- Two identical batteries each of e.m.f 2 V and internal resistance 1 Ω are available to produce heat in an ext…
- In the circuits shown below, the readings of the voltmeters and the ammeters will be
- A circuit contains an ammeter, a battery of 30 V and a resistance 40.8 ohm, all connected in series. If the a…
- A, B and C are voltmeters of resistance R, 1.5R and 3R respectively, as shown in the figure. When some potent…
- The potential difference (V_A-V_B) between the points A and B in the given figure is
- In the circuit shown the cells A and B have negligible resistances. For V_A=12 V, R₁=500 Ω and R=100 Ω the ga…
- In the circuit shown in the figure, if the potential at point A is taken to be zero, the potential at point B…
- Consider the following two statements. (A) Kirchhoff's junction law follows from the conservation of charge.…
- See the electrical circuit shown in this figure. Which of the following equations is a correct equation for i…
- Kirchhoff's first and second laws of electrical circuits are consequences of
- Kirchhoff's first law, i.e. Σ i=0 at a junction, deals with the conservation of
- The resistance of a wire is R ohm. If it is melted and stretched to n times its original length, its new resi…
- A wire of resistance 4 Ω is stretched to twice its original length. The resistance of stretched wire would be
- A wire of a certain material is stretched slowly by ten percent. Its new resistance and specific resistance b…
- The electric resistance of a certain wire of iron is R. If its length and radius are both doubled, then
- A 6 volt battery is connected to the terminals of a three metre long wire of uniform thickness and resistance…
- Three copper wires of lengths and cross-sectional areas are (l, A), (2l, A/2) and (l/2, 2A). Resistance is mi…
- A wire 50 cm long and 1 mm² in cross-section carries a current of 4 A when connected to a 2 V battery. The re…
- The masses of the wires of copper is in the ratio of 1 : 3 : 5 and their lengths are in the ratio of 5 : 3 :…
- The resistance of a discharge tube is
- From the graph between current (I) and voltage (V) is shown. Identify the portion corresponding to negative r…
- The color code of a resistance is given below. The bands, in order, are Yellow, Violet, Brown and Gold. The v…
- A carbon resistor of (47±4.7) kΩ is to be marked with rings of different colours for its identification. The…
- Identify the set in which all the three materials are good conductors of electricity.
- Which of the following graph represents the variation of resistivity (ρ) with temperature (T) for copper?
- The solids which have the negative temperature coefficient of resistance are
- Specific resistance of a conductor increases with
- Copper and silicon is cooled from 300 K to 60 K, the specific resistance
- Two rods are joined end to end, as shown. Both have a cross-sectional area of 0.01 cm². Each is 1 metre long.…
- Two wires of the same metal have same length, but their cross-sections are in the ratio 3:1. They are joined…
- The resistances of the four arms P, Q, R and S in a Wheatstone's bridge are 10 Ω, 30 Ω, 30 Ω and 90 Ω, respec…
- Three resistances P, Q, R each of 2 Ω and an unknown resistance S form the four arms of a Wheatstone bridge c…
- In the circuit shown, if a conducting wire is connected between points A and B, the current in this wire will
- For the network shown in the figure the value of the current i is
- In a Wheatstone's bridge all the four arms have equal resistance R. If the resistance of the galvanometer arm…
- The resistance of each arm of the Wheatstone's bridge is 10 Ω. A resistance of 10 Ω is connected in series wi…
- The net resistance of the circuit between A and B is
- A resistance wire connected in the left gap of a metre bridge balances a 10 Ω resistance in the right gap at…
- The metre bridge shown is in balance position with P/Q=(l₁)/(l₂). If we now interchange the positions of galv…
- The resistances in the two arms of the meter bridge are 5 Ω and R Ω respectively. When the resistance R is sh…
- In a metre bridge, the balancing length from the left end (standard resistance of one ohm is in the right gap…
- A potentiometer is an accurate and versatile device to make electrical measurements of EMF because the method…
- A potentiometer wire is 100 cm long and a constant potential difference is maintained across it. Two cells ar…
- A potentiometer wire of length L and a resistance r are connected in series with a battery of e.m.f. E₀ and a…
- A potentiometer wire has length 4 m and resistance 8 Ω. The resistance that must be connected in series with…
- A potentiometer circuit has been set up for finding the internal resistance of a given cell. The main battery…
- A potentiometer circuit is set up as shown. The potential gradient, across the potentiometer wire, is k volt/…
- A cell can be balanced against 110 cm and 100 cm of potentiometer wire, respectively without and with being s…
- If specific resistance of a potentiometer wire is 10⁻⁷ Ω m and current flow through it is 0.1 A, cross-sectio…
- The potentiometer is best for measuring voltage, as
- A potentiometer consists of a wire of length 4 m and resistance 10 Ω. It is connected to a cell of e.m.f. 2 V…
- For a metal of work function 6.6 eV, which of the following wavelengths of incident radiation does not give r…
- If φ is the work function of a photosensitive material in eV and light of wavelength of numerical value λ=(hc…
- The work functions of caesium (Cs), potassium (K) and sodium (Na) are 2.14 eV, 2.30 eV and 2.75 eV respective…
- The threshold frequency of a photoelectric metal is u₀. If light of frequency 4 u₀ is incident on this metal,…
- The work function of a photosensitive material is 4.0 eV. The longest wavelength of light that can cause phot…
- When light of frequency 2 u₀ (where u₀ is the threshold frequency) is incident on a metal plate, the maximum…
- The photoelectric threshold wavelength of silver is 3250×10⁻¹⁰ m. The velocity of the electron ejected from a…
- A photoelectric surface is illuminated successively by monochromatic light of wavelength λ and λ/2. If the ma…
- When the energy of the incident radiation is increased by 20%, the kinetic energy of the photoelectrons emitt…
- For photoelectric emission from a certain metal the cut-off frequency is u. If radiation of frequency 2 u imp…
- Two radiations of photon energies 1 eV and 2.5 eV successively illuminate a photosensitive metallic surface o…
- The work function of a surface of a photosensitive material is 6.2 eV. The wavelength of the incident radiati…
- When photons of energy h u fall on an aluminium plate (of work function E₀), photoelectrons of maximum kineti…
- The work functions for metals A, B and C are respectively 1.92 eV, 2.0 eV and 5 eV. According to Einstein's e…
- A photosensitive metallic surface has work function h u₀. If photons of energy 2h u₀ fall on this surface, th…
- The photoelectric work function for a metal surface is 4.125 eV. The cut-off wavelength for this surface is:
- In a photo-emissive cell, with exciting wavelength λ, the fastest electron has speed v. If the exciting wavel…
- When light of wavelength 300 nm falls on a photoelectric emitter, photoelectrons are liberated. For another e…
- The photoelectric work function of a metal is 1 eV. Light of wavelength λ=3000 ångström falls on it. The phot…
- Ultraviolet radiation of 6.2 eV falls on an aluminium surface. The kinetic energy of the fastest electron emi…
- The threshold frequency for the photoelectric effect on sodium corresponds to a wavelength of 5000 ångström.…
- A dipole is placed in an electric field as shown in the figure, with +q on the side where the field lines are…
- Polar molecules are the molecules
- The electric field at a point on the equatorial plane at a distance r from the centre of a dipole having dipo…
- An electric dipole of moment p is placed in an electric field of intensity E. The dipole acquires a position…
- An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30° with an electric field of intensity 2×10⁵ N/C. It experiences…
- Three point charges +q, -2q and +q are placed at the points (x=0, y=a, z=0), (x=0, y=0, z=0) and (x=a, y=0, z…
- An electric dipole of moment p is lying along a uniform electric field E. The work done in rotating the dipol…
- An electric dipole has the magnitude of its charge as q and its dipole moment is p. It is placed in a uniform…
- A point Q lies on the perpendicular bisector of an electric dipole of dipole moment p. If the distance of Q f…
- The formation of a dipole is due to two equal and dissimilar point charges placed at a
- The intensity of the electric field (E) due to a dipole depends on the distance r as
- An electric dipole, consisting of two opposite charges of 2×10⁻⁶ C each separated by a distance 3 cm, is plac…
- A short electric dipole has a dipole moment of 16×10⁻⁹ C m. The electric potential due to the dipole at a poi…
- An electric dipole of dipole moment p is aligned parallel to a uniform electric field E. The energy required…
- An electric dipole of moment p is placed in the position of stable equilibrium in a uniform electric field of…
- In a certain region of space with volume 0.2 m³, the electric potential is found to be 5 V throughout. The ma…
- The electric potential at a point in free space due to charge Q coulomb is Q×10¹¹ volts. The electric field a…
- A conducting sphere of radius R is given a charge Q. The electric potential and the electric field at the cen…
- Four point charges -Q, -q, 2q and 2Q are placed, one at each corner of the square. The relation between Q and…
- Four electric charges +q, +q, -q and -q are placed at the corners of a square of side 2L (see figure). The el…
- Three concentric spherical shells have radii a, b and c (a<b<c) and have surface charge densities σ, -σ and σ…
- A hollow metallic sphere of radius 10 cm is charged such that potential of its surface is 80 V. The potential…
- The diagrams below show regions of equipotentials. A positive charge is moved from A to B in each diagram.
- If potential (in volts) in a region is expressed as V(x,y,z)=6xy-y+2yz, the electric field (in N/C) at point…
- In a region, the potential is represented by V(x,y,z)=6x-8xy-8y+6yz, where V is in volts and x, y, z are in m…
- A, B and C are three points in a uniform electric field. The electric potential is
- The electric potential V at any point (x,y,z), all in metres in space is given by V=4x² volt. The electric fi…
- The electric potential at a point (x,y,z) is given by V=-x²y-xz³+4. The electric field at that point is
- Some charge is being given to a conductor. Then its potential is
- A radioactive nucleus ^A_ZX undergoes spontaneous decay in the sequence ^A_ZX → _Z-1B → _Z-3C → _Z-2D, where…
- What happens to the mass number and atomic number of an element when it emits γ-radiation?
- A radioactive nucleus of mass M emits a photon of frequency u and the nucleus recoils. The recoil energy will…
- A nucleus ^mₙX emits one α-particle and two β⁻ particles. The resulting nucleus is
- The number of beta particles emitted by a radioactive substance is twice the number of alpha particles emitte…
- In the nuclear decay given below ^A_ZX → ^A_Z+1Y → ^A-4_Z-1B^* → ^A-4_Z-1B, the particles emitted in the sequ…
- A nuclear reaction given by ^A_ZX → ^A_Z+1Y + ⁰₋₁e + u represents
- In compound X(n,α)→⁷₃Li, element X is
- A nuclear decay is expressed as ¹¹₆C → ¹¹₅B + β⁺ + X. Then the unknown particle X is
- In one α and 2 β-emissions
- A free neutron decays into a proton, an electron and
- What is the respective number of α and β-particles emitted in the following radioactive decay ²⁰⁰₉₀X → ¹⁶⁸₈₀Y?
- In a given reaction ^A_ZX → ^A_Z+1Y → ^A-4_Z-1K^* → ^A-4_Z-1K, radioactive radiations are emitted in the sequ…
- The nucleus ¹²₆C absorbs an energetic neutron and emits a beta particle (β). The resulting nucleus is
- An element A decays into element C by a two step process A → B + ⁴₂He and B → C + 2e⁻, then
- The nucleus ¹¹⁵₄₈Cd, after two successive β-decay will give
- A nucleus with mass number 240 breaks into two fragments each of mass number 120, the binding energy per nucl…
- When a uranium isotope ²³⁵₉₂U is bombarded with a neutron, it generates ⁸⁹₃₆Kr, three neutrons and
- A nucleus of uranium decays at rest into nuclei of thorium and helium. Then,
- The binding energy per nucleon of ⁷₃Li and ⁴₂He nuclei are 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV, respectively. In the nuclea…
- A certain mass of hydrogen is changed to helium by the process of fusion. The mass defect in fusion reaction…
- Fusion reaction takes place at high temperature because
- The binding energy of deuteron is 2.2 MeV and that of ⁴₂He is 28 MeV. If two deuterons are fused to form one…
- In any fission process the ratio (mass of fission products)/(mass of parent nucleus) is
- In the reaction ²₁H + ³₁H → ⁴₂He + ¹₀n, if the binding energies of ²₁H, ³₁H and ⁴₂He are respectively a, b an…
- If in a nuclear fusion process, the masses of the fusing nuclei be m₁ and m₂ and the mass of the resultant nu…
- Solar energy is mainly caused due to
- When a deuterium is bombarded on ¹⁶₈O nucleus, an α-particle is emitted, then the product nucleus is
- In nuclear fission process, energy is released because
- Nuclear fission can be explained by
- Complete the equation for the following fission process ²³⁵₉₂U + ¹₀n → ⁹⁰₃₈Sr + …
- In a fission reaction, ²³⁶₉₂U → ¹¹⁷X + ¹¹⁷Y + n + n, the binding energy per nucleon of X and Y is 8.5 MeV whe…
- Which of the following is used as a moderator in nuclear reactors ?
- Heavy water is used as a moderator in a nuclear reactor. The function of the moderator is
- If the binding energy per nucleon in ⁷₃Li and ⁴₂He nuclei are respectively 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV, then the en…
- Energy released in the fission of a single ²³⁵₉₂U nucleus is 200 MeV. The fission rate of a ²³⁵₉₂U filled rea…
- Solar energy is due to
- The half-life of a radioactive nuclide is 100 h. The fraction of original activity that will remain after 150…
- The half-life of a radioactive sample undergoing α-decay is 1.4×10¹⁷ s. If the number of nuclei in the sample…
- The rate of radioactive disintegration at an instant for a radioactive sample of half life 2.2×10⁹ s is 10¹⁰…
- α-particle consists of
- For a radioactive material, half-life is 10 minutes. If initially there are 600 number of nuclei, the time ta…
- Radioactive material A has decay constant 8λ and material B has decay constant λ. Initially, they have same n…
- The half-life of a radioactive substance is 30 minutes. The time (in minutes) taken between 40% decay and 85%…
- A radio isotope X with a half life 1.4×10⁹ yr decays to Y which is stable. A sample of the rock from a cave w…
- The half-life of a radioactive isotope X is 20 yr. It decays to another element Y which is stable. The two el…
- A mixture consists of two radioactive materials A₁ and A₂ with half lives of 20 s and 10 s respectively. Init…
- The half-life of a radioactive isotope X is 50 yr. It decays to another element Y which is stable. The two el…
- The activity of a radioactive sample is measured as N₀ counts per minute at t=0 and (N₀)/e counts per minute…
- Two radioactive materials X₁ and X₂ have decay constants 5λ and λ respectively. If initially they have the sa…
- Two radioactive substances A and B have decay constants 5λ and λ respectively. At t=0 they have the same numb…
- In radioactive decay process, the negatively charged emitted β-particles are
- In a radioactive material the activity at time t₁ is R₁ and at a later time t₂, it is R₂. If the decay consta…
- The half-life of radium is about 1600 yr. Of 100 g of radium existing now, 25 g will remain unchanged after
- A sample of radioactive element has a mass of 10 g at an instant t=0. The approximate mass of this element in…
- A sample of radioactive elements contains 4×10¹⁰ active nuclei. If half-life of element is 10 days, then the…
- Half-life of a radioactive substance is 12.5 h and its mass is 256 g. After what time, the amount of remainin…
- Half-life period of a radioactive substance is 6 h. After 24 h activity is 0.01 μCi, what was the initial act…
- Which of the following is positively charged?
- The half-life of a radioactive material is 3 h. If the initial amount is 300 g, then after 18 h, it will rema…
- The relationship between disintegration constant (λ) and half-life (T) will be
- Alpha particles are
- Half-lives of two radioactive substances A and B are respectively 20 min and 40 min. Initially, the samples o…
- The activity of a radioactive sample is measured as 9750 counts/min at t=0 and as 975 counts/min at t=5 min.…
- The most penetrating radiation out of the following is
- The count rate of a Geiger Muller counter for the radiation of a radioactive material of half-life 30 min dec…
- The half-life of radium is 1600 yr. The fraction of a sample of radium that would remain after 6400 yr is
- A radioactive element has half-life period 800 yr. After 6400 yr, what amount will remain ?
- A radioactive sample with a half-life of 1 month has the label : 'Activity = 2 microcurie on 1-8-1991'. What…
- A lens is made up of 3 different transparent media as shown in the figure. A point object O is placed on its…
- An object is mounted on a wall. Its image of equal size is to be obtained on a parallel wall with the help of…
- In the figure shown here, what is the equivalent focal length of the combination of lenses? Assume that all l…
- Two thin lenses are of same focal lengths (F), but one is convex and the other one is concave. When they are…
- A biconvex lens has radii of curvature, 20 cm each. If the refractive index of the material of the lens is 1.…
- A concave mirror of focal length f₁ is placed at a distance of d from a convex lens of focal length f₂. A bea…
- A convex lens A of focal length 20 cm and a concave lens B of focal length 5 cm are kept along the same axis…
- A point object is placed at a distance of 60 cm from a convex lens of focal length 30 cm. If a plane mirror w…
- A plano-convex lens of unknown material and unknown focal length is given. With the help of a spherometer we…
- The power of a biconvex lens is 10 D and the radius of curvature of each surface is 10 cm. Then, the refracti…
- An equi-convex lens has power P. It is cut into two symmetrical halves by a plane containing the principal ax…
- A double convex lens has focal length 25 cm. The radius of curvature of one of the surfaces is doubled of the…
- Two similar thin equi-convex lenses, of focal length f each, are kept co-axially in contact with each other s…
- Two identical glass (μ_g=3/2) equi-convex lenses of focal length f each are kept in contact. The space betwee…
- Two identical thin plano-convex glass lenses (refractive index 1.5) each having radius of curvature of 20 cm…
- A plano-convex lens fits exactly into a plano-concave lens. Their plane surfaces are parallel to each other.…
- When a biconvex lens of glass having refractive index 1.47 is dipped in a liquid, it acts as a plane sheet of…
- A biconvex lens has a radius of curvature of magnitude 20 cm. Which one of the following options describe bes…
- A lens having focal length f and aperture of diameter d forms an image of intensity I. Aperture of diameter d…
- A boy is trying to start a fire by focusing sunlight on a piece of paper using an equiconvex lens of focal le…
- Two thin lenses of focal lengths f₁ and f₂ are in contact and coaxial. The power of the combination is
- A convex lens and a concave lens, each having same focal length of 25 cm, are put in contact to form a combin…
- A convex lens is dipped in a liquid whose refractive index is equal to the refractive index of the lens. Then…
- An equiconvex lens is cut into two halves along (i) XOX' and (ii) YOY' as shown in the figure. Let f, f', f''…
- A body is located on a wall. Its image of equal size is to be obtained on a parallel wall with the help of a…
- A planoconvex lens is made of a material of refractive index μ=1.5. The radius of curvature of curved surface…
- A planoconvex lens is made of material of refractive index 1.6. The radius of curvature of the curved surface…
- A luminous object is placed at a distance of 30 cm from the convex lens of focal length 20 cm. On the other s…
- A convex lens of focal length 80 cm and a concave lens of focal length 50 cm are combined together. What will…
- A lens is placed between a source of light and a wall. It forms images of area A₁ and A₂ on the wall, for its…
- Focal length of a convex lens of refractive index 1.5 is 2 cm. Focal length of lens when immersed in a liquid…
- ε₀ and μ₀ are the electric permittivity and magnetic permeability of free space respectively. If the correspo…
- Which set of colors will come out in air for a situation shown in the figure?
- Light travels a distance x in time t₁ in air and 10x in time t₂ in another denser medium. What is the critica…
- A light ray falls on a glass surface of refractive index √3, at an angle 60°. The angle between the refracted…
- Two transparent media A and B are separated by a plane boundary. The speed of light in those media are 1.5×10…
- Ray optics is valid, when characteristic dimensions are
- If the critical angle for total internal reflection from a medium to vacuum is 45°, then velocity of light in…
- In total internal reflection when the angle of incidence is equal to the critical angle for the pair of media…
- An air bubble in a glass slab with refractive index 1.5 (near normal incidence) is 5 cm deep when viewed from…
- A beam of light consisting of red, green and blue colours is incident on a right angled prism, as shown in th…
- Which of the following is not due to total internal reflection?
- A ray of light travelling in a transparent medium of refractive index μ falls, on a surface separating the me…
- The frequency of a light wave in a material is 2×10¹⁴ Hz and wavelength is 5000 Å. The refractive index of ma…
- A small coin is resting on the bottom of a beaker filled with a liquid. A ray of light from the coin travels…
- A beam of light composed of red and green rays is incident obliquely at a point on the face of a rectangular…
- Transmission of light in optical fibre is due to
- A transparent cube contains a small air bubble. Its apparent distance is 2 cm when seen through one face and…
- Light enters at an angle of incidence in a transparent rod of refractive index μ. For what value of the refra…
- Electromagnetic radiation of frequency u, velocity v and wavelength λ, in air, enters a glass slab of refract…
- One face of a rectangular glass plate 6 cm thick is silvered. An object held 8 cm in front of the first face,…
- Light travels through a glass plate of thickness t and refractive index μ. If c is the speed of light in vacu…
- A point source of light is placed 4 m below the surface of water of refractive index 5/3. The minimum diamete…
- Time taken by sunlight to pass through a window of thickness 4 mm whose refractive index is 3/2, is
- A beam of monochromatic light is refracted from vacuum into a medium of refractive index 1.5. The wavelength…
- A microscope is focussed on a mark on a piece of paper and then a slab of glass of thickness 3 cm and refract…
- The output (Y) of the given logic implementation is similar to the output of an/a
- When the output of an OR gate is applied as input to a NOT gate, then the combination acts as a
- The output Y for the inputs A and B of the given logic circuit is:
- A logic circuit provides the output Y as per the following truth table: A - B - Y; 0 - 0 - 1; 0 - 1 - 0; 1 -…
- The output (Y) of the given logic gate is similar to the output of an/a
- For the following logic circuit, the truth table is
- The given circuit is equivalent to:
- Identify the equivalent logic gate represented by the given circuit. An open switch is 0 and a closed switch…
- The truth table for the given logic circuit is
- For the given circuit, the input digital signals are applied at the terminals A, B and C. What would be the o…
- For the logic circuit shown, the truth table is
- The correct Boolean operation represented by the circuit diagram drawn is
- In the combination of the following gates the output Y can be written in terms of the inputs A and B as
- The given electrical network is equivalent to
- To get output 1 for the following circuit, the correct choice for the input is
- What is the output Y in the following circuit, when all the three inputs A, B, C are first 0 and then 1?
- Which logic gate is represented by the following combination of logic gates?
- The output of a NAND gate is divided into two in parallel and fed to another NAND gate. The resulting gate is…
- The figure shows a logic circuit with two inputs A and B and an output C, together with the voltage waveforms…
- To get an output Y=1 from the circuit shown, which one of the following sets of inputs will be correct?
- The symbolic representations of four logic gates are shown as (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) in the figure. Pick o…
- The device that can act as a complete electronic circuit is
- To get an output Y=1 from the circuit shown, the input must be
- The figure shows a logic gate circuit with two inputs A and B and an output Y, together with the voltage wave…
- The combination of gates shown in the figure produces
- For the circuit shown, which of the following is the correct truth table?
- The figure shows a block with two inputs A and B and an output C, together with the voltage waveforms at all…
- The output of OR gate is 1
- The given truth table is for which logic gate? A - B - Y; 1 - 1 - 0; 0 - 1 - 1; 1 - 0 - 1; 0 - 0 - 1
- The symbol shown, with inputs A and B and output Y, represents
- The following truth table corresponds to the logical gate A - B - Y; 0 - 0 - 0; 0 - 1 - 1; 1 - 0 - 1; 1 - 1 -…
- Two statements are given below. A. When the forward bias voltage across a p-n junction diode increases above…
- The current I in the circuit shown is: (All diodes are ideal and identical)
- In the given circuits (a), (b) and (c), the potential drops across the two p-n junctions are equal in
- In a p-n junction diode, a change in temperature due to heating
- Which one of the following represents a forward biased diode?
- Consider the junction diode as ideal. The value of the current flowing through AB is
- The given circuit has two ideal diodes connected as shown in the figure. The current flowing through the resi…
- A diode D is connected in series with an external resistance R=100 Ω and an emf of 3.5 V. If the barrier pote…
- In forward biasing of a p-n junction
- In the figure, four diode circuits are marked (A), (B), (C) and (D). The diodes which are forward biased are
- Of the diode circuits shown in the figure, the one in which the diode is reverse biased is
- For the given circuit of the p-n junction diode, which one of the following is correct?
- The current in the circuit shown will be
- On connecting a battery the device passes a current, but when the battery is reversed, the current drops to a…
- The diode used in the circuit shown has a constant voltage drop of 0.5 V at all currents and a maximum power…
- A p-n junction is said to be forward biased when
- The figure shows the circuit symbol of a transistor. Select the correct statements given below: (A) The trans…
- The collector current in a common base amplifier using an n-p-n transistor is 24 mA. If 80% of the electrons…
- For transistor action, which of the following statements is correct?
- In the circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage Vᵢ is 20 V, V_BE=0 and V_CE=0. The values of I_B, I_C a…
- In a common emitter transistor amplifier the audio signal voltage across the collector is 3 V. The resistance…
- An n-p-n transistor is connected in common emitter configuration in a given amplifier. A load resistance of 8…
- For a CE transistor amplifier, the audio signal voltage across the collector resistance of 2 kΩ is 4 V. If th…
- The input signal given to a CE amplifier having a voltage gain of 150 is Vᵢ=2 cos (15t+π/3). The correspondin…
- In a common emitter (CE) amplifier having a voltage gain G, the transistor used has transconductance 0.03 mho…
- One way in which the operation of an n-p-n transistor differs from that of a p-n-p transistor is
- In a CE transistor amplifier, the audio signal voltage across the collector resistance of 2 kΩ is 2 V. If the…
- The input resistance of a silicon transistor is 100 Ω. The base current is changed by 40 μA, which results in…
- A transistor is operated in common emitter configuration at V_C=2 V such that a change in the base current fr…
- A common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain of 50, an input impedance of 100 Ω and an output impedance of 2…
- For transistor action: (1) Base, emitter and collector regions should have similar size and doping concentrat…
- A transistor is operated in common-emitter configuration at V_C=2 V such that a change in the base current fr…
- The voltage gain of an amplifier with 9% negative feedback is 10. The voltage gain without feedback will be
- A transistor is operated in common emitter configuration at a constant collector voltage V_C=1.5 V such that…
- A n-p-n transistor conducts when
- For a transistor (I_C)/(I_E)=0.96, then current gain for common emitter is
- For a common base circuit if (I_C)/(I_E)=0.98 then current gain for common emitter circuit will be
- The correct relation for α, β for a transistor
- The correct relationship between the two current gains α and β in a transistor is
- When npn transistor is used as an amplifier, then
- When a triode is used as an amplifier, the electrons are emitted by
- The part of the transistor which is heavily doped to produce large number of majority carriers is
- For amplification by a triode, the signal to be amplified is given to
- For an electronic valve, the plate current I and plate voltage V in the space charge limited region are relat…
- To use a transistor as an amplifier
- In a common base amplifier the phase difference between the input signal voltage and the output voltage is
- When a triode is used as an amplifier the phase difference between the input signal voltage and the output is
- Radiowaves of constant amplitude can be generated with
- Two slits in Young's double slit experiment are 1.5 mm apart and the screen is placed at a distance of 1 m fr…
- Two coherent sources of light interfere and produce fringe pattern on a screen. For central maximum, the phas…
- In Young's double slit experiment, if the separation between coherent sources is halved and the distance of t…
- In a Young's double slit experiment, if there is no initial phase-difference between the light from the two s…
- In a double slit experiment, when light of wavelength 400 nm was used, the angular width of the first minima…
- In Young's double slit experiment, the separation d between the slits is 2 mm, the wavelength λ of the light…
- Young's double slit experiment is first performed in air and then in a medium other than air. It is found tha…
- The intensity at the maximum in a Young's double slit experiment is I₀. Distance between two slits is d=5λ, w…
- The interference pattern is obtained with two coherent light sources of intensity ratio n. In the interferenc…
- Two slits in Young's experiment have widths in the ratio 1:25. The ratio of intensity at the maxima and minim…
- In the Young's double-slit experiment, the intensity of light at a point on the screen (where the path differ…
- In Young's double slit experiment, the slits are 2 mm apart and are illuminated by photons of two wavelengths…
- Colours of thin soap bubbles are due to
- For Young's double slit experiment, two statements are given below : Statement I : If screen is moved away fr…
- If the screen is moved away from the plane of the slits in a Young's double slit experiment, then the :
- In a Young's double slit experiment, a student observes 8 fringes in a certain segment of screen when a monoc…